2007 buick terraza owner manual m - gm extended warranty the

Seats and Restraint Systems ....................... 7Front Seats .............................................. 9Rear Seats ............................................. 16Safety Belts ............................................ 26Child Restraints ...................................... 49Airbag System ........................................ 76Restraint System Check ......................... 93

Features and Controls ................................ 95Keys ....................................................... 97Doors and Locks .................................. 106Windows ............................................... 121Theft-Deterrent Systems ....................... 123Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ..... 128Mirrors .................................................. 143OnStar® System ................................... 145Universal Home Remote System .......... 147Storage Areas ...................................... 158

Instrument Panel ....................................... 167Instrument Panel Overview ................... 170Climate Controls ................................... 193

Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicators .......................................... 207

Driver Information Center (DIC) ............ 223Audio System(s) ................................... 258

Driving Your Vehicle ................................. 345Your Driving, the Road, and Your

Vehicle .............................................. 346Towing ................................................. 384

Service and Appearance Care .................. 397Service ................................................. 400Fuel ...................................................... 402Checking Things Under the Hood ......... 408Bulb Replacement ................................ 443Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ... 447Tires ..................................................... 449Appearance Care .................................. 487Vehicle Identification ............................. 496Electrical System .................................. 496Capacities and Specifications ................ 503

2007 Buick Terraza Owner Manual M

1

Maintenance Schedule .............................. 505Maintenance Schedule .......................... 506

Customer Assistance Information ............. 525Customer Assistance and Information ... 526Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 543

Index .......................................................... 547

2

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,BUICK, and the BUICK Emblem and thename TERRAZA are registered trademarksof General Motors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information atthe time it was printed. We reserve the rightto make changes after that time without notice.For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitutethe name “General Motors of Canada Limited”for Buick Motor Division whenever it appearsin this manual.

This manual describes features that may beavailable in this model, but your vehicle may notbe equipped with all of them. For example,more than one entertainment system may beoffered or your vehicle may have been orderedwithout a front passenger or rear seats.

Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be thereif it is needed while you are on the road. If thevehicle is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can beobtained from your dealer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 15869249 A First Printing ©2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

3

How to Use This ManualMany people read the owner manual frombeginning to end when they first receive their newvehicle. If this is done, it can help you learnabout the features and controls for the vehicle.Pictures and words work together in theowner manual to explain things.

IndexA good place to quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manualand the page number where it can be found.

Safety Warnings and SymbolsThere are a number of safety cautions in thisbook. We use a box and the word CAUTION totell about things that could hurt you if you were toignore the warning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that couldhurt you or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.Then we tell you what to do to help avoid orreduce the hazard. Please read these cautions. Ifyou do not, you or others could be hurt.

You will also find acircle with a slashthrough it in this book.This safety symbolmeans “Do Not,” “DoNot do this” or “Do Notlet this happen.”

4

Vehicle Damage WarningsAlso, in this manual you will find these notices:

Notice: These mean there is somethingthat could damage your vehicle.

A notice tells about something that can damagethe vehicle. Many times, this damage would not becovered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it couldbe costly. But the notice will tell what to do to helpavoid the damage.

When you read other manuals, you might seeCAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colorsor in different words.

There are also warning labels on the vehicle. Theyuse the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols are shown alongwith the text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specific component,control, message, gage, or indicator.

If you need help figuring out a specific name of acomponent, gage, or indicator, reference thefollowing topics:

• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1

• Features and Controls in Section 2

• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3

• Climate Controls in Section 3

• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators inSection 3

• Audio System(s) in Section 3

• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

5

These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:

6

Front Seats ..................................................... 9Manual Passenger Seat ................................ 9Power Seats ................................................. 9Heated Seats .............................................. 10Memory Seat .............................................. 10Reclining Seatbacks .................................... 12Head Restraints .......................................... 15

Rear Seats .................................................... 16Rear Seat Operation ................................... 16Captain Chairs ............................................ 16Third Row Seat ........................................... 21

Safety Belts .................................................. 26Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 26Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................. 30How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 31Driver Position ............................................. 31Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment ................. 40Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 41Right Front Passenger Position ................... 41Rear Seat Passengers ................................ 42

Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ................ 45Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 48Safety Belt Extender ................................... 48

Child Restraints ............................................ 49Older Children ............................................. 49Infants and Young Children ......................... 52Child Restraint Systems .............................. 55Where to Put the Restraint .......................... 60Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH) .................................... 61Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear

Seat Position ........................................... 69Securing a Child Restraint in the Right

Front Seat Position .................................. 72Airbag System .............................................. 76

Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 79When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 81What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 83How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 84What Will You See After an Airbag

Inflates? ................................................... 84

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

7

Passenger Sensing System ......................... 86Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 91Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......................... 92

Restraint System Check ............................... 93Checking the Restraint Systems .................. 93Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ........................................... 94

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

8

Front Seats

Manual Passenger Seat

Use the lever located onthe front of the seat toadjust the seatforward or rearward.Pull up on the lever tounlock the seat.Slide the seat to whereyou want it andrelease the lever.

To make sure the seat is locked into place, try tomove the seat back and forth with your body.

Power Seats

If the vehicle has powerseats, the controls usedto operate them arelocated on the outboardside of the seats.

To adjust the seat, do any of the following:

• Move the seat forward or rearward by slidingthe control forward or rearward.

• Raise or lower the front part of the seatcushion by moving the front of the control upor down.

• Raise or lower the rear part of the seatcushion by moving the rear of the control upor down.

9

Heated SeatsYour vehicle may have this feature. If it does, theheated seat buttons are located on the climatecontrol panel.

This feature will heat the lower cushions of thedriver’s and front passenger’s seats.

Press this button onceto turn the heated seaton to the high setting.

Both indicator lights next to the heated seatsymbol will be lit to indicate that it is on the highsetting. Press the button a second time to go to thelow setting. One indicator will be lit. Press thebutton a third time to turn the heated seat off.

This feature will turn off automatically when theignition is turned off.

Memory Seat

If your vehicle has thisfeature, the controls forthe memory functionare located on thedriver’s door.

These buttons are used to program and recallmemory settings for the driver’s seating position.The settings for these features can bepersonalized for both driver 1 and driver 2.Driver 1 or driver 2 corresponds to the memorybuttons labeled 1 and 2 on the driver’s door and tothe numbers, 1 or 2, on the back of the remotekeyless entry transmitters.

Driver’s Side Buttonshown, Passenger’s

Side similar

10

To store the memory settings, do the following:

1. Adjust the driver’s seat to your preference.

2. Press and hold the 1 or 2 button of thememory control for three seconds. Adouble chime will sound to let you know thatthe position has been stored.

To repeat the procedure for a second driver,follow the preceding steps, but press the othernumbered memory control button.

To recall the memory settings, press and releasebutton 1 or 2 while the vehicle is in PARK (P).A single chime will sound and the memory positionwill be recalled.

To stop recall movement of the memory seatfeature at any time, press one of the memorybuttons or power seat controls.

Easy Exit SeatThe control for the easy exit seat function islocated on the driver’s door below the memorybuttons 1 and 2. The easy exit seat button is usedto program and recall the desired driver’s seatposition when exiting/entering the vehicle. The seatposition can be personalized for both driver 1and driver 2.

To store the easy exit seat position fordriver 1 or 2, do the following:

1. Press and release the 1 or 2 button of thememory control. The seat will move to thestored memory position.

2. Adjust the seat to the desired exit position.

3. Press and hold the easy exit seat buttonfor three seconds. A double chime willsound to let you know that the position hasbeen stored for the identified driver 1 or 2.

To repeat the procedure for a second driver,follow the preceding steps, but press the othernumbered memory control button.

To recall the easy exit seat position, press theeasy exit seat button on the memory control whilethe vehicle is in PARK (P). A single chime willsound and the seat will move to the storedexit position.

If an easy exit seat position has not been stored,the default position is all the way rearward.

11

Reclining Seatbacks

Manual Reclining Seatbacks

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if youtry to adjust a manual driver’s seat whilethe vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull on theseatback to be sure it is locked.

If your seats have manual reclining seatbacks, thelever used to operate them is located on theoutboard side of the seat(s).

12

To recline the seatback, do the following:

1. Lift the recline lever.

2. Move the seatback to the desired position,then release the lever to lock the seatbackin place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure itis locked.

To return the seatback to an upright position, dothe following:

1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure tothe seatback and the seatback will return tothe upright position.

2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure itis locked.

13

Power Reclining Seatbacks

If your seats havepower recliningseatbacks, use thevertical powerseat control located onthe outboard side ofthe seat(s).

• To recline the seatback, press the controltoward the rear of the vehicle.

• To raise the seatback, press the controltoward the front of the vehicle.

14

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when yourvehicle is in motion can be dangerous.Even if you buckle up, your safety beltscannot do their job when you are reclinedlike this.The shoulder belt cannot do its jobbecause it will not be against your body.Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crash,you could go into it, receiving neck or otherinjuries.The lap belt cannot do its job either. In acrash, the belt could go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at your pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries.For proper protection when the vehicle isin motion, have the seatback upright. Thensit well back in the seat and wear yoursafety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle ismoving.

Head Restraints

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of therestraint is at the same height as the top ofthe occupant’s head. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.The height of the head restraints can be adjustedon the first and second row seats. Pull thehead restraint up or push it down to adjust it.The head restraints on the third row seat cannotbe adjusted.

15

Rear Seats

Rear Seat OperationThe rear seats in your vehicle have levers andstraps used to adjust, remove, and reinstallthe seats. By using the levers and straps in thecorrect order, you can easily remove the seatsfrom the vehicle. If your vehicle has second rowcaptain chairs with airbags, the seats cannotbe removed.

When you put the seats back in the vehicle, followthe label on the back of the seat for proper location.

Captain ChairsYour vehicle has second row captain chairs thatcan be adjusted forward or rearward as wellas seatbacks that can be adjusted.

Adjusting the Captain Chairs Forwardor RearwardThere are two manual adjustment bars on eachseat. One is located under the front of theseat cushion. The other one is located under therear of the seat cushion.

Lift either bar to slide the seat forward or rearward.Release the lever. Push and pull on the seat tomake sure it is locked into place.

Folding or Reclining the Seatbacks

{CAUTION:


16

To recline the seatback, lift up on the reclinerlever located on the outboard side of the seat, thenmove the seatback to the desired position.

To raise the seatback, lift up on the recliner leverwithout applying pressure to the seatback.Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it islocked in place.

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may cause damage to theseat or the safety belts. Always unbucklethe safety belts and return them to their normalstowed position before folding a rear seat.

To fold the seatback forward, lift up fully on therecliner lever. Push the seatback forward untilit is flat.

The armrests can be lowered or raised for easierentry or exit of the vehicle.

17

Removing a Captain Chair(without a Side Impact Airbag)If your vehicle has captain chairs with side impactairbags, the seats cannot be removed.

To remove a captain chair, do the following:

1. Pull the nylon strap behind the seat to releasethe rear hooks from the floor pins.

2. The seat can then be lifted off the front floorpins and removed from the vehicle.

18

Installing a Captain Chair(without a Side Impact Airbag)

{CAUTION:


{CAUTION:

A seat that is not locked into placeproperly can move around in a collision orsudden stop. People in the vehicle couldbe injured. Be sure to lock the seat intoplace properly when installing it.

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is improperly routed, notproperly attached, or twisted will notprovide the protection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After installing the seat,always check to be sure that the safetybelts are properly routed and attached,and are not twisted.

Do not put the seats in so they face rearwardbecause they will not latch that way. For thesecond row, if you want more storage room behindthe seat, adjust the seat by sliding it forward.

Make sure the seatbacks are in the uprightposition, the seat belts are on the correct side ofthe seats and the seats are in the full rear positionbefore beginning this procedure.

19

To install a captain chair, do the following:

1. Hook the front latches over the front floor pins.

2. Push the rear of the seat down to lock therear latches onto the rear set of floor pins.

3. Push and pull on the seat to be sure it isproperly attached.

20

Third Row SeatYour vehicle may have a third row seat. It is a fullbench seat and may come with the conveniencecenter. See Convenience Center on page 164for more information. The third row seat can beremoved and replaced, or with the seatbackfolded, it will lie flat with the convenience center.

Folding the Seatback(s)

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may cause damage to theseat or the safety belts. Always unbucklethe safety belts and return them to their normalstowed position before folding a rear seat. To fold down either side of the 50/50 split bench

seat, lift the lever located on the back of the seatyou want to fold, and push the seatback down.

21

Returning the Seatback to an UprightPosition

{CAUTION:


To raise the seatback, do the following:

1. Move the second row seat completely forwardby using the manual adjustment bar undereither the front or rear of the seat cushion.

2. Open the liftgate.

3. From the rear of the vehicle, locate thepullstrap attached to the lever on the back ofthe seat and pull it to raise the seat.

4. Push and pull on the seatback to make surethat it is locked into place.

22

Removing the Third Row Seat1. Remove the convenience center, if equipped.

See Convenience Center on page 164 formore information.

2. Make sure all items are off the seat.


3. Put the seatback in its folded position beforeremoving the seat. See “Folding theSeatback(s)” earlier in this section. 4. From behind the seat, squeeze the release

handle until the pin indicators are fully out.This indicates that the rear latches arereleased from the floor. For ease of removingthe seat, squeeze the handle with the palmof your hand up.

5. Lift the seat slightly from the floor to ensurethe latches are clear of the floor pins.

6. Pull the seat rearward and out of the vehicle.The release handle can be used to carrythe seat.

23

Installing the Third Row Seat

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is improperly routed, notproperly attached, or twisted will notprovide the protection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After installing the seat,always check to be sure that the safetybelts are properly routed and attached,and are not twisted.

Do not put the third row seat in so it facesrearward because it will not latch that way. Theseat needs to be installed before the conveniencecenter. See Convenience Center on page 164for more information.


For ease of installing the seat, put the seat in thefolded position before beginning this procedure.

1. From the rear of the vehicle, place thefront hooks of the seat onto the front floor pinsin the third row. To do this, the seat willneed to be angled approximately 8-10 inches(20-25 cm) from the floor so the fronthooks clear the rear floor pins and rear floorcups. Use the release handle to guide the seatinto place.If the front hooks are not attached correctly,the rear latches will not attach to the rear set offloor pins.

2. Firmly push the rear latches into the rear floorpins by pushing down on the rear of the seat.

24

{CAUTION:

A seat that is not locked into placeproperly can move around in a collision orsudden stop. People in the vehicle couldbe injured. Be sure to lock the seat intoplace properly when installing it.

3. Try to raise the seat to make sure that it islocked down. The indicator pins will nolonger stick out when the seat is properlylatched into place.

{CAUTION:


4. Return the seatback to its upright position.See “Returning the Seatback to an UprightPosition” earlier in this section.

25

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to usesafety belts properly. It also tells you some thingsyou should not do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Do not let anyone ride where he or shecannot wear a safety belt properly. If youare in a crash and you are not wearing asafety belt, your injuries can be muchworse. You can hit things inside thevehicle or be ejected from it. You can beseriously injured or killed. In the samecrash, you might not be, if you arebuckled up. Always fasten your safetybelt, and check that your passengers’belts are fastened properly too.

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in these areasare more likely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts. Be sureeveryone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has indicators to remind you andyour passengers to buckle your safety belts. SeeSafety Belt Reminder Light on page 209 andPassenger Safety Belt Reminder Light onpage 210.

In most states and in all Canadian provinces, thelaw says to wear safety belts. Here is why:They work.

26

You never know if you will be in a crash. If you dohave a crash, you do not know if it will be abad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can beso serious that even buckled up, a personwould not survive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, people who buckle upcan survive and sometimes walk away. Withoutbelts they could have been badly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safety belts invehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashesbuckling up does matter... a lot!

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fastas it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just aseat on wheels.

27

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. Therider does not stop.

28

The person keeps going until stopped bysomething. In a real vehicle, it could be thewindshield...

or the instrument panel...

29

or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicledoes. You get more time to stop. You stopover more distance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safety beltsmake such good sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after anaccident if I am wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing asafety belt or not. But you can unbuckle asafety belt, even if you are upside down. Andyour chance of being conscious during andafter an accident, so you can unbuckle and getout, is much greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should Ihave to wear safety belts?

A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will bein most of them in the future. But they aresupplemental systems only; so they work withsafety belts — not instead of them. Everyairbag system ever offered for sale hasrequired the use of safety belts. Even if youare in a vehicle that has airbags, you still haveto buckle up to get the most protection. Thatis true not only in frontal collisions, butespecially in side and other collisions.

30

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive farfrom home, why should I wear safetybelts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you arein an accident — even one that is not yourfault — you and your passengers can be hurt.Being a good driver does not protect youfrom things beyond your control, such as baddrivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)of home. And the greatest number ofserious injuries and deaths occur at speeds ofless than 40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. And thereare different rules for smaller children and babies.If a child will be riding in your vehicle, seeOlder Children on page 49 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 52. Follow those rules foreveryone’s protection.

First, you will want to know which restraintsystems your vehicle has.

We will start with the driver position.

Driver Position

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how towear it properly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. Tosee how, see “Seats” in the Index.

31

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull thebelt across you very quickly. If this happens,let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across you more slowly.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until itclicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure. If the belt is not long enough,see Safety Belt Extender on page 48.

Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to theheight that is right for you. Improper shoulderbelt height adjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. SeeShoulder Belt Height Adjustment on page 40.

6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder belt.

32

It may be necessary to pull stitching on thesafety belt through the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. Ina crash, this applies force to the strong pelvicbones. And you would be less likely to slide underthe lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt wouldapply force at your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder and across thechest. These parts of the body are best ableto take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop orcrash.

33

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not givenearly as much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

34


A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearlyas much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your lap beltis too loose. In a crash, you could slideunder the lap belt and apply force at yourabdomen. This could cause serious oreven fatal injuries. The lap belt should beworn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs.

35


A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In acrash, the belt would go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at the pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries. Always buckleyour belt into the buckle nearest you.

36


A: The belt is over an armrest.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your beltgoes over an armrest like this. The beltwould be much too high. In a crash, youcan slide under the belt. The belt forcewould then be applied at the abdomen,not at the pelvic bones, and that couldcause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure thebelt goes under the armrests.

37


A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. Itshould be worn over the shoulder at alltimes.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wearthe shoulder belt under your arm. In acrash, your body would move too farforward, which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, the beltwould apply too much force to the ribs,which are not as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injureinternal organs like your liver or spleen.

38


A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twistedbelt. In a crash, you would not have thefull width of the belt to spread impactforces. If a belt is twisted, make it straightso it can work properly, or ask your dealerto fix it.

39

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.The belt should go back out of the way.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is outof the way. If you slam the door on it, you candamage both the belt and your vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height AdjustmentBefore you begin to drive, move the shoulder beltheight adjuster to the height that is right for you.

Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion ofthe belt is centered on your shoulder. Thebelt should be away from your face and neck, butnot falling off your shoulder. Incorrect positioningof the shoulder belt can reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt.

To move it down, pushdown on the button (A)and move the heightadjuster to the desiredposition. You canmove the heightadjuster up by pushingup on the shoulderbelt guide.

After you move the height adjuster to where youwant it, try to move it down without pushingthe button down to make sure it has locked intoposition.

40

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likelyto be seriously injured if they do not wearsafety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulderbelt, and the lap portion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding, throughout thepregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, itis more likely that the fetus will not be hurtin a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,the key to making safety belts effective is wearingthem properly.

Right Front Passenger PositionTo learn how to wear the right front passenger’ssafety belt properly, see Driver Position onpage 31.

The right front passenger’s safety belt works thesame way as the driver’s safety belt — exceptfor one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portionof the belt out all the way, you will engage thechild restraint locking feature which may turn offthe passenger’s frontal airbag. If this happens, justlet the belt go back all the way and start again.

41

Rear Seat PassengersIt is very important for rear seat passengers tobuckle up! Accident statistics show that unbeltedpeople in the rear seat are hurt more often incrashes than those who are wearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who are not safety beltedcan be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. Andthey can strike others in the vehicle who arewearing safety belts.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts.Here is how to wear one properly.

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pullthe belt across you more slowly.

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until itclicks.

42

Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure.When the shoulder belt is pulled out all theway, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all theway and start again.If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 48.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder part.

43

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. Ina crash, this applies force to the strong pelvicbones. And you would be less likely to slide underthe lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt wouldapply force at your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder and across thechest. These parts of the body are best ableto take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or acrash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out ofthe retractor.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

44

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.

Rear Safety Belt Comfort GuidesRear shoulder belt comfort guides may provideadded safety belt comfort for older childrenwho have outgrown booster seats and for someadults. When installed on a shoulder belt, thecomfort guide positions the belt away fromthe neck and head.

There is one guide for each second row passengerposition. If your vehicle has a third row, there isone guide for each outboard position. Here is howto install a comfort guide to the shoulder belt:

1. Remove the guide from its storage pocket onthe side of the seatback.

45

2. Place the guide over the belt and insert thetwo edges of the belt into the slots of theguide.

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it liesflat. The elastic cord must be under the beltand the guide on top.

46

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is not properly wornmay not provide the protection needed ina crash. The person wearing the beltcould be seriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder andacross the chest. These parts of the bodyare best able to take belt restrainingforces.

4. Buckle, position, and release the safety beltas described in Rear Seat Passengers onpage 42. Make sure that the shoulderbelt crosses the shoulder.

To remove and store the comfort guide, squeezethe belt edges together so that you can takethem out of the guide. Slide the guide into thestorage pocket.

47

Safety Belt PretensionersYour vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for thedriver and right front passenger. Although youcannot see them, they are located on the retractorpart of the safety belts. They help the safetybelts reduce a person’s forward movement in amoderate to severe frontal or near frontal crash.

Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in acrash, you will need to get new ones, andprobably other new parts for your safety beltsystem. See Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash on page 94.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealerwill order you an extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, sothe extender will be long enough for you. Tohelp avoid personal injury, do not let someone elseuse it, and use it only for the seat it is made tofit. The extender has been designed for adults.Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it,just attach it to the regular safety belt. Formore information see the instruction sheet thatcomes with the extender.

48

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seatsshould wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safetybelts?

A: If possible, an older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get the additionalrestraint a shoulder belt can provide. Theshoulder belt should not cross the faceor neck. The lap belt should fit snugly belowthe hips, just touching the top of the thighs. Itshould never be worn over the abdomen,which could cause severe or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Accident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear seat.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up canstrike other people who are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Older children needto use safety belts properly.

49

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the samebelt. The belt can not properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the two childrencan be crushed together and seriouslyinjured. A belt must be used by onlyone person at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulderbelt, but the child is so small that theshoulder belt is very close to the child’sface or neck?

A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to awindow, move the child toward the center ofthe vehicle. If the child is sitting in a centerrear seat position, move the child toward thesafety belt buckle. In either case, be surethat the shoulder belt still is on the child’sshoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upperbody would have the restraint that beltsprovide. If the child is sitting in a rear outboardposition, see Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides on page 45.

50

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part isbehind the child. If the child wears thebelt in this way, in a crash the child mightslide under the belt. The belt’s forcewould then be applied right on the child’sabdomen. That could cause serious orfatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the beltshould be worn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the child’s thighs. This applies belt forceto the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.

51

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! Thisincludes infants and all other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age and size of thetraveler changes the need, for everyone, to usesafety restraints. In fact, the law in every statein the United States and in every Canadianprovince says children up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safety belts.

Every time infants and young children ride invehicles, they should have the protection providedby appropriate restraints. Young children shouldnot use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,unless there is no other choice. Instead, they needto use a child restraint.

{CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in theirarms while riding in a vehicle. A babydoes not weigh much — until a crash.During a crash a baby will become soheavy it is not possible to hold it. Forexample, in a crash at only 25 mph(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby willsuddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) forceon a person’s arms. A baby should besecured in an appropriate restraint.

52

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protection foradults and older children, but not for

CAUTION: (Continued)


young children and infants. Neither thevehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Youngchildren and infants need the protectionthat a child restraint system can provide.

53

Q: What are the different types of add-onchild restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased bythe vehicle’s owner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particular restraint shouldtake into consideration not only the child’sweight, height, and age but also whether or notthe restraint will be compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of child restraints, thereare many different models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, be sure it isdesigned to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,the restraint will have a label saying that itmeets federal motor vehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructionsthat come with the restraint state the weightand height limitations for a particular childrestraint. In addition, there are many kinds ofrestraints available for children with specialneeds.

{CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck.This is necessary because a newborninfant’s neck is weak and its head weighsso much compared with the rest of itsbody. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facingseat settles into the restraint, so the crashforces can be distributed across thestrongest part of an infant’s body, theback and shoulders. Infants alwaysshould be secured in appropriate infantrestraints.

54

{CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child isquite unlike that of an adult or older child,for whom the safety belts are designed. Ayoung child’s hip bones are still so smallthat the vehicle’s regular safety belt maynot remain low on the hip bones, as itshould. Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child’s abdomen. In a crash, the beltwould apply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure. Thisalone could cause serious or fatal injuries.Young children always should be securedin appropriate child restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for usein a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint systemdesigned to restrain or position a child on acontinuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’shead rests toward the center of the vehicle.

55

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint withthe seating surface against the back of theinfant. The harness system holds the infant inplace and, in a crash, acts to keep the infantpositioned in the restraint.

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraintfor the child’s body with the harness and alsosometimes with surfaces such as T-shapedor shelf-like shields.

56

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designedto improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety beltsystem. Some booster seats have a shoulder beltpositioner, and some high-back booster seatshave a five-point harness. A booster seat can alsohelp a child to see out the window.

Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?

A: A child restraint system is any device designedfor use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, orposition children. A built-in child restraintsystem is a permanent part of the motorvehicle. An add-on child restraint system is aportable one, which is purchased by thevehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, anadd-on child restraint must be secured inthe vehicle. With built-in or add-on childrestraints, the child has to be secured withinthe child restraint.

When choosing an add-on child restraint, besure the child restraint is designed to beused in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a labelsaying that it meets federal motor vehiclesafety standards. Then follow the instructionsfor the restraint. You may find theseinstructions on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both.

57

Securing an Add-on Child Restraint inthe Vehicle

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle. Make surethe child restraint is properly installed inthe vehicle using the vehicle’s safety beltor LATCH system, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury, the childrestraint must be secured in the vehicle. Childrestraint systems must be secured in vehicle seatsby lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulderbelt, or by the LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) onpage 61 for more information. A child canbe endangered in a crash if the child restraint isnot properly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on child restraint, refer tothe instructions that come with the restraintwhich may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet,or both, and to this manual. The child restraintinstructions are important, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacement copy from themanufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

58

Securing the Child Within the ChildRestraintThere are several systems for securing the childwithin the child restraint. One system, thethree-point harness, has straps that come downover each of the infant’s shoulders and buckletogether at the crotch. The five-point harnesssystem has two shoulder straps, two hip straps, anda crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hipstraps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps thatare attached to a flat pad which rests low againstthe child’s body.

A shelf- or armrest-type shield has straps that areattached to a wide, shelf-like shield that swings upor to the side.

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child is not properlysecured in the child restraint. Make surethe child is properly secured, followingthe instructions that came with thatrestraint.

Because there are different systems, it is importantto refer to the instructions that come with therestraint. A child can be endangered in a crash ifthe child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

59

Where to Put the RestraintAccident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. We recommend that child restraints besecured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in arear-facing infant seat, a child riding in aforward-facing child seat and an older child riding ina booster seat.

Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sunvisor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat in thefront.” This is because the risk to the rear-facingchild is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This is



because the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag(if equipped) under certain conditions, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommend thatrear-facing child restraints be secured inthe rear seat, even if the airbag is off.

If you need to secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front seat, alwaysmove the front passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to secure the childrestraint in a rear seat.

60

Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure tosecure the child restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraintcan move around in a collision or suddenstop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint in yourvehicle — even when no child is in it.

Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH)The LATCH system holds a child restraint duringdriving or in a crash. This system is designedto make installation of a child restraint easier. TheLATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle andattachments on the child restraint that are made foruse with the LATCH system

Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraintis properly installed using the anchors, or usethe vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,following the instructions that came with thatrestraint, and also the instructions in this manual.When installing a child restraint with a toptether, you must also use either the lower anchorsor the safety belts to properly secure the childrestraint. A child restraint must never be installedusing only the top tether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,you need a child restraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraint manufacturer willprovide you with instructions on how to usethe child restraint and its attachments. Thefollowing explains how to attach a child restraintwith these attachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraintshave lower anchors and attachments or toptether anchors and attachments.

61

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into thevehicle. There are two lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that will accommodate achild restraint with lower attachments (B).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the childrestraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B)on the child restraint connects to the top tetheranchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forwardmovement and rotation of the child restraintduring driving or in a crash.

Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) ora dual tether (C). Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the top tether to theanchor.

62

Some child restraints that have a top tether aredesigned for use with or without the top tetherbeing attached. Others require the top tetheralways to be attached. In Canada, the law requiresthat forward-facing child restraints have a toptether, and that the tether be attached. Inthe United States, some child restraints also havea top tether. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions for your child restraint.

If the child restraint does not have a top tether,one can be obtained, in kit form, for manychild restraints. Ask the child restraintmanufacturer whether or not a kit is available.

Lower Anchor and Top Tether AnchorLocations

i (Top Tether Anchor):Seating positions withtop tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor):Seating positions withtwo lower anchors.

Second Row

63

i (Top Tether Anchor):Seating positions withtop tether anchors.

Each seating positionwith lower anchors hastwo labels, near thecrease betweenthe seatback and theseat cushion, showingwhere the anchorsare located.

For the second row seating positions, the toptether anchors are located on the seatback, nearthe base of each seat. Be sure to use ananchor located on the same side of the vehicle asthe seating position where the child restraintwill be placed.

Third Row

64

For the center third row position, if your vehiclehas one, the top tether anchor is located onthe seatback, near the center of the third rowseating position. This anchor can accommodateonly one top tether.

Do not secure a child restraint in the right frontpassenger’s position or in the third row outboardpositions, if your vehicle has one, if a nationalor local law requires that the top tether beattached, or if the instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tether must beattached. There is no place to attach the top tetherin this position.

Accident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 60for additional information.

Second Row

Third Row

65

Securing a Child Restraint Designed forthe LATCH System

{CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint is notattached to anchors, the restraint will notbe able to protect the child correctly. In acrash, the child could be seriously injuredor killed. Make sure that a LATCH-typechild restraint is properly installed usingthe anchors, or use the vehicle’s safetybelts to secure the restraint, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

{CAUTION:

Each top tether anchor and lower anchorin the vehicle is designed to hold only onechild restraint. Attaching more than onechild restraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachment to comeloose or even break during a crash. Achild or others could be injured if thishappens. To help prevent injury to peopleand damage to your vehicle, attach onlyone child restraint per anchor.

66

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Secure any unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pull theshoulder belt all the way out of theretractor to set the lock, if your vehiclehas one, after the child restraint has beeninstalled. Be sure to follow theinstructions of the child restraintmanufacturer.

Notice: Contact between the child restraint orthe LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’ssafety belt assembly may cause damage tothese parts. Make sure when securing unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint thatthere is no contact between the child restraintor the LATCH attachment parts and thevehicle’s safety belt assembly.

Folding an empty rear seat with the safetybelts secured may cause damage to the safetybelt or the seat. When removing the childrestraint, always remember to return the safetybelts to their normal, stowed position beforefolding the rear seat.

1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments tothe lower anchors. If the child restraint doesnot have lower attachments or the desiredseating position does not have lower anchors,secure the child restraint with the top tetherand the safety belts. Refer to your childrestraint manufacturer instructions and theinstructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desiredseating position.

1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.1.3. Attach and tighten the lower

attachments on the child restraint to thelower anchors.

67

2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommendsthat the top tether be attached, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor,if equipped. Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.2.2. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether

according to your child restraintinstructions and the followinginstructions:

If the position you areusing does not have ahead restraint andyou are using a singletether, route thetether over theseatback.

If the position you areusing does not have ahead restraint andyou are using a dualtether, route thetether over theseatback.

If the position you areusing has an adjustablehead restraint andyou are using a dualtether, route thetether around the headrestraint.

68

If the position you areusing has an adjustablehead restraint andyou are using a singletether, raise thehead restraint and routethe tether under thehead restraint andin between the headrestraint posts.

3. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

Securing a Child Restraint in a RearSeat PositionIf your child restraint has the LATCH system, seeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 61.

For vehicles with a third row, there are no toptether anchors in the outboard seating positions.Do not secure a child seat in these positionsif a national or local law requires that the top tetherbe anchored, or if the instructions that comewith the child restraint say that the top strap mustbe anchored.

If your child restraint does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint. Be sure to followthe instructions that came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraint when and asthe instructions say.

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

69

3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

70

5. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt.

6. If your child restraint has a top tether, and theposition that you are using has a top tetheranchor, attach and tighten the top tether to thetop tether anchor. Refer to the instructionsthat came with the child restraint and to LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)on page 61.


To remove the child restraint, if the top tether isattached to the top tether anchor, disconnectit. Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it goback all the way. The safety belt will movefreely again and be ready to work for an adult orlarger child passenger.

71

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat PositionYour vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a saferplace to secure a forward-facing child restraint.See Where to Put the Restraint on page 60.

In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensingsystem. The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag and side impact airbag (if equipped)when an infant in a rear-facing infant seat or asmall child in a forward-facing child restraintor booster seat is detected. See PassengerSensing System on page 86 and Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 211 for more informationon this including important safety information.

A label on your sun visor says, “Never puta rear-facing child seat in the front.” This isbecause the risk to the rear-facing child is sogreat, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag(if equipped) under certain conditions, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. General Motorsrecommends that rear-facing childrestraints be secured in the rear seat,even if the airbag is off.

72

If you need to secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front seat position, move theseat as far back as it will go before securingthe forward-facing child restraint. See Power Seatson page 9.

If your child restraint has the LATCH system, seeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 61.

There is no top tether anchor at the right frontseating position. Do not secure a child seat in thisposition if a national or local law requires thatthe top tether be anchored or if the instructionsthat come with the child restraint say that the toptether must be anchored. See Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 61 ifyour child restraint has a top tether.

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to securethe child restraint in this position. Be sure to followthe instructions that came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraint when and asthe instructions say.

1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’sairbags. See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 86. We recommend that rear-facingchild restraints be secured in a rear seat,even if the airbag or airbags are off. If yourchild restraint is forward-facing, move the seatas far back as it will go before securing thechild restraint in this seat. See Power Seatson page 9.When the passenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passenger’s airbag orairbags, the off indicator in the passengerairbag status indicator should light and stay litwhen you turn the ignition to RUN orSTART. See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 211.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

73

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

74

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt. You should not be ableto pull more of the belt from the retractoronce the lock has been set.


8. If the airbag or airbags are off, the off indicatoron the instrument panel will be lit and stay litwhen the key is turned to RUN or START.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall thechild restraint.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion. Ifthis happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in thechild restraint in a rear seat position in thevehicle and check with your dealer.

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle thevehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.The safety belt will move freely again and be readyto work for an adult or larger child passenger.

75

Airbag SystemYour vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver anda frontal airbag for the right front passenger.Your vehicle may also have side impact airbags.Side impact airbags are available for the driver, theright front passenger and the second rowcaptain’s chairs (if equipped).

If your vehicle has a side impact airbag, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the airbag covering onthe side of the seatback closest to the door.

Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce therisk of injury from the force of an inflatingfrontal airbag. But these airbags must inflate veryquickly to do their job and comply with federalregulations.

Here are the most important things to know aboutthe airbag system:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in acrash if you are not wearing your safetybelt — even if you have airbags. Wearingyour safety belt during a crash helpsreduce your chance of hitting thingsinside the vehicle or being ejected from it.Airbags are “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. All airbags are designedto work with safety belts but do notreplace them.

Frontal airbags for the driver and rightfront passenger are designed to deploy inmoderate to severe frontal and near frontalcrashes. They are not designed to inflate inrollover, rear crashes, or in many side


76


crashes. And, for some unrestrainedoccupants, frontal airbags may provideless protection in frontal crashes thanmore forceful airbags have providedin the past.

Side impact airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe crasheswhere something hits the side of yourvehicle. They are not designed to inflate infrontal, in rollover, or in rear crashes.

Everyone in your vehicle should wear asafety belt properly — whether or notthere is an airbag for that person.

{CAUTION:

Both frontal and side impact airbagsinflate with great force, faster than theblink of an eye. If you are too close to aninflating airbag, as you would be if youwere leaning forward, it could seriouslyinjure you. Safety belts help keep you inposition for airbag inflation before andduring a crash. Always wear your safetybelt even with frontal airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possible whilestill maintaining control of the vehicle.Occupants should not lean on or sleepagainst the door.

77

{CAUTION:

Anyone who is up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer the bestprotection for adults, but not for youngchildren and infants. Neither the vehicle’ssafety belt system nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Young children andinfants need the protection that a childrestraint system can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in your vehicle.To read how, see Older Children onpage 49 or Infants and Young Children onpage 52.

There is an airbagreadiness light on theinstrument panel cluster,which shows theairbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 210 for more information.

78

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of thesteering wheel.

The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in theinstrument panel on the passenger’s side.

79

If your vehicle has a side impact airbag for thedriver, it is in the side of the driver’s seatbackclosest to the door.

If your vehicle has a side impact airbag for theright front passenger and/or the second rowcaptain’s chairs (if equipped), it is in the side ofthe seatback closest to the door.

80

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant andan airbag, the airbag might not inflateproperly or it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury or evendeath. The path of an inflating airbag mustbe kept clear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and an airbag, anddo not attach or put anything on thesteering wheel hub or on or near anyother airbag covering. Do not let seatcovers block the inflation path of a sideimpact airbag.

When Should an Airbag Inflate?The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontalairbags are designed to inflate in moderate tosevere frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they aredesigned to inflate only if the impact exceeds apredetermined deployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds take into account a variety of desireddeployment and non-deployment events and areused to predict how severe a crash is likely to be intime for the airbags to inflate and help restrain theoccupants. Whether your frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based on how fast your vehicleis traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, thedirection of the impact and how quickly your vehicleslows down.

81

In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontalairbags, which adjust the restraint accordingto crash severity. For moderate frontal impacts,these airbags inflate at a level less than fulldeployment. Your vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensing system distinguishbetween a moderate frontal impact and a moresevere frontal impact. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs. If the front of yourvehicle goes straight into a wall that does notmove or deform, the threshold level for thereduced deployment is about 12 to 18 mph(19 to 29 km/h), and the threshold level fora full deployment is about 18 to 25 mph(29 to 40.2 km/h). The threshold level can vary,however, with specific vehicle design, so that it canbe somewhat above or below this range.

Frontal airbags may inflate at different crashspeeds. For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, theairbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits an object thatdoes not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits a wide object(like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle goes straight into theobject.

The frontal airbags (driver and right frontpassenger) are not intended to inflate duringvehicle rollovers, rear impacts, or in many sideimpacts.

82

Your vehicle may or may not have side impactairbags. See Airbag System on page 76.Side impact airbags are intended to inflate inmoderate to severe side crashes. A side impactairbag will inflate if the crash severity is above thesystem’s designed “threshold level.” Thethreshold level can vary with specific vehicledesign. Side impact airbags are not intended toinflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts, rollovers orrear impacts. A side impact airbag is intended todeploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck.

In any particular crash, no one can say whether anairbag should have inflated simply because ofthe damage to a vehicle or because of what therepair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflationis determined by what the vehicle hits, the angleof the impact, and how quickly the vehicleslows down. For side impact airbags, inflation isdetermined by the location and severity ofthe impact.

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbagsensing system detects that the vehicle isin a crash. The sensing system triggers a releaseof gas from the inflator, which inflates theairbag. The inflator, the airbag and relatedhardware are all part of the airbag modules.Frontal airbag modules are located insidethe steering wheel and instrument panel. Forseating positions with side impact airbags, thereare also airbag modules in the side of theseatbacks closest to the door.

83

How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontalcollisions, even belted occupants can contact thesteering wheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.Airbags supplement the protection providedby safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over the occupant’s upperbody, stopping the occupant more gradually. Butthe frontal airbags would not help you in manytypes of collisions, including rollovers, rearimpacts, and many side impacts, primarily becausean occupant’s motion is not toward the airbag.Side impact airbags would not help you in manytypes of collisions, including many frontal ornear frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts.

Airbags should never be regarded as anythingmore than a supplement to safety belts, and thenonly in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontalcollisions for the driver’s and right frontpassenger’s frontal airbags, and only in moderateto severe side collisions for vehicles with sideimpact airbags.

What Will You See After an AirbagInflates?After an airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, soquickly that some people may not even realize theairbag inflated. Some components of the airbagmodule — the steering wheel hub for the driver’sfrontal airbag, the instrument panel for theright front passenger’s frontal airbag, and forseating positions with side impact airbags, the sideof the seatback closest to the door — may behot for a short time. The parts of the airbag thatcome into contact with you may be warm, butnot too hot to touch. There may be some smokeand dust coming from the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the driverfrom seeing out of the windshield or being ableto steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent peoplefrom leaving the vehicle.

84

{CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there may bedust in the air. This dust could causebreathing problems for people with ahistory of asthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon as it issafe to do so. If you have breathingproblems but cannot get out of the vehicleafter an airbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door. If youexperience breathing problems followingan airbag deployment, you should seekmedical attention.

Your vehicle has a feature that may automaticallyunlock the doors, turn the interior lamps onwhen the airbags inflate and turn on the hazardwarning flashers. You can lock the doors, turn theinterior lamps off, and turn the hazard warningflashers on by using the controls for thosefeatures.

In many crashes severe enough to inflate anairbag, windshields are broken by vehicledeformation. Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the right front passenger airbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. Afterthey inflate, you will need some new parts foryour airbag system. If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be there to help protectyou in another crash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possibly other parts. Theservice manual for your vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

• Your vehicle has a crash sensing anddiagnostic module which records informationafter a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection andEvent Data Recorders on page 537.

• Let only qualified technicians work on yourairbag system. Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not work properly. Seeyour dealer for service.

85

Passenger Sensing SystemYour vehicle has a passenger sensing system.The passenger airbag status indicator on theinstrument panel will be visible when you turn yourignition key to RUN or START.

The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on andoff, will be visible during the system check.When the system check is complete, either theword ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on orthe symbol for off will be visible. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator on page 211.

The passenger sensing system will turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag and sideimpact airbag (if equipped) under certainconditions. The driver’s airbags or the second rowside impact airbags (if equipped) are not part ofthe passenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing system works with sensorsthat are part of the right front passenger’s seat andsafety belt. The sensors are designed to detect thepresence of a properly-seated occupant anddetermine if the passenger’s airbag or airbagsshould be enabled (may inflate) or not.

Accident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. We recommend that child restraints besecured in a rear seat, including an infant riding ina rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in aforward-facing child seat and an older child ridingin a booster seat.

Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sunvisor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

United States Canada

86

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag(if equipped) under certain conditions,



no system is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.

If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

87

The passenger sensing system is designed to turnoff the right front passenger’s airbag and sideimpact airbag (if equipped) if:

• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.

• The system determines that an infant ispresent in a rear-facing infant seat.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a forward-facing child restraint.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a booster seat.

• A right front passenger takes his/her weight offof the seat for a period of time.

• The right front passenger seat is occupied bya smaller person, such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbagsystem or the passenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensing system has turnedoff the right front passenger’s airbag or airbags,the off indicator will light and stay lit to remind youthat the airbag or airbags are off.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall thechild restraint following the child restraintmanufacturer’s directions and refer to Securing aChild Restraint in the Right Front Seat Positionon page 72.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion. Ifthis happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.

88

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in thechild restraint in a rear seat position in thevehicle and check with your dealer.

The passenger sensing system is designed toenable (may inflate) the right front passenger’sairbag or airbags anytime the system senses thata person of adult size is sitting properly in theright front passenger’s seat. When the passengersensing system has allowed the airbag orairbags to be enabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit to remind you that the airbag or airbagsare active.

For some children who have outgrown childrestraints and for very small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turn off theright front passenger’s airbag or airbags,depending upon the person’s seating posture andbody build. Everyone in your vehicle who hasoutgrown child restraints should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there is an airbag forthat person.

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, itcould be because that person is not sitting properlyin the seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle offand ask the person to place the seatback inthe fully upright position, then sit upright in theseat, centered on the seat cushion, with theperson’s legs comfortably extended. Restart thevehicle and have the person remain in this positionfor about two minutes. This will allow the systemto detect that person and then enable thepassenger’s airbag or airbags.

89

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in theinstrument panel cluster ever comes onand stays on, it means that something may



be wrong with the airbag system. If thisever happens, have the vehicle servicedpromptly, because an adult-size personsitting in the right front passenger’s seatmay not have the protection of the frontalairbag. See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 210 for more on this, includingimportant safety information.

Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers, canaffect how well the passenger sensing systemoperates. You may want to consider not using seatcovers or other aftermarket equipment if yourvehicle has the passenger sensing system. SeeAdding Equipment to Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 92 for more information aboutmodifications that can affect how the systemoperates.

90

{CAUTION:

Stowing of articles under the passenger’sseat or between the passenger’s seatcushion and seatback may interfere withthe proper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how your vehicle should beserviced. There are parts of the airbag system inseveral places around your vehicle. You donot want the system to inflate while someone isworking on your vehicle. Your dealer and theservice manual have information about servicingyour vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase aservice manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 544.

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds after the ignitionkey is turned off and the battery isdisconnected, an airbag can still inflateduring improper service. You can beinjured if you are close to an airbag whenit inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. Theyare probably part of the airbag system. Besure to follow proper service procedures,and make sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.

91

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to the frontor sides of the vehicle that could keep theairbags from working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change yourvehicle’s frame, bumper system, height,front end or side sheet metal, they may keepthe airbag system from working properly.Also, the airbag system may not work properlyif you relocate any of the airbag sensors. Ifyou have any questions about this, you shouldcontact Customer Assistance before youmodify your vehicle. The phone numbers andaddresses for Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure on page 526.

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to getmy vehicle modified. How can I find outwhether this will affect my airbag system?

A: Changing or moving any parts of thefront seats, safety belts, the airbag sensingand diagnostic module, steering wheel,the instrument panel, or airbag wiring canaffect the operation of the airbag system. Ifyou have questions, call Customer Assistance.The phone numbers and addresses forCustomer Assistance are in Step Two of theCustomer Satisfaction Procedure in thismanual. See Customer Satisfaction Procedureon page 526.

92

Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint SystemsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminderlight and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,retractors and anchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose or damaged safety beltsystem parts. If you see anything that might keep asafety belt system from doing its job, have itrepaired. See Care of Safety Belts on page 490.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If abelt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers,and have them repaired or replaced. The airbagsystem does not need regular maintenance.

Notice: If you damage the covering for thedriver’s or the right front passenger’s frontalairbag, or an airbag covering (if equipped) on aseatback, the airbag may not work properly.You may have to replace the airbag module inthe steering wheel, both the airbag module andthe instrument panel for the right frontpassenger’s frontal airbag, or both the airbagmodule and the seatback for seating positionswith a side impact airbag (if equipped.) Do notopen or break the airbag coverings.

93

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systemsin your vehicle. A damaged restraintsystem may not properly protect theperson using it, resulting in serious injuryor even death in a crash. To help makesure your restraint systems are workingproperly after a crash, have them inspectedand any necessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If you have had a crash, do you need new belts orLATCH system parts?

After a very minor collision, nothing may benecessary. But if the belts were stretched, as theywould be if worn during a more severe crash,then you need new parts.If the LATCH system was being used during amore severe crash, you may need new LATCHsystem parts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collisiondamage also may mean you will need to haveLATCH system, safety belt or seat parts repaired orreplaced. New parts and repairs may be necessaryeven if the belt or LATCH system was not beingused at the time of the collision.If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbagsystem parts. See the part on the airbag systemearlier in this section.If the frontal airbags inflate you will also need toreplace the driver and front passenger’s safety beltretractor assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the newretractor assembly will be there to help protect youin a collision.After a crash you may need to replace the driverand front passenger’s safety belt retractorassemblies, even if the frontal airbags have notdeployed. The driver and front passenger’s safetybelt retractor assemblies contain the safety beltpretensioners. Have your safety belt pretensionerschecked if your vehicle has been in a collision, or ifyour airbag readiness light stays on after you startyour vehicle or while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 210.

94

Keys .............................................................. 97Remote Keyless Entry System .................... 98Remote Keyless Entry System Operation .... 99

Doors and Locks ........................................ 106Door Locks ................................................ 106Power Door Locks ..................................... 107Delayed Locking ........................................ 108Automatic Door Lock ................................. 109Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ....... 109Lockout Protection ..................................... 109Dual Sliding Doors .................................... 109Power Sliding Door (PSD) ......................... 112Liftgate ...................................................... 119

Windows ...................................................... 121Power Windows ........................................ 122Power Rear Quarter Windows ................... 123Sun Visors ................................................ 123

Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................. 123Content Theft-Deterrent ............................. 124PASS-Key® III ........................................... 126PASS-Key® III Operation ........................... 126

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ......... 128New Vehicle Break-In ................................ 128Ignition Positions ....................................... 129Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ............. 130Starting the Engine .................................... 130Engine Coolant Heater .............................. 132Automatic Transaxle Operation .................. 133Parking Brake ........................................... 137Shifting Into Park (P) ................................. 138Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................. 139Parking Over Things That Burn ................. 140Engine Exhaust ......................................... 141Running the Engine While Parked ............. 142

Mirrors ......................................................... 143Manual Rearview Mirror ............................. 143Outside Power Mirrors ............................... 143Outside Convex Mirror ............................... 144Outside Heated Mirrors ............................. 144

OnStar® System .......................................... 145

Section 2 Features and Controls

95

Universal Home Remote System ................ 147Universal Home Remote System

(With Three Round LED) ....................... 147Universal Home Remote System

(With One Triangular LED) ..................... 148Universal Home Remote System

Operation (With Three Round LED) ....... 149Universal Home Remote System Operation

(With One Triangular LED) ...................... 154

Storage Areas ............................................. 158Glove Box ................................................. 158Cupholder(s) .............................................. 158Overhead Console (With Rail) ................... 159Overhead Console (Without Rail) ............... 161Floor Console Storage Area ...................... 161Folding Tray .............................................. 161Luggage Carrier ........................................ 162Convenience Net (With Rear

Convenience Center) .............................. 163Convenience Net (Without Rear

Convenience Center) .............................. 163Convenience Center .................................. 164

Section 2 Features and Controls

96

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with theignition key is dangerous for manyreasons. They could operate the powerwindows or other controls or even makethe vehicle move. The children or otherscould be badly injured or even killed. Donot leave the keys in a vehicle withchildren.

This vehicle has one key for the ignition and thedriver’s door lock.

97

Your vehicle has the PASS-Key® III vehicle theftsystem. The key has a transponder in the keyhead that matches a decoder in the vehicle’ssteering column. If a replacement key orany additional key is needed, you must purchasethis key from your dealer. The key will have PK3stamped on it. Keep the bar code tag that camewith the original keys. Give this tag to your dealer ifyou need a new key made.

Any new PASS-Key® III key must be programmedbefore it will start your vehicle. See PASS-Key®

III on page 126 for more information onprogramming your new key.

Notice: If you ever lock your keys in yourvehicle, you may have to damage the vehicleto get in. Be sure you have spare keys.

If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle, seeRoadside Assistance Program on page 532 formore information.

Remote Keyless Entry SystemYour keyless entry system operates on a radiofrequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with IndustryCanada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:



Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

98

At times you may notice a decrease in operatingrange. This is normal for any remote keyless entrysystem. If the transmitter does not work or if youhave to stand closer to your vehicle for thetransmitter to work, try this:

• Check the distance. You may be too far fromyour vehicle. You may need to stand closerduring rainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objectsmay be blocking the signal. Take a few stepsto the left or right, hold the transmitterhigher, and try again.

• Check to determine if battery replacement isnecessary. See “Battery Replacement”under Remote Keyless Entry SystemOperation on page 99.

• If you are still having trouble, see your dealeror a qualified technician for service.

Remote Keyless Entry SystemOperationYou can lock and unlock the vehicle’s doors andthe liftgate using the remote keyless entrytransmitter supplied with your vehicle.

The remote keylessentry transmitter shownhere is for a vehicleequipped with theremote vehicle startfeature and dual powersliding doors.

The remote keyless entry transmitter supplied withyour vehicle will only contain the buttons specificto your vehicle’s factory installed remotesystem features.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle hasthis feature, you can start the engine from outsidethe vehicle. See “Remote Vehicle Start” at theend of this section for more detailed information.

99

Q (Lock): To lock all doors and the liftgate,press the lock button on the remote keyless entrytransmitter. See Power Door Locks on page 107for more details on the power door lock features. Ifyour vehicle has the content theft-deterrentsystem, the remote keyless entry transmitter’s lockbutton may arm the system. See ContentTheft-Deterrent on page 124 for more details.

When you use the remote keyless entry transmitterto lock your vehicle, the turn signal lamps mayflash to let you know the command has beenreceived. If you press the lock button again, withinfive seconds, the horn will sound and the turnsignal lamps may flash to let you know the vehicleis already locked. See “FOB LOCK FEEDBACK”under DIC Vehicle Personalization (UplevelOnly) on page 249 for additional information.

" (Unlock): When you press unlock on theremote keyless entry transmitter, only the driver’sdoor will unlock. If you press unlock againwithin five seconds, all the doors and the liftgatewill unlock. If you would like all the doors to unlockthe first time you press unlock, see “FOBUNLOCK ON 1ST PRESS” under DIC VehiclePersonalization (Uplevel Only) on page 249.

If your vehicle has the content theft-deterrentsystem, the unlock button on the remote keylessentry transmitter will disarm the system. SeeContent Theft-Deterrent on page 124 for moredetails.

When you use your remote keyless entrytransmitter to unlock your vehicle the turn signallamps will flash to let you know the command wasreceived.

L (Remote Alarm): When you press the hornbutton on the remote keyless entry transmitter, theturn signal lamps will flash and the horn willsound. This will allow you to attract attention, ifneeded.

Press this button again to stop the alarm fromsounding.

100

Remote Power Sliding Door Operation

+ (Power Sliding Door): If your vehiclehas one power sliding door, the remote keylessentry transmitter will have a button with a vansymbol on it. Press and hold this button to open orclose the power sliding door. See Power SlidingDoor (PSD) on page 112.

*+ (Dual Power Sliding Doors): If yourvehicle has dual power sliding doors, your remotekeyless entry transmitter will have two buttonsthat have a van symbol on them. The van symbolon the left is for the driver’s side sliding doorand the van symbol on the right is for thepassenger’s side sliding door. Press and hold thepassenger’s or driver’s side button, with thevan symbol on it, to open or close the selectedpower sliding door. See Power Sliding Door (PSD)on page 112.

You can operate the power sliding door(s) with theremote keyless entry transmitter even if thepower sliding door override switch(es), on theoverhead console, are active or inactive.See Power Sliding Door (PSD) on page 112 foradditional information.

If the sliding door is closed and the power slidingdoor button on the transmitter is pressed andheld, the vehicle’s doors will be unlocked and thenthe power sliding door will open. If the powersliding door has been locked using the manualdoor lock lever, you will need to unlock the powersliding door before it can be opened with theremote keyless entry transmitter sliding doorbutton.

If your vehicle’s fuel filler door is opened, thedriver’s side power sliding door will not opencompletely. Do not try to force the door. Once thefuel filler door is closed, the driver’s side slidingdoor can be opened normally.

101

Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicleEach remote keyless entry transmitter is coded toprevent another transmitter from unlocking yourvehicle. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased through yourdealer. Remember to bring any remainingtransmitters with you when you go to your dealer.When the dealer matches the replacementtransmitter to your vehicle, any remainingtransmitters must also be matched. Once yourdealer has coded the new transmitter, thelost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle. Eachvehicle can have a maximum of four transmittersmatched to it.

See your dealer to match transmitters to anothervehicle.

Battery ReplacementUnder normal use, the battery in your remotekeyless entry transmitter should last about threeyears.

You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitterwill not work at the normal range in any location.If you have to get close to your vehicle beforethe transmitter works, it is probably time to changethe battery.

Notice: When replacing the battery, use carenot to touch any of the circuitry. Staticfrom your body transferred to these surfacesmay damage the transmitter.

1. Insert a flat object, such as a coin, into theslot on the side of the transmitter and twist itto separate the halves.

102

2. Gently pry the battery out of the transmitter.Do not use the metal flanges to pop out thebattery.

3. Replace the battery.

4. Reassemble the transmitter. Make sure thehalves are snapped together tightly so waterwill not get in.

5. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttonsfor seven seconds to synchronize thetransmitter.

6. Check the transmitter operation.

Remote Vehicle StartThis feature allows you to start the engine fromoutside the vehicle. It may also turn the rearwindow defogger if the outside temperature isbelow 45°F (7°C).

Laws in some local communities may restrict theuse of remote starters. For example, somelaws may require a person using remote start tohave the vehicle in view when doing so. Checklocal regulations for any requirements on remotestarting of vehicles.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle hasthe remote vehicle start feature, the remotekeyless entry transmitter will have a button withthis symbol on it.

An increased range of operation is provided withthe remote keyless entry transmitter that hasthe remote vehicle start button.

If your vehicle is low on fuel, do not use theremote start feature. The vehicle may run out offuel. The vehicle may also run out of fuel ifthe vehicle is running for a long period of timewhen parked on an incline facing downward with alow fuel condition.

103

To start the engine using the remote start feature,do the following:

1. Aim the remote keyless entry transmitter,equipped with the remote vehicle startbutton, at the vehicle.

2. Press and release the transmitter’s lockbutton, then immediately press and holdthe remote vehicle start button until thevehicle’s turn signal lamps flash, or for atleast two seconds, if the vehicle’s lights arenot visible. The vehicle’s doors will be locked.

3. When the vehicle’s engine starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain on while theengine is running.

After a remote start, the engine will automaticallyshut off after 10 minutes unless a time extensionhas been done or the vehicle’s key is inserted intothe ignition switch and turned to RUN.

The maximum number of remote starts or remotestart attempts between ignition cycles with thekey is two.

If the remote start procedure is used again beforethe first 10 minute time frame has ended, thefirst 10 minutes will immediately expire andthe second 10 minute time frame will start.

After two remote starts have been provided, thevehicle’s ignition switch must be turned toRUN and then back to LOCK using the key beforethe remote start procedure can be used again.

If you enter the vehicle after a remote start,and the engine is running, insert the key into theignition switch and turn it to the RUN positionto drive the vehicle.

104

To manually shut off the engine after a remotestart, do any of the following:

• Aim the remote keyless entry transmitter atthe vehicle and press the remote startbutton until the parking lamps turn off.

• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

• Insert the vehicle’s key into the ignitionswitch and turn the switch to RUN and thenback to LOCK.

The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if:

• The remote start system is disabled. See“REMOTE START” under DIC VehiclePersonalization (Uplevel Only) on page 249.

• The vehicle’s key is in the ignition.

• The vehicle’s hood, liftgate or doors are notclosed.

• The hazard warning flashers are on.

• There is an emission control systemmalfunction.

• The engine coolant temperature is too high.

• The oil pressure is low.

• Two remote vehicle starts have already beenprovided. The maximum number of remotestarts or remote start attempts between ignitioncycles with the key is two.

Remote Start ReadyIf your vehicle does not have the remote vehiclestart feature, it may have the remote start readyfeature. This feature allows your dealer to add themanufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature.

If the keyless entry transmitter has a plus (+)symbol on the back cover, your vehicle has theremote start ready feature. You can lock orunlock your vehicle from approximately 197 feet(60 m) away.

See your dealer if you would like to add themanufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature to yourvehicle.

105

Doors and LocksDoor Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers, especially children, can

easily open the doors and fall out ofamoving vehicle. When a doorislocked, the handle will not open it.You increase the chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in a crash ifthe doors are not locked. So, wearsafety belts properly and lock thedoors whenever you drive.



• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out. Achild can be overcome by extremeheat and can suffer permanent injuriesor even death from heat stroke.Always lock your vehicle wheneveryou leave it.

• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow downor stop your vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent this fromhappening.

There are several ways to lock and unlock yourvehicle.

From the outside, use your key or the remotekeyless entry transmitter.

To unlock the driver’s door from the outside withthe key, insert the key and turn it toward thefront of the vehicle. To lock the driver’s door fromthe outside with your key, insert the key andturn it toward the rear of the vehicle.

106

If your vehicle has power door locks, you may beable to unlock all of the doors and the liftgatewhen you insert the key, turn it toward the front ofthe vehicle, and hold it there for one second.You may be able to lock all of the doors when youinsert the key and turn it toward the rear of thevehicle.

From the inside, use the manual or powerdoor locks.

To unlock either front door from the inside, pullback on the manual lever. To lock either front doorfrom the inside, push the manual lever forward.

Power Door LocksYour vehicle has power door locks.

The switches arelocated on the driver’sand front passenger’sdoor. Press the topof the switch to unlockthe doors and liftgate.

With the content theft-deterrent system, the powerdoor lock switch will not unlock the doors untilthe system is disarmed. See ContentTheft-Deterrent on page 124 for more details.

Press the bottom of the switch to lock the doorsand liftgate. With the content theft-deterrentsystem, the power door lock switch may cause thesystem to arm. See Content Theft-Deterrent onpage 124 for more details.

107

Delayed LockingThis feature allows the locking of the vehicle to bedelayed until all doors have been closed forapproximately five seconds.

To activate the delayed locking feature, do one ofthe following:

• Press the driver’s door power lock switch onetime while the driver’s door is open.

• Press the passenger’s door power lock switchone time while the passenger’s door is open.

• Press the lock button on the remote keylessentry transmitter one time while any dooris open.

Two chimes will sound to signal that delayedlocking is active.

The doors may be locked immediately by repeatingany of the above actions more than one time.

If a door remains open, without any other doorbeing opened or closed, the vehicle will lock afterapproximately 45 seconds.

If the key is in the ignition, this feature will not lockthe doors.

To turn the delayed locking feature off or on, seeDIC Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only) onpage 249.

Sliding Door Delayed LockingIf either sliding door is open when you use thepower door locks to lock the vehicle, the slidingdoor that is open will not lock. Normally thedelayed locking feature will be used to lock thesliding door after it has been closed.

The sliding door delayed locking feature will lockyour sliding door(s) in situations where the delayedlocking feature does not apply or was overriddenor programmed to be off. See “Delayed Locking”earlier in this section. Shortly after the lastsliding door is closed, all the doors will lock.

108

Automatic Door LockAll of the doors will lock automatically when youmove the shift lever out of PARK (P). This featurecannot be disabled.

If someone needs to get out of the vehicle while itis not in PARK (P), shift into PARK (P), or,have that person use the manual lever or thepower door lock switch. When the door is closedagain, it will lock when the vehicle exceeds5 mph (8 km/h).

With automatic door locks, you can lock or unlockthe doors at any time, either manually or byusing the power door lock switches.

Programmable Automatic DoorUnlockYour vehicle was programmed so that all doorswill unlock automatically when the shift leveris moved into PARK (P).

To change the way the automatic door unlockingoperates, see DIC Vehicle Personalization(Uplevel Only) on page 249.

Lockout ProtectionThe lockout protection feature makes it moredifficult to lock the key in the vehicle. If the driver’sdoor is open while the key is in the ignition, the doorcannot be locked with the power door lock switch.This feature cannot guarantee that you will never belocked out of the vehicle. If the key is not left in theignition, or, if the manual door lock is used, the keycould still be locked inside the vehicle. Alwaysremember to take the key with you.

Dual Sliding DoorsTo open either sliding door from outside the vehicle,pull the handle out and then pull the door toward therear. If you slide the door all the way back, the doorwill rest in a detent position.To move the door forward, you must first pull thedoor past the open detent position.The driver’s side sliding door is designed to openonly a little if the fuel door is open. If this everhappens, do not try to force the sliding door. Justclose the driver’s side sliding door. Then when thefuel filler door is closed, the driver’s side slidingdoor can be opened normally.

109

Sliding Door Lock{CAUTION:

If your vehicle is facing downward on asteep grade (15 percent or more), the doormay not stay open and could slam shut,possibly injuring someone. To make surethe door does not slam shut be sure tohold it open until everyone is clear of thedoor, and only then allow it to slowly close.

110

Lock either sliding door from inside the vehicle bymoving the manual lever down. Unlock it bymoving the lever up.

With the power door locks, the sliding door lockhas a delay feature. See Delayed Locking onpage 108 and DIC Vehicle Personalization(Uplevel Only) on page 249.

Sliding Door Security LockYour vehicle is equipped with sliding door securitylocks that helps prevent young children or otherpassengers from opening the sliding door(s) usingthe inside door handle. To use one of theselocks, do the following:

1. Open the sliding door.2. On the inside of the

sliding door(s), onthe front edge of thedoor will be a lock.Push the lever up toengage the lock.

3. Close the door.

4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for the other door.

111

If your vehicle has power sliding door(s), you canprevent power opening of the sliding door fromthe passenger power sliding door (psd) activationswitch by pressing the psd second row passengeroverride (deactivation) switch located on theoverhead console. See Power Sliding Door (PSD)on page 112.

If you want to open the sliding door while thesecurity lock is on, unlock and open the door fromthe outside.

You should let adults and older children know howthe security lock works, and how to cancel the lock.If you do not, adults or older children who ride in therear will not be able to open the sliding door fromthe inside while the security lock feature is in use.

Canceling the Sliding DoorSecurity Lock1. Unlock the sliding door and open the door

from the outside.

2. Push the security lock lever all the way down.

3. Close the door.

4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for the other door.

The sliding door lock will now work normally.

Power Sliding Door (PSD)If your vehicle has this feature, you can open andclose the power sliding door(s) using theswitches inside your vehicle. You can also operatethe sliding door(s) with your remote keylessentry transmitter. See Remote Keyless EntrySystem on page 98.

{CAUTION:

Leaving your children or pets unattendedin your vehicle can be dangerous. Theycould operate the power sliding door. Achild or others could be injured. Do notleave children or pets unattended in yourvehicle.

112

Power Sliding Door (PSD) SwitchesYour vehicle will have one of the followingswitch(es) located on the overhead consoleswitchbank.

If your vehicle has asingle power slidingdoor (PSD), youhave this switch.

If your vehicle has dualpower sliding doors, youhave these switches.

PSD Activation/Override(Deactivation) Switch

Driver’s Side andPassenger’s Side PSD

Activation/Override(Deactivation) Switches

113

Your vehicle also haspassenger power slidingdoor activationswitch(es).

If you have a single PSD, this switch is located infront of the passenger side sliding door. If yourvehicle has dual PSDs, the switches are located infront of both sliding doors.

Power Sliding Door OperationThe power sliding door(s) will only open if thetransaxle is in PARK (P). The transaxle does nothave to be in PARK (P) to close the door(s).

There are several ways to open and close thepower sliding door(s).

• If your vehicle has a single power sliding door,press the top of the overhead console PSDactivation/override (deactivation) switch.

• If your vehicle has dual power sliding doors,press the top of the driver’s side and/orpassenger’s side overhead console PSDactivation/override (deactivation) switch.

• Press the passenger PSD activation switch.This switch will also stop a moving doorimmediately.

Passenger PSDActivation Switch

114

• Press the power sliding door button on theremote keyless entry transmitter.

• To manually open the power sliding door(s)while the switch(es) are in the activationposition, pull and release the inside or outsidedoor handle to release the door latch. Thedoor will fully open.

• To manually close the power sliding door(s)while the switches are in the activationposition, pull the inside or outside door handleor the edge of the door. Move the doorabout 4 inches (10 cm) toward the closedposition and release it. The door will closecompletely and latch.

If a power sliding door is locked, it cannot beunlocked and opened using the overhead consolePSD switch(es) or the passenger PSD activationswitch(es). The power sliding door must either bemanually unlocked or unlocked using the powerdoor unlock switch located on the driver’s or frontpassenger’s armrest, and then opened using theoverhead or passenger PSD activation switch(es).

The remote keyless entry transmitter can also beused to open the power sliding door(s). If thevehicle is locked, press the power slidingdoor button(s) and all doors will unlock and thesliding door(s) will open. See Remote KeylessEntry System Operation on page 99.

If the power sliding door has been manually locked,you must unlock the PSD before it can be opened.

Notice: If you leave the power sliding door onwhen you go through an automatic carwash, the door may accidentally open. Be surethe power sliding door is turned off whengoing through a car wash.

115

If the power sliding door(s) is open or in theprocess of closing when you shift out of PARK (P),a chime will sound. This is a warning that thesliding door(s) is not completely closed. Also, theDriver Information Center (DIC) will indicate ifthe door is open. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 230. Stop the vehicle andclose the door.

{CAUTION:

If you shift the transaxle out of PARK (P)and accelerate before the power slidingdoor latches closed, the door may reverseto the open position. A child or otherscould fall out of the vehicle and beinjured. Always make sure the powersliding door is closed and latched beforeyou drive away.

If an object obstructs the power sliding door(s) whileit is closing, the door will automatically reverse tothe open position, provided it meets sufficientresistance. Resistance must be as strong as theforce of the closing door, or stronger. The force ofthe closing door increases significantly as the doorapproaches the latched position.

The driver’s side sliding door is designed to openonly a little if the fuel door is open. If this everhappens, do not try to force the sliding door. Whenthe fuel filler door is closed, the driver’s sidesliding door can be opened normally.

116

{CAUTION:

You or others could be injured if caught inthe path of the sliding door. Make sure thedoor path is clear before closing the door.

{CAUTION:

If your vehicle is facing downward on asteep grade (15 percent or more), the doormay not stay open and could slam shut,possibly injuring someone. To make surethe door does not slam shut, turn on thepower sliding door feature. Then if thedoor closes, it will close under the controlof the power door system.

117

Power Sliding Door Second RowPassenger Override (Deactivation)To help avoid accidental operation of the slidingdoor(s) by using the passenger PSD activationswitch, press the override (deactivation) part of theoverhead console switch. The door can still bemanually opened from the inside or outsidewith the override (deactivation) on.

To open a power sliding door(s) manually whenthe overhead console switch is in override(deactivation) position, pull the inside or outsidedoor handle and slide the door all the way back.

To close the door(s) manually when the overrideswitch(es) is in the override (deactivation) position,pull the inside or outside door handle and slidethe door all the way forward to the latched position.

To stop the door(s) immediately while thedoor(s) is opening or closing, press the PSDoverride (deactivation) part of the switch.

Pressing the PSD button(s) on the remote keylessentry will open and close the door unless thedoor has been manually locked using themechanical slider.

Resetting the Power Sliding DoorThe power sliding door may operate incorrectly ornot at all because of the following conditions:

• A low voltage or dead battery

• A disconnected battery

• If the instrument panel PSD/fuse 21,LHPSD/fuse 24 or RHPSD/fuse 25 areremoved or blown.

See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 497 formore information.

If any of these conditions occur, the power slidingdoor may need to be reset. If your vehicle hasthe dual power sliding doors, both doors will haveto be reset. To reset a door, do the following:

1. Check to be sure the power sliding door isunlocked and securely closed.

2. Turn the ignition to LOCK.

118

3. If the power sliding door overhead consoleswitch is in the override (deactivation)position, return to the activation position.

4. Open the sliding door using the remotekeyless entry transmitter, overhead consoleswitch, or passenger switch. Allow the door totravel fully open.

If the door does not travel to the fully openposition, press the overhead console switch to theoverride (deactivation) position and slide thedoor fully open and closed. Check for foreignobjects in the tracks. Repeat the procedure startingwith Step 1. If the door resists travel to the fullyopen position, see your dealer for service.

LiftgateTo unlock or lock the liftgate from the outside, usethe remote keyless entry transmitter. For moreinformation, see Remote Keyless Entry SystemOperation on page 99.

You can also use the power door lock switch tolock and unlock the liftgate.

Open the liftgate using the handle located abovethe license plate. Once slightly opened, theliftgate will rise by itself. Lamps in the rear of thevehicle will come on, illuminating the rearcargo area.

Notice: If you open the liftgate withoutchecking for overhead obstructions such as agarage door, you could break the liftgateglass. Always check to make sure the areaabove the liftgate is clear before opening it.

119

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with theliftgate open because carbon monoxide(CO) gas can come into your vehicle. Youcannot see or smell CO. It can causeunconsciousness and even death. If youmust drive with the liftgate open or ifelectrical wiring or other cableconnections must pass through the sealbetween the body and the liftgate:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your heating or

cooling system to its highest speedand select the control setting that willforce outside air into your vehicle. SeeClimate Control System on page 193or Dual Climate Control System onpage 197.

• If you have air outlets on or under theinstrument panel, open them all theway. See Engine Exhaust on page 141.

To close the liftgate, pull down on the handle, thenfirmly shut the liftgate. Do not drive with theliftgate open, even slightly.

120

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome by theextreme heat and suffer permanentinjuries or even death from heat stroke.Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or apet alone in a vehicle, especially with thewindows closed in warm or hot weather.

121

Power Windows

The switches on thedriver’s door armrestcontrol the frontwindows when theignition is in RUN,ACCESSORY or whenRetained AccessoryPower (RAP) is active.See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP)on page 130.

The driver’s power window switch has two downpositions. The first position lowers the windownormally.

To raise the window, pull up the front of theswitch.

Express-Down WindowTo activate the express-down feature, push theAUTO switch all the way down to the secondposition, then release it. The window will lowercompletely. To stop the window from lowering allthe way, pull up on the front of the switch.

122

Power Rear Quarter WindowsYour vehicle has power rear quarter windows.

This switch, located inthe overhead consoleswitchbank, is usedfor opening and closingthe power rearquarter windows.

Press the top of the switch to open the windows;both windows will open. The windows willcontinue to open as long as the switch is pressed,until they are fully opened.

Press the bottom of the switch with the symbol toclose both windows. The windows can beclosed fully or partially, depending on how longthe switch is pressed.

The ignition must be in RUN, ACCESSORY, orRetained Accessory Power (RAP) must be active,to use the power rear quarter windows. SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 130.

Sun VisorsTo block out glare, you can swing down the visorsand slide them along the rod to cover differentareas of the front window. You can also removethem from the center mount and swing them tothe side.

Lighted Vanity MirrorYour vehicle has lighted vanity mirrors. Pull downthe sun visor and flip up the cover to exposethe vanity mirror. The lamps will come on whenyou flip up the cover.

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in somecities. Although your vehicle has a number oftheft-deterrent features, we know that nothing weput on it can make it impossible to steal.

123

Content Theft-DeterrentYour vehicle has a theft-deterrent alarm system.

A light located on top of your instrument panel,near the center of the vehicle next to thewindshield, will flash slowly to let you know thatthe system has been armed.

While armed, the doors will not unlock with thepower door lock switch.

Once armed, the alarm will go off if someone triesto enter the vehicle without using the remotekeyless entry transmitter or a key, or turnsthe ignition to RUN. The horn will sound and theturn signal lamps will flash for up to two minutes.

Arming with the Power Lock SwitchYour alarm system will arm when the key isremoved from the ignition and you use the driver’spower door lock switch, with the driver’s dooropen or the passenger’s door power doorlock switch with the passenger’s door open to lockthe vehicle. If you would like to turn on powerdoor lock switch arming, see DIC VehiclePersonalization (Uplevel Only) on page 249

When the security light flashes quickly the systemis arming. After all doors and the liftgate areclosed and locked, the security light will beginflashing at a very slow rate to let you knowthe system is armed.

124

Arming with the Remote Keyless EntryTransmitterYour alarm system will arm if the key is not in theignition and you use your remote keyless entrytransmitter to lock the doors. The security light willflash to let you know the system is arming. Ifyou press the transmitter’s lock button twice within5 seconds, the horn will sound. After all doorsand the liftgate are closed and locked, the securitylight will begin flashing at a very slow rate to letyou know the system is armed.

Arming with Your KeyYour alarm system will arm when you use yourkey to lock the driver’s door. The security light willflash to let you know the system is arming.After all doors and the liftgate are closed andlocked, the security light will begin flashing at avery slow rate to let you know the system isarmed. If you would like your key not to arm thesystem, see DIC Vehicle Personalization (UplevelOnly) on page 249.

Arming ConfirmationIf remote unlock confirmation is on, the turn signallamps will flash briefly to let you know whenyour alarm system has disarmed. If you would notlike the turn signal lamps to flash, see DICVehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only) onpage 249.

Disarming with the Remote KeylessEntry TransmitterYour alarm system will disarm when you use yourremote keyless entry transmitter to unlock thedoors. The security light will stop flashing to let youknow the system is no longer armed.

Disarming with Your KeyYour alarm system will disarm when you use yourkey to unlock the driver’s door. The securitylight will stop flashing to let you know the systemis no longer armed. If you would like your keynot to disarm the alarm system, see DIC VehiclePersonalization (Uplevel Only) on page 249.

125

PASS-Key® IIIYour PASS-Key® III system operates on a radiofrequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with IndustryCanada.


1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:




PASS-Key® III uses a radio frequency transponderin the key that matches a decoder in yourvehicle.

PASS-Key® III Operation

Your vehicle is equippedwith the PASS-Key® III(PersonalizedAutomotive SecuritySystem) theft-deterrentsystem. PASS-Key® IIIis a passive theftdeterrent system.

This means you do not have to do anythingdifferent to arm or disarm the system. It workswhen you insert or remove the key from theignition.

When the PASS-Key® III system senses thatsomeone is using the wrong key, it shuts down thevehicle’s starter and fuel systems.

126

The starter will not work and fuel will stop beingdelivered to the engine. Anyone using atrial-and-error method to start the vehicle will bediscouraged because of the high number ofelectrical key codes.If the engine does not start and the securitymessage comes on, the key may have a damagedtransponder. Turn the ignition off and try again.If the engine still does not start, and the keyappears to be undamaged, try another ignition key.At this time, you may also want to check theinstrument panel PASS KEY fuse. If the engine stilldoes not start with the other key, your vehicleneeds service. If your vehicle does start, the firstkey may be faulty. See your dealer or a locksmithwho can service the PASS-Key® III to have a newkey made. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 497.It is possible for the PASS-Key® III decoder to learnthe transponder value of a new or replacement key.Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle.This procedure is for learning additional keys only.If all the currently programmed keys are lost or donot operate, you must see your dealer or alocksmith who can service PASS-Key® III to havekeys made and programmed to the system.

See your dealer or a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key® III to get a new key blank that iscut exactly as the ignition key that operates thesystem.

To program the new key, do the following:

1. Verify the new key has PK3 stamped on it.

2. Insert the original, already programmedkey into the ignition lock cylinder and start theengine. If the engine will not start, see yourdealer for service.

3. After the engine has started, turn the key toLOCK and remove the key.

4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it toRUN within 10 seconds of removing theprevious key.

5. The security message will turn off once thekey has been programmed. It may not beapparent that the security message went ondue to how quickly the key is programmed.

6. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keysare to be programmed.

127

If you are ever driving and the security messagecomes on and stays on, you will be able to restartyour engine if you turn it off. Your PASS-Key® IIIsystem, however, is not working properly and mustbe serviced by your dealer. Your vehicle is notprotected by the PASS-Key® III system atthis time.

If you lose or damage a PASS-Key® III key, seeyour dealer or a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key® III to have a new key made.

Starting and Operating YourVehicle

New Vehicle Break-In

Notice: Your vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it will perform better inthe long run if you follow these guidelines:• Do not drive at any one constant speed,

fast or slow, for the first 500 miles(805 km). Do not make full-throttle starts.Avoid downshifting to brake, or slow,the vehicle.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first200 miles (322 km) or so. During this timeyour new brake linings are not yet brokenin. Hard stops with new linings can meanpremature wear and earlier replacement.Follow this breaking-in guideline every timeyou get new brake linings.

• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. SeeTowing a Trailer on page 386 for the trailertowing capabilities of your vehicle and moreinformation.

Following break-in, engine speed and load canbe gradually increased.

128

Ignition PositionsThe key can be turned to one of four positionswhile in the ignition switch.

A (LOCK): This is the only position from whichyou can remove the key. This position locksyour ignition and transaxle.

Notice: Using a tool to force the key from theignition switch could cause damage orbreak the key. Use the correct key and turn thekey only with your hand. Make sure the keyis all the way in. If none of this works,then your vehicle needs service.

B (ACCESSORY): This is the position in whichyou can operate the electrical accessories, such asthe radio.

C (RUN): This is the position to which the switchreturns after the engine is started and the ignitionkey is released. This is the position for driving. Evenwhile the engine is not running, RUN can be used tooperate your electrical accessories and to displaysome instrument panel warning lights.

The battery could be drained if you leave the key inthe ACCESSORY or RUN position with the engineoff. You may not be able to start your vehicle if thebattery is allowed to drain for an extended periodof time.

D (START): This position starts the engine. Whenthe engine starts, release the ignition key. Theswitch will return to RUN for driving.

129

Key In the IgnitionNever leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as itis an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If youleave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle,a chime will sound, when you open the driver’sdoor. Always remember to remove your key fromthe ignition and take it with you. This will lockyour ignition and transaxle. Also, always rememberto lock the doors.

The battery could be drained if you leave the keyin the ignition while your vehicle is parked.You may not be able to start your vehicle after ithas been parked for an extended period of time.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)With RAP, your power windows and the audiosystem will continue to work for up to 10 minutesafter the engine is turned off or until eitherdoor is opened. If a door is opened, the powerwindows and audio system will shut off.

Starting the EngineMove your shift lever to PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not start inany other position — that is a safety feature. Torestart when you are already moving, useNEUTRAL (N) only.

Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehiclemoving could damage the transaxle. Shiftinto PARK (P) only when your vehicle isstopped.

1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turnyour ignition key to START. When the enginestarts, let go of the key. The idle speed will godown as your engine warms up. Do not racethe engine immediately after starting it.Operate the engine and transaxle gently untilthe oil warms up and lubricates all movingparts.

130

Your vehicle has a Computer-ControlledCranking System. This feature assists instarting the engine and protects the electricalsystem. If the ignition key is turned to theSTART position, and then released when theengine begins cranking, the engine willcontinue cranking until the vehicle starts oruntil it exceeds the maximum crankingtime allowed, approximately 15 seconds toprevent cranking motor damage. To preventstarter-motor gear damage, this systemalso prevents cranking if the engine is alreadyrunning. The engine cranking can bestopped by turning the ignition switch to theACCESSORY or LOCK position.

Notice: Holding your key in START for longerthan 15 seconds at a time will cause yourbattery to be drained much sooner. And theexcessive heat can damage your starter motor.Wait about 15 seconds between each try tohelp avoid draining your battery or damagingyour starter.

2. If the engine does not start in 10 seconds,push the accelerator pedal about one-quarterof the way down while you turn the key toSTART. Do this until the engine starts.As soon as it does, let go of the key.

3. If your engine still will not start, or starts butthen stops, it could be flooded with too muchgasoline. Try pushing your acceleratorpedal all the way to the floor and holding itthere as you hold the key in START fora maximum of 15 seconds. This clears theextra gasoline from the engine. If the enginestill will not start, or starts briefly but thenstops again, repeat Step 1 or 2, depending onthe temperature. When the engine starts,release the key and the accelerator pedal.

Notice: Your engine is designed to work withthe electronics in your vehicle. If you addelectrical parts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engine operates. Beforeadding electrical equipment, check withyour dealer. If you do not, your engine mightnot perform properly. Any resulting damagewould not be covered by your vehicle’swarranty.

131

Engine Coolant HeaterYour vehicle may have an engine coolant heater.In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder,the engine coolant heater can help. You will geteasier starting and better fuel economy duringengine warm-up. Usually, the coolant heatershould be plugged in a minimum of four hoursprior to starting your vehicle. At temperaturesabove 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant heater is notrequired. Your vehicle may also have an internalthermostat in the plug end of the cord. Thiswill prevent operation of the engine coolant heaterwhen the temperature is at or above 0°F (−18°C)as noted on the cord.

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electricalcord. The electrical cord is located on thedriver’s side of the engine compartment.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt ACoutlet.

{CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungroundedoutlet could cause an electrical shock.Also, the wrong kind of extension cordcould overheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plug the cordinto a properly grounded three-prong110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will notreach, use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplugand store the cord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts. If you donot, it could be damaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heaterplugged in? The answer depends on the outsidetemperature, the kind of oil you have, andsome other things. Instead of trying to listeverything here, we ask that you contact yourdealer in the area where you will be parking yourvehicle. The dealer can give you the bestadvice for that particular area.

132

Automatic Transaxle Operation

Maximum engine speed is limited when you are inPARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), to protect drivelinecomponents from improper operation.

There are several different positions for your shiftlever.

PARK (P): This gear position locks your frontwheels. It is the best position to use when you startyour engine because your vehicle cannot moveeasily.

Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)before starting the engine. Your vehicle has anautomatic transaxle shift lock control system. Youmust fully apply your regular brakes first andthen press the shift lever button before you canshift from PARK (P) when the ignition key isin RUN. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease

pressure on the shift lever and push the shift leverall the way info PARK (P) as you maintainbrake application. Then press the shift lever buttonand move the shift lever into another gear. SeeShifting Out of Park (P) on page 139.

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)with the parking brake firmly set. Yourvehicle can roll.

Do not leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. If you haveleft the engine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure your vehicle will notmove, even when you are on fairly levelground, always set your parking brakeand move the shift lever to PARK (P). SeeShifting Into Park (P) on page 138. If youare pulling a trailer, see Towing a Traileron page 386.

133

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damagethe transaxle. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Shift toREVERSE (R) only after your vehicle isstopped.

To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out ofsnow, ice or sand without damaging yourtransaxle, see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 377.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesnot connect with the wheels. To restart whenyou are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle isbeing towed.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while yourengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot is firmly onthe brake pedal, your vehicle could movevery rapidly. You could lose control andhit people or objects. Do not shift into adrive gear while your engine is running athigh speed.

Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) while the engine is running athigh speed may damage the transaxle.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Be sure the engine is not running athigh speeds when shifting your vehicle.

134

DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. Itprovides the best fuel economy for your vehicle. Ifyou need more power for passing, and you are:

• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), pushyour accelerator pedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, pushthe accelerator all the way down.The vehicle will shift down to the next gearand have more power.

Downshifting the transaxle in slippery roadconditions could result in skidding, see Skiddingunder Loss of Control on page 362

Notice: If your vehicle seems to start uprather slowly or not shift gears when you gofaster, and you continue to drive your vehiclethat way, you could damage the transaxle.Have your vehicle serviced right away. You candrive in SECOND (2) when you are drivingless than 35 mph (55 km/h) and DRIVE (D) forhigher speeds until then.

Warm-Up ShiftYour vehicle has a computer controlled transaxledesigned to warm up the engine faster whenthe outside temperature is 35°F (2°C) or colder.You may notice that the transaxle will shift ata higher vehicle speed until the engine is warmedup. This is a normal condition designed toprovide heat to the passenger compartment anddefrost the windows more quickly. See ClimateControl System on page 193 and Dual ClimateControl System on page 197 for more information.

THIRD (3): This position is also used for normaldriving. It reduces vehicle speed more thanDRIVE (D) without using your brakes. You mightchoose THIRD (3) instead of DRIVE (D) whendriving on hilly, winding roads, when towinga trailer, so there is less shifting between gearsand when going down a steep hill.

135

SECOND (2): This position reduces vehicle speedmore than DRIVE (D) without using your brakes.You can use SECOND (2) on hills. It can helpcontrol your speed as you go down steep mountainroads, but then you would also want to use yourbrakes off and on.

Notice: Driving in SECOND (2) for more than25 miles (40 km) or at speeds over 55 mph(90 km/h) may damage the transaxle. Also,shifting into SECOND (2) at speeds above65 mph (105 km/h) can cause damage. Drive inTHIRD (3) or DRIVE (D) instead of SECOND (2).

Notice: If your vehicle seems to start up ratherslowly, or if it seems not to shift gears as yougo faster, something may be wrong with atransaxle system sensor. If you drive very farthat way, your vehicle can be damaged. So, ifthis happens, have your vehicle serviced rightaway. Until then, you can use SECOND (2) whenyou are driving less than 35 mph (55 km/h) andTHIRD (3) for higher speeds.

FIRST (1): This position reduces vehicle speedeven more than SECOND (2) without using yourbrakes. You can use it on very steep hills, or indeep snow or mud. If the shift lever is put inFIRST (1) while the vehicle is moving forward, thetransaxle will not shift into first gear until the vehicleis going slowly enough.

Notice: Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hill using only theaccelerator pedal may damage the transaxle. Ifyou are stuck, do not spin the tires. Whenstopping on a hill, use the brakes, or parkingbrake to hold the vehicle in place.

136

Parking Brake

The parking brake islocated under theinstrument panel on thedriver’s side of thevehicle.

To set the parking brake, hold the regular brakepedal down with your right foot and push down onthe parking brake pedal with your left foot.

If the ignition is on, the brake system warning lightwill come on. See Brake System Warning Lighton page 214.

To release the parking brake, hold the regularbrake pedal down with your right foot whileyou push down on the parking brake pedal withyour left foot. When you lift your left foot from theparking brake pedal, it will pop up to thereleased position.

Notice: Driving with the parking brake on canoverheat the brake system and causepremature wear or damage to brake systemparts. Verify that the parking brake is fullyreleased and the brake warning light isoff before driving.

If you are towing a trailer and are parking on anyhill, see Towing a Trailer on page 386.

137

Shifting Into Park (P)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.Your vehicle can roll. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move, evenwhen you are on fairly level ground, usethe steps that follow. If you are pulling atrailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 386.

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right footand set the parking brake with your left foot.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pullingthe shift lever toward you and moving it up asfar as it will go.

3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you

can leave your vehicle with the ignition key inyour hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

Leaving Your Vehicle With the EngineRunning

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehiclewith the engine running. Your vehiclecould move suddenly if the shift lever isnot fully in PARK (P) with the parkingbrake firmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, it couldoverheat and even catch fire. You orothers could be injured. Do not leave yourvehicle with the engine running.

If you have to leave your vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P)and the parking brake is firmly set beforeyou leave it. After you move the shift lever intoPARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down.Then, see if you can move the shift lever awayfrom PARK (P) without first pulling it toward you. Ifyou can, it means that the shift lever was notfully locked into PARK (P).

138

Torque LockIf you are parking on a hill and you do not shiftyour vehicle into PARK (P) properly, the weight ofthe vehicle may put too much force on theparking pawl in the transaxle. You may find itdifficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK (P). Thisis called torque lock. To prevent torque lock,set the parking brake and then shift into PARK (P)properly before you leave the driver’s seat. Tofind out how, see Shifting Into Park (P) onpage 138.

When you are ready to drive, move the shift leverout of PARK (P) before you release the parkingbrake.

If torque lock does occur, you may need to haveanother vehicle push yours a little uphill totake some of the pressure from the parking pawlin the transaxle, so you can pull the shift leverout of PARK (P).

Shifting Out of Park (P)Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lockcontrol system which locks the shift lever inPARK (P) when the ignition is in the LOCK position.In addition, you must fully apply your regular brakesbefore you can shift from PARK (P) when theignition is in RUN. See Automatic TransaxleOperation on page 133.

139

Parking Over Things That Burn{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hotexhaust parts under your vehicle andignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,dry grass, or other things that can burn.

140

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains thegas carbon monoxide (CO), which youcannot see or smell. It can causeunconsciousness and death.

You might have exhaust coming in if:• Your exhaust system sounds strange

or different.• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a

collision.



• Your vehicle was damaged whendriving over high points on the roador over road debris.

• Repairs were not done correctly.• Your vehicle or exhaust system has

been modified improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is coming intoyour vehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windowsdown to blow out any CO; and

• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

141

Running the Engine While ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running. But ifyou ever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaustinto your vehicle. See the earlier cautionunder Engine Exhaust on page 141.

Also, idling in a closed-in place can letdeadly carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle even if the climate control fan is atthe highest setting. One place this canhappen is a garage. Exhaust — withCO — can come in easily. NEVER park ina garage with the engine running.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.See Winter Driving on page 373.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leaveyour vehicle when the engine is runningunless you have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,always set your parking brake and movethe shift lever to PARK (P).

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehiclewill not move. See Shifting Into Park (P) onpage 138.

If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer onpage 386.

142

Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorWhile sitting in a comfortable driving position,adjust the mirror so you can see clearly behindyour vehicle. Grip the mirror in the center to moveit up or down and side to side. The day/nightadjustment can lessen glare from the headlampsbehind your vehicle. Pull the tab forward fordaytime use; push it back for night use.

Outside Power Mirrors

The controls, located onthe driver’s door,operate both outsiderearview mirrors.

Push the top control to the left or right to chooseeither the driver’s or passenger’s outsiderearview mirror. Leave the control in the centerposition to prevent moving the mirrors oncethey are adjusted.

Use the arrows on the bottom control to adjust theposition of each mirror. Adjust each mirror sothat you can see the side of your vehicle and thearea behind it, while sitting in a comfortabledriving position.

Both outside mirrors can be folded forward orrearward to prevent damage when going throughcar washes or confined spaces.

143

Outside Convex Mirror

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (likeother vehicles) look farther away thanthey really are. If you cut too sharply intothe right lane, you could hit a vehicle onyour right. Check your inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convexmirror’s surface is curved so more can beseen from the driver’s seat. It also makes thingsappear farther away than they really are.

Outside Heated MirrorsThe outside rearview mirrors will heat to help clearthem of ice, snow, and condensation when the rearwindow defogger is turned on. See “Rear WindowDefogger” in Climate Control System on page 193or Dual Climate Control System on page 197.

144

OnStar® System

OnStar® uses several innovative technologies andlive advisors to provide you with a wide rangeof safety, security, information, and convenienceservices. If your airbags deploy, the system isdesigned to make an automatic call to OnStar®

Emergency where we can request emergencyservices be sent to your location. If you lockyour keys in the vehicle, call OnStar® at1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signalto unlock your doors. If you need roadsideassistance, press the OnStar® button and theycan contact Roadside Service for you.

A complete OnStar® Owner’s Guide and theTerms and Conditions of the OnStar® SubscriptionService Agreement are included in the vehicle’sOnStar® Subscriber Information packet locatedin your vehicle. For more information, visitwww.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, contactOnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827),or press the OnStar® button to speak with anOnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

OnStar® ServicesFor new vehicles equipped with OnStar®, the Safe& Sound Plan, or the Directions & Connections®

Plan is included for one year from the date ofpurchase. You can extend this plan beyondthe first year, or upgrade to the Directions &Connections® Plan to meet your needs. For moreinformation, press the OnStar® button to speakwith an advisor.

145

Safe & Sound Plan• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment

• Emergency Services

• Roadside Assistance

• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance

• AccidentAssist

• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert

• OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics

• OnStar® Hands-Free Calling

• OnStar® Virtual Advisor

Directions & Connections® Plan• All Safe & Sound Plan Services

• Driving Directions

• RideAssist

• Information and Convenience Services

OnStar® Hands-Free CallingOnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows OnStar®

subscribers to make and receive calls using voicecommands at the touch of a button. Hands-FreeCalling is fully integrated into the vehicle, and maybe used with Pre-Paid Minute Packages orlinked to a cell phone through OnStar® SharedMinutes Plan. To find out more, refer to theOnStar® Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box,visit www.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, orspeak with an OnStar® advisor by pressing theOnStar® button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827).

OnStar® Virtual AdvisorYour vehicle may have Virtual Advisor. It is afeature of OnStar® Hands-Free Calling that usesyour minutes to access weather, local trafficreports, and stock quotes. By pressing the phonebutton and giving a few simple voice commands,you can browse through the various topics.Customize your information profile atwww.myonstar.com. See the OnStar® Owner’sGuide for more information.

146

OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls

$: Your vehicle may be equipped with aTalk/Mute button that can be used to interact withOnStar®.

See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 341for more information.

When calling into voice mail systems or to dialdirectory numbers, press this button once, wait forthe response, say the number(s) to be dialed,wait for the number(s) to be repeated and then say“dial.” See the OnStar® Owner’s Guide for moreinformation.

Universal Home RemoteSystem

Universal Home Remote System(With Three Round LED)The Universal Home Remote System provides away to replace up to three hand-heldRadio-Frequency (RF) transmitters used toactivate devices such as garage door openers,security systems, and home lighting.




The FCC Grant of Equipment AuthorizationCertificate number is KOBGTE05A.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:



The Canadian Registration ID number is3521A-GTE05A.


147

Universal Home Remote System(With One Triangular LED)The Universal Home Remote System provides away to replace up to three hand-heldradio-frequency (RF) transmitters used to activatedevices such as garage door openers, securitysystems, and home lighting.




The FCC Grant of Equipment AuthorizationCertificate number is CB2SAHL3.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:



The Canadian Registration ID number is2791021849A.


148

Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With Three Round LED)

Your vehicle may have the Universal Home RemoteSystem. If there are three round Light EmittingDiode (LED) above the Universal Home RemoteSystem buttons, follow the instructions below. Ifthere is one triangular LED above the UniversalHome Remote System buttons, follow theinstructions under Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (with one triangular LED).

This system provides a way to replace up tothree remote control transmitters used to activatedevices such as garage door openers, securitysystems, and home lighting.

Do not use the this system with any garage dooropener that does not have the stop and reversefeature. This includes any garage door openermodel manufactured before April 1, 1982.

Read the instructions completely before attemptingto program the transmitter. Because of the stepsinvolved, it may be helpful to have anotherperson available to assist you in programming thetransmitter.

Be sure to keep the original remote controltransmitter for use in other vehicles, as well as, forfuture programming. You only need the originalremote control transmitter for fixed codeprogramming. It is also recommended that uponthe sale or lease termination of the vehicle,the programmed buttons should be erased forsecurity purposes. See “Erasing your UniversalHome Remote Buttons” later in this section.

149

Be sure that people and objects are clear of thegarage door or security device you areprogramming. When programming a garage door,it is advised to park outside of the garage.

If you do not know if your garage door opener is afixed code or rolling code device, open yourgarage door opener’s remote control battery cover.Your garage door opener is a fixed code deviceif there is a panel of switches. If not, yourgarage door opener is a rolling code device.

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Fixed CodeFixed Code garage door openers are used forgarage doors produced prior to 1996. Fixed codeuses the same coded signal every time, whichis manually programmed by setting DIP switchesfor a unique personal code.

Follow these steps to program up tothree channels:

1. Remove the battery cover of the hand-heldtransmitter.

150

2. Write down the eight to 12 coding switchsettings from left to right. When the switchis in the up position, write “on,” and when aswitch is in the down position, write “off”.If a switch is set between the up and downposition, write “middle”.

3. Enter these positions into the Universal HomeRemote System as follows.Press and release all three buttons at the sametime to put the device into programming mode.

4. The indicator light will blink slowly. In orderfrom left to right, and within two andone-half minutes, enter each switch settinginto the Universal Home Remote System.Push one button for each switch as follows:

• Left button = “on” switch position.

• Right button = “off” switch position.

• Middle button = “middle” switch position.

Example of Switch Settings Example

151

5. After entering the switch settings, press andrelease all three buttons at the same time.The indicator lights will turn on.

6. Press and hold the button you would like touse to control the garage door until thegarage door moves. The indicator light abovethe selected button should slowly blink.You may need to hold the button from five to55 seconds.

7. Immediately release the button when thegarage door moves. The indicator light willblink rapidly until programming is complete.

8. Press and release the button again. Thegarage door should move, confirming thatprogramming is successful and complete.

To program another device such as an additionalgarage door opener, a security device, orhome lighting, repeat Steps 1 through 8, choosinga different function button in Step 7 than whatyou used for the garage door opener.

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Rolling CodeRolling code garage door openers are used forgarage doors produced after 1996 and arecode protected. Rolling code means the codedsignal is changed every time your remote controlgarage door opener is used.

Programming a rolling code garage door openerinvolves time-sensitive actions, so read theentire procedure before you begin. If you do notfollow these actions, the device will time outand you will have to repeat the procedure.

Follow these steps to program up tothree channels:

1. Press the two outside buttons at the sametime for one to two seconds, and immediatelyrelease them.

152

2. Go to the garage. Locate the garage doormotor head and press and release the“learn” button.After pressing the “learn” button, you have10 to 30 seconds to complete Step 4depending on your garage control unit. If youcannot locate the “learn” button, refer tothe owners guide for your garage door opener.

3. Press and hold the button you would like touse to control the garage door until thegarage door moves. The indicator light, abovethe selected button, should slowly blink.You may need to hold the button from five to20 seconds.

4. Immediately release the button when thegarage door moves. The indicator light willblink rapidly until programming is complete.

5. Press and release the button again. Thegarage door should move, confirming thatprogramming is successful and complete.

To program another device such as an additionalgarage door opener, a security device, orhome lighting, repeat Steps 1 through 6, choosinga different function button in Step 4 than whatyou used for the garage door opener.

Using Universal Home RemotePress and hold the appropriate button for at leasthalf of a second. The indicator light will comeon while the signal is being transmitted.

153

Reprogramming Universal HomeRemote ButtonsYou can reprogram any of the three buttons byrepeating the instructions.

Erasing Universal Home RemoteButtonsYou should erase the programmed buttons whenyou sell the vehicle or terminate your lease.

To erase either rolling code or fixed code on theUniversal Home Remote device, do the following:

1. Press and hold the two outside buttons atthe same time for approximately 20 seconds,until the indicator lights, located directlyabove the buttons, begin to blink rapidly.

2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink,release both buttons. The codes from allbutton will be erased.

For additional information on Universal HomeRemote, see Customer Assistance Officeson page 530.

Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With One Triangular LED)

Your vehicle may have the Universal HomeRemote System. If there is one triangular LightEmitting Diode (LED) above the UniversalHome Remote buttons, follow the instructionsbelow. If your vehicle has three round LED abovethe Universal Home Remote buttons, follow theinstructions under Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (with three round LED).

Do not use the Universal Home Remote with anygarage door opener that does not have the stopand reverse feature. This includes any garage dooropener model manufactured before April 1, 1982. Ifyou have a newer garage door opener with rollingcodes, please be sure to follow Steps 6 through 8 tocomplete the programming of your Universal HomeRemote Transmitter.

154

Read the instructions completely before attemptingto program the Universal Home Remote. Becauseof the steps involved, it may be helpful to haveanother person available to assist you in theprogramming steps.

Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use inother vehicles as well as for future UniversalHome Remote programming. It is alsorecommended that upon the sale of the vehicle,the programmed Universal Home Remote buttonsshould be erased for security purposes. See“Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons” later inthis section or, for assistance, see CustomerAssistance Offices on page 530.

Be sure that people and objects are clearof the garage door or gate operator you areprogramming. When programming a garage door,it is advised to park outside of the garage.

It is recommended that a new battery be installed inyour hand-held transmitter for quicker and moreaccurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.

Programming Universal Home RemoteFollow these steps to program up to three channels:

1. Press and hold down the two outsideUniversal Home Remote buttons, releasingonly when the Universal Home Remoteindicator light begins to flash, after20 seconds. Do not hold down the buttons forlonger than 30 seconds and do not repeatthis step to program a second and/orthird hand-held transmitter to the remainingtwo Universal Home Remote buttons.

2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitterabout 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from theUniversal Home Remote buttons whilekeeping the indicator light in view.

3. Simultaneously press and hold both thedesired Universal Home Remote buttonand the hand-held transmitter button. Do notrelease the buttons until Step 4 has beencompleted.Some entry gates and garage door openersmay require you to substitute Step 3 withthe procedure noted in “Gate Operator andCanadian Programming” later in this section.

155

4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first andthen rapidly after Universal Home Remotesuccessfully receives the frequency signalfrom the hand-held transmitter. Release bothbuttons.

5. Press and hold the newly-trained UniversalHome Remote button and observe theindicator light.If the indicator light stays on continuously,programming is complete and your deviceshould activate when the Universal HomeRemote button is pressed and released.To program the remaining two Universal HomeRemote buttons, begin with Step 2 under“Programming Universal Home Remote.” Donot repeat Step 1 as this will erase all ofthe programmed channels.If the indicator light blinks rapidly for twoseconds and then turns to a constant light,continue with Steps 6 through 8 followingto complete the programming of a rolling-codedevice, most commonly, a garage dooropener.

6. Locate in the garage, the garage door openerreceiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”or “Smart” button. This can usually befound where the hanging antenna wire isattached to the motor-head unit.

7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or“Smart” button. The name and color ofthe button may vary by manufacturer.You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.

8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and holdthe programmed Universal Home Remotebutton for two seconds, then release.Repeat the press/hold/release sequence asecond time, and depending on the brand ofthe garage door opener or other rollingcode device, repeat this sequence a third timeto complete the programming.The Universal Home Remote should nowactivate the rolling-code device.

To program the remaining two Universal HomeRemote buttons, begin with Step 2 of“Programming Universal Home Remote.” Do notrepeat Step 1, as this will erase all previousprogramming from the Universal Home Remotebuttons.

156

Gate Operator and CanadianProgrammingCanadian radio-frequency laws require transmittersignals to time out or quit after several secondsof transmission. This may not be long enoughfor Universal Home Remote to pick up the signalduring programming. Similarly, some U.S. gateoperators are manufactured to time out inthe same manner.

If you live in Canada, or you are having difficultyprogramming a gate operator or garage dooropener by using the “Programming UniversalHome Remote” procedures, regardless of whereyou live, replace Step 3 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” with the following:

Continue to press and hold the Universal HomeRemote button while you press and release everytwo seconds (cycle) the hand-held transmitterbutton until the frequency signal has beensuccessfully accepted by the Universal HomeRemote. The Universal Home Remote indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.Proceed with Step 4 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” to complete.

Using Universal Home RemotePress and hold the appropriate Universal HomeRemote button for at least half of a second.The indicator light will come on while the signal isbeing transmitted.

Erasing Universal Home RemoteButtonsTo erase programming from the three UniversalHome Remote buttons do the following:

1. Press and hold down the two outside buttonsuntil the indicator light begins to flash, after20 seconds. Do not hold the two outsidebuttons for longer than 30 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

The Universal Home Remote is now in the training(learning) mode and can be programmed at anytime beginning with Step 2 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” shown earlier inthis section.

Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they canbe reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming aSingle Universal Home Remote Button” followingthis section.

157

Reprogramming a Single UniversalHome Remote ButtonTo program a device to Universal Home Remoteusing a Universal Home Remote buttonpreviously trained, follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired Universal HomeRemote button. Do not release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after20 seconds. While still holding the UniversalHome Remote button, proceed with Step2 under “Programming Universal HomeRemote” shown earlier in this section.

For additional information on Universal HomeRemote, see Customer Assistance Officeson page 530.

Storage AreasYour vehicle’s large carrying capacity can storemany items. If the vehicle has an extendedwheelbase, it can carry even larger items. Thefloor pins that are used to attach the seats, can beused to secure larger loads.

Glove BoxIf the glove box has a lock, put your key into thelock and turn the key counterclockwise. Toopen the glove box, pull the latch release.

The glove box door has a detent to prevent thedoor from lowering too far. Open the glovebox until the door is partway open, then pull thedoor down if you need it fully opened.

To close the glove box, the door must be pushedup past the detent. To lock the glove box, putyour key into the lock and turn the key clockwise.

Cupholder(s)There are cupholders located below the centerinstrument panel switchbank. The cupholders havea rubber liner that can be removed, so thatlarger cups can fit into the cupholders. You canalso remove the liner to clean it.

To use the cupholders, pull the tray out. Push thetray back when not in use.

Your vehicle may be equipped with cupholders inthe second row.

158

Overhead Console (With Rail)If your vehicle is equipped with an overheadconsole, it may contain the following:

• Reading lamps. See Front Reading Lamps onpage 186 or Rear Reading Lamps onpage 186.

• Switchbank. See Overhead ConsoleSwitchbank on page 188.

• OnStar® System buttons. See OnStar®

System on page 145.

• Universal Home Remote buttons. SeeUniversal Home Remote System (With ThreeRound LED) on page 147 or UniversalHome Remote System (With One TriangularLED) on page 148.

See your dealer to purchase additional items forthe rail system.

Storage BinYour vehicle may have a storage bin located onthe overhead rail that you can use for storage.

If your bin is equipped with the finger size latchesdo the following:

1. Place the storage bin on to the rails in thedesired location.

2. Push firmly upward on the bin while supportingit with one hand.

3. Push in on the latch and then rotate it90 degrees.

159

4. Firmly press down making sure the latch isflat with the ribs (A) on the storage bin.

5. Switch hands and repeat Steps 2 through 4for the latch on the opposite side of thestorage bin.

6. Reverse these steps in order to remove thestorage bin.

If your bin is equipped with the hand size latchesdo the following:

1. Place the storage bin on to the rails in thedesired location.

2. Push firmly upward on the bin while supportingit with one hand.

3. The bin will snap into place.

4. To remove the bin, support the bin withone hand while pulling each latch up and awayfrom the bin.

160

The contents of the bin should never weigh morethan 1.5 lbs (0.7 kg).

Always make sure to close and latch the binbefore driving.

Overhead Console (Without Rail)If your vehicle has an overhead console withoutthe rail system, it has two reading lights, acourtesy light, and a switchbank. See OverheadConsole Switchbank on page 188 for moreinformation.

Floor Console Storage AreaIf your vehicle has a storage compartment locatedon the front console below the front cupholders.Pull up and then forward on the handle to open thestorage compartment.

Folding Tray

Your vehicle may beequipped with foldingconvenience trayslocated between seats.To use each tray lift upon the handle located onits front end, whilepulling up on the tray tolock it into place. Thereare four cupholders oneach tray.

161

Luggage Carrier

{CAUTION:

If you try to carry something on top ofyour vehicle that is longer or wider thanthe luggage carrier — like paneling,plywood, a mattress and so forth — thewind can catch it as you drive along. Thiscan cause you to lose control. What youare carrying could be violently torn off,and this could cause you or other driversto have a collision, and of course damageyour vehicle. You may be able to carrysomething like this inside. But, nevercarry something longer or wider than theluggage carrier on top of your vehicle.

If you have the luggage carrier, you can loadthings on top of your vehicle. Crossrails are notstandard on this vehicle and must be purchased atyour dealer.

Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrierthat weighs more than 150 lbs (68 kg) orhangs over the rear or sides of the vehiclemay damage your vehicle. Load cargo so thatit rests on the slats as far forward aspossible and against the side rails, makingsure to fasten it securely.

Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacitywhen loading your vehicle. For more informationon vehicle capacity and loading, see Loading YourVehicle on page 378.

To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you aredriving, check now and then to make surethe cargo is still securely fastened.

162

Convenience Net (With RearConvenience Center)Your vehicle may have a convenience net. Theconvenience net is designed to help keepsmall loads, from falling out of the vehicle whenthe liftgate is opened. Install the conveniencenet at the rear of your vehicle, inside the liftgate.

To use the convenience net, do the following:

1. Attach the upper loops to the posts on bothsides of the liftgate opening. The label on thenet should be in the upper left corner.

2. Attach the lower loops to the tabs at the rearedge of the rear convenience center.

When not in use, it is recommended that you takedown the convenience net to extend the life ofthe net and to help retain its elasticity, and to keepthe rear exit clear.

Convenience Net (Without RearConvenience Center)Your vehicle may have a convenience net. Theconvenience net is designed to help keepsmall loads, like grocery bags, from falling over.Install the convenience net at the rear of yourvehicle, inside the liftgate.

To use the convenience net, do the following:

1. Attach the upper loops to the posts on bothsides of the liftgate opening. The label on thenet should be in the upper left corner.

2. Attach the lower hooks to the metal rings onthe floor.

3. Once you have loaded items into the net,stretch the higher side of the net up and overthe top of the load to hold it firmly in place.

The convenience net has a maximum capacity of100 lbs (45 kg). It is not designed to holdlarger, heavier loads. Store such loads on the floorof your vehicle, as far forward as you can.

When not in use, it is recommended that you takedown the convenience net to extend the life ofthe net and to help retain its elasticity, and to keepthe rear exit clear.

163

Convenience Center

{CAUTION:

If any removable convenience item is notsecured properly, it can move around in acollision or sudden stop. People in thevehicle could be injured. Be sure tosecure any such item properly.

Your vehicle may have a convenience center. Itprovides extra storage space for the rear ofthe vehicle.

To open the convenience center, pull up on thedoor latch located on the front of the cover.The convenience center cover has two automaticprop rods to hold it up and in place.

To close the convenience center cover, you mustpull one of the prop rod linkages toward youwhile holding onto the door latch and lower theconvenience center cover to close it.

Removing the Convenience Center1. Make sure that all items are off the

convenience center and that it is empty.

2. Turn the hand knob, located at the rear of theconvenience center, counterclockwise until theknob is loose.

3. Lift up on the hand knob, then grip and pullup on the convenience center to remove itfrom the vehicle.

164

Replacing the Convenience Center1. Make sure the third row seat is properly

installed in the vehicle. See Third Row Seat onpage 21 for more information. If the thirdrow seat is not in the vehicle with theconvenience center, the convenience centerwill not be locked into the correct positionin the vehicle.

2. Make sure that the convenience center isempty and closed.

3. Lift the convenience center up and into therear of the vehicle.

4. Slide the convenience center in and align it tothe rear seat.

5. Press down on the front of the conveniencecenter so the center is aligned on the sillmounting bracket.

6. Turn the hand knob clockwise until it is tight.

7. Pull up on the convenience center to makesure it is locked into place.

The cover of the convenience center can be left inits upright position while the vehicle is moving.

The convenience center and the third rowseat both have a maximum weight capacity of400 lbs (181.6 kg).

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

165

✍ NOTES

166

Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 170Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 172Other Warning Devices ............................. 172Horn .......................................................... 172Tilt Wheel .................................................. 172Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 173Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 173Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 174Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 174Windshield Wipers ..................................... 175Windshield Washer .................................... 175Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...................... 176Cruise Control ........................................... 177Exterior Lamps .......................................... 181Wiper Activated Headlamps ....................... 182Headlamps on Reminder ........................... 182Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/

Automatic Headlamp System .................. 182Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 183Interior Lamps Control ............................... 184Dome Lamp .............................................. 184Entry Lighting ............................................ 184Delayed Lighting ........................................ 185Exit Lighting .............................................. 185Front Reading Lamps ................................ 186

Rear Reading Lamps ................................ 186Cargo Lamp .............................................. 186Electric Power Management ...................... 186Battery Run-Down Protection ..................... 187Overhead Console Switchbank .................. 188Ultrasonic Rear Parking

Assist (URPA) ........................................ 188Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 191Power Outlet 115 Volt Alternating

Current .................................................. 192Cigarette Lighter ........................................ 193

Climate Controls ......................................... 193Climate Control System ............................. 193Dual Climate Control System ..................... 197Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 200Rear Climate Control System

(Option A, Uplevel) ................................ 200Rear Climate Control System

(Option B, Uplevel) ................................ 203Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............. 205

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 207Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 208Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 209Trip Odometer ........................................... 209

Section 3 Instrument Panel

167

Tachometer ............................................... 209Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 209Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light ....... 210Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 210Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 211Charging System Light .............................. 213Brake System Warning Light ..................... 214Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ...... 215Traction Control System (TCS)

Warning Light ........................................ 216Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ............ 217Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 217Oil Pressure Light ..................................... 220Security Light ............................................ 221Cruise Control Light .................................. 221Highbeam On Light ................................... 221Fuel Gage ................................................. 222Low Fuel Warning Light ............................ 222

Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 223DIC Operation and Displays ...................... 224DIC Compass (Uplevel Only) ..................... 228DIC Warnings and Messages .................... 230DIC Vehicle Personalization

(Uplevel Only) ........................................ 249

Audio System(s) ......................................... 258Setting the Time ........................................ 259Radio with CD ........................................... 260Using an MP3 ........................................... 274XM Radio Messages ................................. 280Navigation/Radio System ........................... 282Rear Seat Entertainment System

(Option A, Uplevel) ................................ 282Rear Seat Entertainment System

(Option B, Uplevel) ................................ 298Rear Seat Audio (RSA)

(Option A, Uplevel) ................................ 314Rear Seat Audio (RSA)

(Option B, Uplevel) ................................ 316Mobile Digital Media System ..................... 319Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................. 340Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................. 341Radio Reception ........................................ 342Care of Your CDs and DVDs .................... 343Care of the CD and DVD Player ............... 343Fixed Mast Antenna .................................. 344XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ....... 344Chime Level Adjustment ............................ 344

Section 3 Instrument Panel

168

✍ NOTES

169

Instrument Panel Overview

170

The main components of the instrument panel are the following:

A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustmenton page 200.

B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See TurnSignal/Multifunction Lever on page 173.

C. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped).See Audio Steering Wheel Controls onpage 341.

D. Instrument Panel Cluster. See InstrumentPanel Cluster on page 208.

E. Driver Information Center (DIC) Controls(If Equipped). See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 223.

F. Traction Control System Button (If Equipped).See Traction Control System (TCS) onpage 353.

G. Hazard Warning Flasher Switch. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 172.

H. Passenger Airbag Status And PassengerSeatbelt Reminder Indicator. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator on page 211 andPassenger Safety Belt Reminder Lighton page 210.

I. Audio System. See Audio System(s)on page 258.

J. Exterior Lamps Control. See ExteriorLamps on page 181.

K. Interior Lamps Control. See Interior LampsControl on page 184. Instrument PanelBrightness Control. See Instrument PanelBrightness on page 183.

L. Hood Release. See Hood Releaseon page 409.

M. Parking Brake. See Parking Brakeon page 137.

N. Horn. See Horn on page 172.O. Cruise Controls (If Equipped).

See Cruise Control on page 177.P. Dual Climate Controls. See Dual Climate

Control System on page 197.Q. Heated Seat Controls (If Equipped).

See Heated Seats on page 10.R. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 158.

171

Hazard Warning FlashersYour hazard warning flashers let you warn others.They also let police know you have a problem. Yourfront and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.

The hazard warningflasher button is locatedin the center of theinstrument panel.

Your hazard warning flashers work no matter whatposition your key is in, and even if the key isnot in the ignition switch.Press the button to make the front and rear turnsignal lamps flash on and off. Press the buttonagain to turn the flashers off.When the hazard warning flashers are on, yourturn signals will not work.

Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can set themup at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m)behind your vehicle.

HornPress near or on the horn symbols on yoursteering wheel pad to sound the horn.

Tilt WheelA tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheelbefore you drive. You can raise the steeringwheel to the highest level to give your legs moreroom when you enter and exit the vehicle.

The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheelis located on the left side of the steering column.

To tilt the wheel, hold thewheel and pull the lever.Then move the wheel toa comfortable positionand release the lever tolock the wheel in place.

172

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:

• G Turn and Lane Change Signals. SeeTurn and Lane-Change Signals on page 173.

• 53 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer.See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 174.

• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass onpage 174.

• N Windshield Wipers. See WindshieldWipers on page 175.

• L Windshield Washer. See WindshieldWasher on page 175.

• Z Rear Window Wiper. See WindshieldWasher on page 175.

• = Rear Window Washer. See WindshieldWasher on page 175.

For information on the headlamps, see ExteriorLamps on page 181.

Turn and Lane-Change SignalsThe turn signal has two upward (for right) and twodownward (for left) positions. These positionsallow you to signal a turn or a lane change.

To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up ordown. When the turn is finished, the lever willreturn automatically.

An arrow on theinstrument panelcluster will flash in thedirection of the turnor lane change.

173

To signal a lane change, just raise or lower thelever until the arrow starts to flash. Hold itthere until you complete your lane change. Thelever will return by itself when you release it.

As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrowflashes faster than normal, a signal bulb may beburned out and other drivers will not see your turnsignal.

If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid anaccident. If the arrows do not go on at all when yousignal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and checkthe fuse. See Bulb Replacement on page 443 andFuses and Circuit Breakers on page 497.

If you have a trailer towing option with addedwiring for the trailer lamps, the signal indicator willflash at a normal rate even if a turn signal bulbis burned out. Check the front and rear turn signallamps regularly to make sure they are working.

Turn Signal On ChimeIf either turn signal is left on for more than3/4 mile (1.2 km), a chime will sound to let thedriver know to turn it off. If you need to leave thesignal on for more than 3/4 mile (1.2 km), turnoff the signal and then turn it back on.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerTo change the headlamps from low beam tohigh beam, push the turn signal/multifunction leveraway from you.

When the high beamsare on, this lightwill appear on theinstrument panel cluster.

To change the headlamps from high beam to lowbeam, pull the turn signal/multifunction levertoward you.

Flash-to-PassWhen the headlamps are off, pull the lever towardyou to momentarily turn on the high beams.This will signal that you are going to pass. Whenyou release the lever, they will turn off.

174

Windshield WipersYou control the windshield wipers by turning theband with the wiper symbol on it.

8 (Mist): For a single wiping cycle, turn the bandto mist. Hold it there until the wipers start. Then letgo. The wipers will stop after one wipe. If you wantmore wipes, hold the band on mist longer.

9 (Off): To stop the wipers, move the band to off.

N (Delay): You can set the wiper speed for a longor short delay between wipes. This can be veryuseful in light rain or snow. Turn the band to choosethe delay time. The closer to the top of the lever, theshorter the delay.

6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at lowspeed, turn the band away from you to the first solidband past the delay settings. For high-speedwiping, turn the band further, to the second solidband past the delay settings. To stop the wipers,move the band to off.

1 (High Speed): For high-speed wiping, turnthe band further, to the second solid band past thedelay settings.

Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If they are frozen to thewindshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. Ifyour blades do become worn or damaged, getnew blades or blade inserts.

Windshield Washer

LQ (Windshield Washer): Press and hold thewindshield washer paddle with this symbol onit to wash your windshield. The washers andwipers will operate.

When you release the paddle, the washers willstop, and the wipers will continue to operatefor two cycles, unless your wipers had alreadybeen on. In that case, the wipers will resume thewiper speed you had selected earlier.

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

175

Rear Window Wiper/Washer

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

The controls forthe rear windowwasher/wiper arelocated on theend of the turnsignal/multifunctionlever.

9 (Off): Move the lever to this position to turnthe rear washers/wipers off.

Z (Rear Wiper): Move the lever to this positionto turn the rear wipers on.

= (Rear Washer/Wiper): Move the lever to thisposition to wash and wipe the rear window.

The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottleas the windshield washer. However, the rearwindow washer will run out of fluid beforethe windshield washer. If you can wash yourwindshield but not your rear window, check thefluid level.

176

Cruise Control

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous whereyou cannot drive safely at a steady speed.So, do not use your cruise control onwinding roads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous onslippery roads. On such roads, fastchanges in tire traction can causeexcessive wheel slip, and you could losecontrol. Do not use cruise control onslippery roads.

The cruise control leveris located below thewindshield wiper controlon the right side ofthe steering wheel.

Q RES + (Resume/Accelerate): Push the leverup to resume the cruise control speed, or toaccelerate when passing another vehicle.

J (CRUISE CONTROL) ON/OFF q: Press thebutton on the end of the lever to turn the cruisecontrol on. Press it again to turn cruise control off.

R SET — (Set/Coast/Decelerate): Push thelever down to set the cruise speed. If the cruisespeed is already set this position can be usedto coast or decelerate from a higher speed.

CANCEL R: Pull the lever to cancel the cruisecontrol speed.

177

Cruise control allows a speed of approximately25 mph (40 km/h) or more to be maintainedwithout keeping your foot on the accelerator. Thisis helpful on long trips. Cruise control does notwork at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).

When the brakes are applied, the cruise controlshuts off.

If the vehicle is in cruise control and the TractionControl System (TCS) begins to limit wheelspin, the cruise control will automaticallydisengage. See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 353. When road conditions allow,the cruise control can be used again.

Setting Cruise Control

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on whenyou are not using cruise, you might hit abutton and go into cruise when you do notwant to. You could be startled and evenlose control. Keep the cruise control switchoff until you want to use cruise control.

1. Push the button at the end of the cruisecontrol lever to turn the cruise control on.

2. Accelerate to the desired speed.3. Push down on the cruise control lever and

release it. This will set the speed in cruisecontrol.

4. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

This symbol will appearon the instrument panelcluster when thecruise control is set.

178

This symbol will disappear when the brakes areapplied or the cruise control is cancelled. It willreappear when the set cruise speed is resumed.

Resuming a Set SpeedIf the cruise control is set at a desired speed andthen the brakes are applied, the cruise control shutsoff. But the cruise control does not need to be reset.

Once the vehicle is traveling approximately25 mph (40 km/h) or more, the cruise controllever can be pushed upward toward the plus(resume/accelerate) position to return to thepreset cruise speed.

The vehicle will return to and stay at the presetcruise speed. If the cruise control lever is pushedup and held toward the plus (resume/accelerate)position, the vehicle speed will increase until thelever is released or the brakes are applied.Do not continue to hold the lever in the plus(resume/accelerate) position, unless a fasterspeed is desired.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise ControlThere are two ways to go to a higher speed:

• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higherspeed. Push up on the cruise control levertoward the plus (resume/accelerate) position,then release the lever and take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The vehicle will nowcruise at the higher speed.

• Push up and hold the cruise control levertoward the plus (resume/accelerate) positionuntil the vehicle reaches the desired speed.Then release the cruise control lever. Toincrease the vehicle’s speed in very smallamounts, push up briefly on the cruise controllever and release it. Each time this is done,the vehicle will speed up approximatelyone mph (1.6 km/h).

The acceleration feature will only work after thecruise control speed has been set by pushing thecruise control lever down to the set position.

179

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise ControlThere are two ways to reduce the vehicle’s speedwhile using cruise control:• Push the cruise control lever downward toward

the minus (set/coast/decelerate) position untila lower speed is reached, then release it.

• To slow down in very small amounts, pushthe cruise control lever downward toward theminus (set/coast/decelerate) position briefly.Each time this is done, the vehicle will slowdown approximately one mph (1.6 km/h).

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle’sspeed. When you take your foot off the pedal,the vehicle will slow down to the cruise controlspeed set earlier.

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well the cruise control will work on hillsdepends upon the vehicle’s speed, its load, andthe steepness of the hills. When going up steephills, the accelerator pedal might have to beused in order to maintain the vehicle’s speed.

When going downhill, the brakes might have to beapplied, or the transaxle might have to be shiftedto a lower gear to keep the vehicle’s speed down.Doing either of these things will take the vehicle outof cruise. It may be better not to use the cruisecontrol if the brakes constantly have to be applied,or the vehicle continuously needs to be shifted toa lower gear.

Cancelling Cruise ControlTo cancel a cruise control session, pull the cruisecontrol lever forward, or step lightly on thebrake pedal.

Doing either of these things will only end thecurrent cruise control session, but the set speedwill be retained in memory.

Push the button at the end of the cruise controllever to turn the system off.

Erasing Speed MemoryWhen the cruise control or the ignition is turnedoff, the cruise control set speed memory is erased.

180

Exterior Lamps

The control to theleft of the steeringcolumn operatesthe exterior lamps.

9 (Off): Turn the control to this position totoggle off all lamps. This is a momentary controlthat will spring back to AUTO when released.

This momentary control will turn the automaticheadlamps and/or the Daytime Running Lamps onand off for U.S. vehicles. For vehicles first soldin Canada, this is only true when the transaxleis in PARK (P).

AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to thisposition to set your headlamps in automatic mode.AUTO mode, if enabled, will turn the exteriorlamps on and off automatically depending on howmuch light is available outside the vehicle.

Due to the momentary switch design, yourautomatic lights may be disabled even if thecontrol is in the AUTO position.

; (Parking Lamps): Turn the control to thisposition to turn on the parking lamps together withthe following:

• Taillamps

• Instrument Panel Lights

5 (Headlamps): Turn the control to this positionto turn on the headlamps, together with thepreviously listed lamps and lights.

181

Wiper Activated HeadlampsThis feature, if equipped, will automaticallyactivate the headlamps and parking lamps afterthe windshield wipers have been in use forabout 30 seconds and when all of the followingconditions are met.

• The exterior lamp control is in AUTO.

• The headlamps have not already beenactivated by automatic lighting.

• The automatic lighting feature has not beendisabled using the exterior lamp control.

See Exterior Lamps on page 181 for additionalinformation.

If the wipers are activated for over 30 secondsand the exterior lamp control is in the parkinglamps position, or the automatic lighting featurehas been disabled using the exterior lamp control,a HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message willappear on the Driver Information Center,if equipped.

Headlamps on ReminderIf you turn the ignition to LOCK while leaving thelamps on, you will hear a warning chime oncethe driver’s door is opened.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/Automatic Headlamp SystemDaytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easierfor others to see the front of your vehicle duringthe day. DRL can be helpful in many differentdriving conditions, but they can be especiallyhelpful in the short periods after dawn and beforesunset. Fully functional Daytime Running Lampsare required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.

A light sensor on top of the instrument panelmakes the DRL work, so be sure it is not covered.The DRL system will make front parking andturn signal lamps come on in daylight when thefollowing conditions are met:

• The ignition is on.

• The exterior lamps control is off.

182

When the DRL are on, only your front turn signallamps will be on. Your instrument panel willnot be lit up.

When it is dark enough outside, the exterior lampswill come on automatically. When it is brightenough outside, the exterior lamps will turn offand the DRL will turn on. Of course, you may stillturn on the headlamps any time you need to.

If you start your vehicle in a dark garage,the automatic headlamp system will come onimmediately. Once you leave the garage, it willtake approximately 30 seconds for the automaticheadlamp system to change to DRL if it islight outside. During that delay, your instrumentpanel cluster may not be as bright as usual. Makesure your instrument panel brightness control isin the full bright position. See InstrumentPanel Brightness on page 183.

To idle your vehicle with the DRL and automaticheadlamps off, toggle the exterior lamp controlto off after starting the vehicle.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on theregular headlamp system when you need it.

Instrument Panel Brightness

The knob to adjustthe instrument panelbrightness is locatedin the center of theinterior lamp controls.

Turn the knob clockwise to brighten the lights andcounterclockwise to dim them.

183

Interior Lamps Control

The interior lampcontrol is located tothe right of the exteriorlamp controls on theinstrument panel tothe left of the steeringcolumn.

R (Interior Lamp Override): Turn the outerknob to this position to have your interior lampsremain off while any door is open.

1 (Door): Turn the outer knob to this position toturn the interior lamps on while any door is openand when the ignition key is removed from theignition.

+ (Interior Lamps): Turn the outer knob to thisposition to turn the interior lamps on.

Turn the inner knob to adjust the instrument panelbrightness, described earlier in this section.

Dome LampThe dome lamp is located in the headliner and hastwo buttons to manually turn it on or off. The domelamp will come on each time you open a door,unless you turn on the interior lamps overridefeature. See Interior Lamps Control on page 184.

Entry LightingWith entry lighting, the interior of your vehicle isilluminated so that you can see inside before youenter your vehicle. The lamps will come on for20 seconds if you unlock your door using your keyor the remote keyless entry transmitter and theignition is in LOCK. After 20 seconds have passed,the interior lamps will slowly fade out. The lampswill turn off before the 20 seconds if you do one ofthe following:• Lock all the doors using the key.• Press lock on the power door lock switch.• Press lock on the remote keyless entry

transmitter.When any door is opened, entry lighting iscancelled. The interior lamps will stay on whileany door or the liftgate is open, and slowly fadeout when all doors and the liftgate are closed.

184

The interior lamps may stay on for up to 25 secondsafter all doors have been closed if they have notbeen locked. See Delayed Lighting on page 185.

To turn the entry lighting feature off or on, seeDIC Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only)on page 249.

Delayed LightingThe delayed lighting feature will continue toilluminate the interior for 20 seconds after all doorshave been closed, so that you can find yourignition and buckle your safety belt at night.Delayed lighting will not occur while the ignition isin RUN or ACCESSORY. After 20 secondshave passed, the interior lamps will slowly fadeout. The lamps will fade out before the 20 secondshave passed if you do one of the following:• Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.• Lock all doors using the remote keyless entry

transmitter.• Lock all doors using the power door lock

switch or the key.To turn the delayed lighting feature off or on,see DIC Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only)on page 249.

Exit LightingWith exit lighting, the interior lamps will come onfor about 25 seconds whenever you removethe key from the ignition. If you turn the ignitionkey to RUN or ACCESSORY, the lamps will fadeout. The lamps will also fade out if you lock thedoors with the power door lock switch or theremote keyless entry transmitter.

When any door is opened, exit lighting iscancelled. The interior lamps will stay on whileany door or the liftgate is open, and slowly fade outwhen all doors and the liftgate are closed.

The interior lamps may stay on for up to20 seconds after all doors have been closed ifthey have not been locked. See Delayed Lightingon page 185.

To turn the exit lighting feature off or on, seeDIC Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only)on page 249.

185

Front Reading LampsThere are two reading lamps and one courtesylamp in the overhead console. To turn eitherreading lamp on or off, press the lens of the lamp.The courtesy lamp will come on each time youopen a door, unless you turn on the interior lampsoverride feature. See Interior Lamps Controlon page 184.

Rear Reading LampsThere are two reading lamps in the third rowheadliner. To turn either reading lamp on or off,press the lens of the lamp.

There may also be a reading lamp in thesecond row, integrated with the dome lamp.To turn the second row reading lamp on or off,press the button next to the lamp lens.

Cargo LampThe cargo lamp is located in the rear of yourvehicle, above the liftgate opening, and does nothave a switch. The cargo lamp will come oneach time you open a door, unless you turn on theinterior lamps override. See Interior LampsControl on page 184.

Electric Power ManagementThis vehicle has Electric Power Management(EPM), an advanced control system. It estimatesthe battery’s temperature and state of chargeand then adjusts the voltage for best performanceand extended life of the battery.

When the battery’s state of charge is low, thevoltage is raised slightly to quickly put the chargeback in. When the state of charge is high, thevoltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging.If the vehicle has a voltmeter gage, you maysee the voltage move up or down. This is normal.If there is a problem, an alert will be displayed.

186

The battery can be discharged at idle if the electricalloads are very high. This is true for all vehicles. Thisis because the generator (alternator) may not bespinning fast enough at idle to produce all the powerthat is needed for very high electrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs when several of thefollowing loads are on: headlamps, high beams,fog lamps, rear window defogger, climatecontrol fan at high speed, heated seats, enginecooling fans, trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of thebattery. It does this by balancing the generator’soutput and the vehicle’s electrical needs. Itcan increase engine idle speed to generate morepower, whenever needed. It can temporarilyreduce the power demands of some accessories.

Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels,without being noticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action, this actionmay be noticeable to the driver. If so, a DriverInformation Center (DIC) message might bedisplayed, such as Battery Saver Active or BatteryVoltage Low. If this message is displayed, it isrecommended that the driver reduce the electricalloads as much as possible.

Battery Run-Down ProtectionYour vehicle has a feature to help prevent youfrom draining the battery, in case you accidentallyleave the interior lamps on. If you leave anyinterior lamps on while the ignition is in lock or off,they will automatically turn off after 10 minutes.The lamps will not come back on again untilyou do one of the following:

• Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY

• Open a closed door, or close and reopena door.

• Turn the interior lamps on if they are in thedoor or override position.

• Turn the interior lamps to the door or overrideposition and then to on again if the interiorlamp control is in the on position.

If your vehicle has less than 15 miles (25 km)on the odometer, the battery saver will turn offthe lamps after only three minutes.

187

Overhead Console Switchbank

The overhead console switchbank is located in theoverhead console. This switchbank may includethe following:

• Power Sliding Door(s)/Override Switch(es).See Power Sliding Door (PSD) on page 112.

• Power Rear Quarter Windows. See PowerRear Quarter Windows on page 123.

• Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA)Disable Switch. See Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) on page 188.

If your vehicle does not have some of theseoptions, there will be a blank.

Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA)If your vehicle is equipped with the UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) system, it isdesigned to help you park, while the vehicle isin REVERSE (R). It operates only at verylow speeds, less than 3 mph (5 km/h). URPA canhelp make parking easier and to help you avoidcolliding with objects such as parked vehicles.The URPA system can detect objects up to 5 feet(1.5 m) behind the vehicle, and tell you howclose these objects are from your rear bumper.

Your vehicle’s URPA operates when the shift leveris moved into REVERSE (R) and the vehiclespeed is less than 3 mph (5 km/h). Four ultrasonicsensors located at the rear bumper are used todetect the distance to the object. The URPAdisplay is located inside the vehicle, near the rearwindow. It has three color-coded lights used toprovide distance and system information tothe driver.

188

{CAUTION:

The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist (URPA)system does not replace driver vision.URPA does not:

• Operate above speeds of3 mph (5 km/h).

• Detect objects more than 5 feet(1.5 meters) behind the vehicle.This distance may be less duringwarmer or humid weather.

• Detect objects that are below thebumper, underneath the vehicle, orthat are very close to the vehicle.

• Detect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, or pets.

So if you do not use proper care beforebacking up, you could hit a vehicle, child,pedestrian, bicyclist, or pet, resulting invehicle damage, injury, or death. Eventhough the vehicle has the URPA system,always check carefully before backing upby checking behind your vehicle.

URPA can be turned offby pressing the rearpark aid disable switchlocated in theoverhead consoleswitchbank.

While the system is disabled, an indicator lightwill be lit on the switch. You will not see anylights on the rear display if the switch is in theoff position.

189

How the System WorksUnless disabled, the URPA will turn onautomatically when the shift lever is moved intoREVERSE (R). When the system turns on, thethree lights on the display will illuminate for one anda half seconds to let you know that the system isworking. If your vehicle is moving in REVERSE (R)at a speed greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), the redlight will flash to remind you that the system doesnot work at speed greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).

If an object is detected at a REVERSE (R) speedof less than 3 mph (5 km/h), one of the followingwill occur:

Description English Metricamber light 5 ft 1.5 m

amber/amber lights 40 in 1.0 mamber/amber/red lights &

continuous chime 20 in 0.5 m

amber/amber/red lights flashing &continuous chime

1 ft 0.3 m

A chime will sound the first time an objectis detected between 20 inches (0.5 m) and5 feet (1.5 m) away.

URPA cannot detect objects that are above liftgatelevel. In order for the rear sensors to recognizean object, it must be within detection range behindthe vehicle.

When the System Does Not Seem toWork ProperlyThe light may flash red when the vehicle is inREVERSE (R) if the ultrasonic sensors arenot kept clean. So be sure to keep your rearbumper free of mud, dirt, snow, ice and slush.Other conditions that may affect systemperformance include things like the vibrations froma jackhammer or the compression of air brakeson a very large truck. If after cleaning therear bumper and then driving forward at least15 mph (25 km/h), the display continues to flashred, see your dealer.

If a trailer was attached to your vehicle, or abicycle or an object was on the back of, or hangingout of your liftgate during your last drive cycle,the light may also flash red. The light will continueto flash whenever in REVERSE (R) until yourvehicle is driven forward at least 15 mph (25 km/h)without any obstructions behind the vehicle.

190

Accessory Power Outlet(s)Your vehicle may be equipped with a frontaccessory power outlet located below the climatecontrols on the instrument panel. It can beused to plug in electrical equipment such as acellular telephone or CB radio.

Pull the cover down to use the accessory poweroutlet. When not in use, keep the cover on.

The rear accessory power outlet is located on therear compartment on the driver’s side.

To remove the cover, pull the tab on the coverand pull it off. To put the cover back on, line upthe tabs at the back of the cover and put thecover in place. Push down the tab to secure thecover. When not in use, always cover the rearaccessory power outlet with the protective cap.

Notice: Leaving electrical equipment onfor extended periods will drain the battery.Always turn off electrical equipment whennot in use and do not plug in equipment thatexceeds the maximum amperage rating of20 amperes.

Certain electrical accessories may not becompatible with the accessory power outlet andcould result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses.If you experience a problem see your dealer foradditional information on accessory power outlets.

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment toyour vehicle may damage it or keep othercomponents from working as they should.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not use equipment exceedingmaximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.Check with your dealer before adding electricalequipment.

When adding electrical equipment, be sure tofollow the proper installation instructions includedwith the equipment.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet cancause damage not covered by your warranty.Do not hang any type of accessory oraccessory bracket from the plug because thepower outlets are designed for accessorypower plugs only.

191

Power Outlet 115 Volt AlternatingCurrentYour vehicle may have a power outlet that canbe used to plug in auxiliary electrical equipmentwith a maximum limit of 150 watts. If you try touse equipment that requires more than the limit,a protection circuit will cut the power supply.To reset the outlet, unplug the item and plug itback in or turn the ignition to LOCK orACCESSORY and then back on. The powerwill automatically restart when equipment thatoperates within the limit is plugged in.

The power outlet islocated behind thethird row seats on thepassenger’s siderear quarter trim panel.

The power outlet is not designed for the followingelectrical equipment and may not work properlyif these items are plugged into the power outlet:

• Equipment with high initial peak wattagesuch as: compressor-driven refrigeratorsand electric power tools.

• Other equipment requiring an extremelystable power supply such as:microcomputer-controlled electric blankets,touch sensor lamps, etc.

192

Cigarette LighterYour vehicle may have a cigarette lighter.To use the lighter, located on the instrumentpanel below the climate controls, push it in allthe way and let go. When it is ready, it willpop back out by itself.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while itis heating will not allow the lighter to backaway from the heating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating may occur to thelighter or heating element, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter inwhile it is heating.

Notice: If you put papers, pins, or otherflammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettesor other smoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage your vehicle.Never put flammable items in the ashtray.

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemWith this system you can control the heating,cooling and ventilation for your vehicle.

OperationTurn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwiseto direct the airflow inside of your vehicle.

193

To change the current mode, select one of thefollowing:

H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrumentpanel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the airto the instrument panel outlets, then directsthe remaining air to the floor outlets. Cooler air isdirected to the upper outlets and warmer air tothe floor outlets.

6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air tothe floor outlets. Use this mode to send air tothe rear of the vehicle. Keep the area under thefront seats free of objects that could obstructairflow to the rear of the vehicle.

The right knob can also be used to select defogor defrost mode. For more information, see“Defogging and Defrosting” later in this section.

Outside Air: This mode will be automaticallyselected when your vehicle is in any mode exceptmaximum air conditioning.

A (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease the fanspeed. Turn the knob to 0 to turn off the fan.The fan must be turned on for the air conditioningcompressor to operate.

Temperature Control: Turn the center knobclockwise or counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the air temperature inside your vehicle.

# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turnthe air-conditioning system on or off. When it ispressed, an indicator light in the button will come onto let you know that air conditioning is activated.

You may notice a slight change in engineperformance when the air conditioning compressorshuts off and turns on again. This is normal.The system is designed to make adjustments tohelp with fuel economy while still maintainingthe selected temperature.

On hot days, open the windows to let hot insideair escape; then close them. This helps to reducethe time it takes for your vehicle to cool down.It also helps the system to operate more efficiently.

194

The air conditioning system removes moisturefrom the air, so you may sometimes notice asmall amount of water dripping underneath yourvehicle while idling or after turning off theengine. This is normal.

@ MAX A/C (Maximum Air Conditioning):Turn the right knob to this position for maximumair conditioning. This will select air conditioningand recirculation for maximum cooling ofyour vehicle. This mode directs air to theinstrument panel outlets.

Recirculation: This mode keeps outside air fromcoming in the vehicle. It can be used to preventoutside air and odors from entering your vehicle orhelp heat or cool the air inside your vehicle morequickly. This mode will automatically be selectedwhen you select maximum air conditioning.

( (Heated Seats): Press this button to turn onthe heated seats. The button on the left controlsthe driver’s seat and the button on the rightcontrols the passenger’s seat. See Heated Seatson page 10 for additional information.

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of windows is a result of highhumidity, or moisture, condensing on the coolwindow glass. This can be minimized if theclimate control system is used properly. Thereare two modes to clear fog or frost from yourwindshield. Use the defog mode to clearthe windows of fog or moisture and warm thepassengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fogor frost from the windshield more quickly.

Turn the right knob to select the defog ordefrost mode.

- (Defog): This mode directs air to thewindshield and the floor outlets. When you selectthis mode, the system runs the air-conditioningcompressor unless the outside temperature is at orbelow freezing. The recirculation mode cannotbe selected while in the defog mode.

195

0 (Defrost): This mode directs most of theair to the windshield and the side window outlets,with some air directed to the floor outlets.In this mode, the system will automatically runthe air-conditioning compressor, unless theoutside temperature is at or below freezing.Recirculation cannot be selected while in thedefrost mode.

Do not drive the vehicle until all the windowsare clear.

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming gridto remove fog from the rear window.

< REAR: Press this button to turn the rearwindow defogger on or off. An indicator light inthe button will come on to let you know thatthe rear window defogger is activated.

The rear window defogger will turn off about10 minutes after the button is pressed. If turnedon again, the defogger will only run for aboutfive minutes before turning off. The defogger canalso be turned off by pressing the button againor by turning off the engine.

Notice: Do not use anything sharp on theinside of the rear window. If you do, you couldcut or damage the warming grid, and therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Do not attach a temporary vehicle license,tape, a decal or anything similar to thedefogger grid.

196

Dual Climate Control SystemYour vehicle may have a dual climate controlsystem. With this system you can control theheating, cooling, and ventilation for your vehicle.

Operation

9 (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease the fanspeed. Turn the knob to 0 to turn off the fan.The fan must be turned on for the air conditioningcompressor to operate.

Temperature Control: Use the driver’s andpassenger’s levers to increase or decrease theair temperature inside your vehicle.

Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwiseto direct the airflow inside of your vehicle.

To change the current mode, select one of thefollowing:

@ MAX A/C (Maximum Air Conditioning):Turn the right knob to this position for maximumair conditioning. This will select air conditioningand recirculation for maximum cooling ofyour vehicle.

Recirculation: This mode keeps outside airfrom coming in the vehicle. It can be usedto prevent outside air and odors from enteringyour vehicle or help heat or cool the air insideyour vehicle more quickly. This mode willautomatically be selected when maximumair conditioning is selected.

H (Vent): This mode directs air to theinstrument panel outlets.

197

) (Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the airto the instrument panel outlets, then directsthe remaining air to the floor outlets. Cooler air isdirected to the upper outlets and warmer air tothe floor outlets.

6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air tothe floor outlets. Use this mode to send air tothe rear of the vehicle. Keep the area under thefront seats free of objects that could obstructairflow to the rear of the vehicle.

Outside Air: This mode is automatically selectedwhen your vehicle is in any mode exceptmaximum air conditioning.

The right knob can also be used to select defogor defrost mode. For more information, see“Defogging and Defrosting” later in this section.

# (Air Conditioning): Press this button toturn the air conditioning system on or off. Whenit is pressed, an indicator light in the buttonwill come on to let you know that air conditioningis activated.

You may notice a slight change in engineperformance when the air conditioning compressorshuts off and turns on again. This is normal.The system is designed to make adjustments tohelp with fuel economy while still maintainingthe selected temperature.

On hot days, open the windows to let hot insideair escape; then close them and switch tomaximum air conditioning mode. This helps toreduce the time it takes for your vehicle tocool down. It also helps the system to operatemore efficiently.

The air conditioning system removes moisturefrom the air, so you may sometimes notice a smallamount of water dripping underneath yourvehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.This is normal.

( (Heated Seats): Press this button to turn onthe heated seats. The button on the left controlsthe driver’s seat and the button on the rightcontrols the passenger’s seat. See Heated Seatson page 10 for additional information.

198

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of windows is a result of highhumidity, or moisture, condensing on the coolwindow glass. This can be minimized if theclimate control system is used properly. Thereare two modes to clear fog or frost from yourwindshield. Use the defog mode to clearthe windows of fog or moisture and warm thepassengers. Use the defrost mode to removefog or frost from the windshield more quickly.Turn the right knob to select the defog ordefrost mode.

- (Defog): This mode directs air to thewindshield and the floor outlets. When this modeis selected, the system runs the air conditioningcompressor unless the outside temperature isat or below freezing.

The recirculation mode cannot be selected whilein the defog mode.

0 (Defrost): This mode directs most of the airto the windshield and the side window outlets,with some air directed to the floor outlets. In thismode, the system will automatically run theair conditioning compressor, unless the outsidetemperature is at or below freezing.

Recirculation cannot be selected while in thedefrost mode.

Do not drive the vehicle until all the windowsare clear.

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming gridto remove fog from the rear window.

< (Rear Window Defogger): Press this buttonto turn the rear window defogger on or off. Anindicator light in the button will come on to let youknow that the rear window defogger is activated.

The rear window defogger will turn off about10 minutes after the button is pressed. If turnedon again, the defogger will only run for aboutfive minutes before turning off. The defogger canalso be turned off by pressing the button againor by turning off the engine.

Notice: Do not use anything sharp on theinside of the rear window. If you do, you couldcut or damage the warming grid, and the repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Do notattach a temporary vehicle license, tape, a decalor anything similar to the defogger grid.

199

Outlet Adjustment

k (Open): Turn the thumbwheel to this positionto open the air outlets.

l (Closed): Turn the thumbwheel to this positionto close the air outlets.

Use the louvers located on the air outlets tochange the direction of the airflow.

Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the

air inlets at the base of the vehicle that mayblock the flow of air into your vehicle.

• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectorsmay adversely affect the performance ofthe system.

• Keep the path under the front seats clear ofobjects to help circulate the air inside ofyour vehicle more effectively.

Rear Climate Control System(Option A, Uplevel)Your vehicle may have a rear climate controlsystem that allows the driver to adjust the fan speedfor the rear seating area. This system works withthe main climate control system in your vehicle.

This lever is located below the main climatecontrol system on the instrument panel. Use thislever to adjust the fan speed for the rear seatpassengers.

A (Fan): Slide the lever to 1, 2, or 3 to increaseor decrease airflow to the rear seating area.Slide the fan knob to 0 to turn the fan off.

200

AUX: Slide the lever to AUX to allow the rearpassengers to adjust the temperature and airflowto the rear seating area.

Your vehicle may also have a rear climatecontrol system that allows the rear passengers toadjust the temperature and fan speed for therear seating area.

When the front climate control is in AUX and therear climate control fan or temperature buttonis pressed, the display will show the same airflowmodes as the front climate control system. SeeDual Climate Control System on page 197

The front control must be in AUX position to enableadjustment of the temperature and fan speed onthe rear control system. If it is not in AUX, pressingthe fan or temperature button on the rear climatecontrol will show a DISABLED message on the rearseat entertainment system display.

tr (Decrease Setting): Press this button todecrease the fan or temperature setting whenarrows are active in the display.

201

[u (Increase Setting): Press this button toincrease the fan or temperature setting whenarrows are active in display.

9 (Fan): Press this button to increase ordecrease fan speed. After pressing this button,arrows and a fan will appear in the display.The arrows indicate that to increase or decreasefan speed, you need to press either the left orright arrow button. The displayed arrows and fanwill disappear after a few seconds.

b (Temperature): Press this button to increaseor decrease temperature. After pressing thisbutton, arrows and a temperature scale willappear in the display. The arrows indicate that toincrease or decrease temperature, you needto press either the left or right arrow button. Thedisplayed arrows and temperature scale willdisappear after a few seconds.

Rear Air OutletsThe outlet behind the left rear seat is the coldair return outlet. Be sure to keep it free fromobstructions. Also, keep the area around the baseof the center instrument panel console, betweenand under the front seats, free of objects that couldalso obstruct airflow to the rear seating area.

For more information on how to use the mainclimate control system, see Dual Climate ControlSystem on page 197. For information onventilation, see Outlet Adjustment on page 200.

202

Rear Climate Control System(Option B, Uplevel)Your vehicle may have a rear climate controlsystem that allows the driver to adjust the fan speedfor the rear seating area. This system works withthe main climate control system in your vehicle.

This lever is located below the main climatecontrol system on the instrument panel. Use thislever to adjust the fan speed for the rear seatpassengers.

A (Fan): Slide the lever to 1, 2, or 3 to increaseor decrease airflow to the rear seating area.Slide the fan knob to 0 to turn the fan off.

AUX: Slide the lever to AUX to allow the rearpassengers to adjust the temperature and airflowto the rear seating area.

Your vehicle may also have a rear climatecontrol system that allows the rear passengersto adjust the temperature and fan speed forthe rear seating area.

When the front climate control is in AUX and therear climate control fan or temperature buttonis pressed, the display will show the same airflowmodes as the front climate control system. SeeDual Climate Control System on page 197

203

The front control must be in AUX position toenable adjustment of the temperature and fanspeed on the rear control system. If it is notin AUX, pressing the fan or temperature button onthe rear climate control will show a DISABLEDmessage on the rear seat entertainment systemdisplay.

qg (Decrease Setting): Press this button todecrease the fan or temperature setting whenarrows are active in the display.

rl (Increase Setting): Press this button toincrease the fan or temperature setting whenarrows are active in the display.

9 (Fan)b (Temperature): Press this button onceto enable adjustment of the fan speed. Afterpressing this button, the current fan speed settingwill be highlighted and appear in the on screendisplay. The arrows indicate that to increaseor decrease fan speed, you need to press eitherthe left or right arrow button. The on screen displaywill disappear after a few seconds.

Press this button twice to enable temperatureadjustment. After pressing this button, the currenttemperature settings will be highlighted andappear in the on screen display. The arrowsindicate that to increase or decrease temperature,you need to press either the left or right arrowbutton. The on screen display will disappear aftera few seconds.

Pressing this button a third time will turn off the onscreen display.

QR: Press the up and down arrows to togglebetween the fan and temperature settings.

204

Rear Air OutletsThe outlet behind the left rear seat is the coldair return outlet. Be sure to keep it free fromobstructions. Also, keep the area around the baseof the center instrument panel console, betweenand under the front seats, free of objects that couldalso obstruct airflow to the rear seating area.

For more information on how to use the mainclimate control system, see Dual Climate ControlSystem on page 197. For information onventilation, see Outlet Adjustment on page 200.

Passenger Compartment Air FilterPassenger compartment air, both outside andrecirculated air, is routed through a passengercompartment filter. The filter removes mostparticles from the air, including dust particles.Reductions in airflow, which may occur morequickly in dusty areas, indicate that the filterneeds to be replaced early. For how often tochange the air filter, see Scheduled Maintenanceon page 509.

The access panel for the passenger compartmentair filter is located in the back of the glove box.To replace the filter, do the following:

1. Pull the tab located on the outer accesspanel up and out.

205

2. Then push the tab, located on the left of theinner access panel, to the right.

3. The first air filter will pull straight out. Toremove the second, reach in and slide ittoward the opening. Pull the second filter out.

4. Replace the filters by reversing Step 3. Makesure the filters are inserted so that the sealingfoam is angled in the same direction onboth filters. For the type of filter to use, seeNormal Maintenance Replacement Partson page 520.

5. Close the inner access door, while squeezingthe tab. Be sure it is tightly closed.

6. Snap the outer access panel into the back ofthe glove box.

206

Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights and gagesthat may be on your vehicle. The pictures willhelp you locate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal thatsomething is wrong before it becomes seriousenough to cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to your warninglights and gages could also save you or othersfrom injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be oris a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions.As you will see in the details on the next fewpages, some warning lights come on briefly whenyou start the engine just to let you know they’reworking. If you are familiar with this section,you should not be alarmed when this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions.Often gages and warning lights work togetherto let you know when there’s a problem with yourvehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on andstays on when you are driving, or when one ofthe gages shows there may be a problem, checkthe section that tells you what to do about it.Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to dorepairs can be costly — and even dangerous.So please get to know your warning lightsand gages. They’re a big help.

207

Instrument Panel ClusterYour instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You willknow how fast you are going, how much fuel you are using, and many other things you will need to drivesafely and economically. The indicator warning lights and gages are explained on the following pages.

United States version shown, Canada similar

208

Speedometer and OdometerYour speedometer lets you see your speedin both miles per hour (mph) and kilometersper hour (km/h). Your odometer shows how faryour vehicle has been driven, in either miles(used in the United States) or kilometers(used in Canada).

Your vehicle has a tamper-resistant odometer.

You may wonder what happens if your vehicleneeds a new odometer installed. The new one canbe set to the mileage total of the old odometer.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer can display how far you havedriven since you last reset it.

For more information see DIC Operation andDisplays on page 224.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the engine speed inrevolutions per minute (rpm).

Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the key is turned to RUN or START,a chime will come on for several seconds toremind people to fasten their safety belts.

The safety belt lightwill also come onand stay on for severalseconds, then it willflash for several more.

If the driver remains unbuckled when the ignitionis on and the vehicle is in motion, the chimeand safety belt light will be repeated. You shouldbuckle your seat belt. If the driver’s belt isalready buckled, neither the chime nor the lightwill come on.

209

Passenger Safety Belt ReminderLightSeveral seconds after the key is turned to RUN orSTART, a chime will come on for several secondsto remind the front passenger to buckle theirsafety belt. This would only occur if a passenger isdetected by the passenger sensing system. SeePassenger Sensing System on page 86 for moreinformation. The passenger safety belt light will alsocome on and stay on for several seconds, then itwill flash for several more.

You should have thepassenger buckle theirsafety belt.

This light and chime reminder will be repeated ifthe ignition is on, the vehicle is in motion, thepassenger is still unbuckled and the passengerairbag is enabled.If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neitherthe chime nor the light will come on.

Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness light on theinstrument panel, which shows the airbag symbol.The system checks the airbag’s electricalsystem for malfunctions. The light comes on ifthere is an electrical problem. The system checkincludes the airbag sensor, the airbag modules,the wiring and the diagnostic module. Formore information on the airbag system, seeAirbag System on page 76.

This light will come onwhen you start yourvehicle, and it will flashfor a few seconds.Then the light should goout. This means thesystem is ready.

If the airbag readiness light stays on after youstart the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,your airbag system may not work properly.Have your vehicle serviced right away.

210

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on afteryou start your vehicle, it means the airbagsystem may not be working properly. Theairbags in your vehicle may not inflate ina crash, or they could even inflate withouta crash. To help avoid injury to yourselfor others, have your vehicle serviced rightaway if the airbag readiness light stayson after you start your vehicle.

The airbag readiness light should flash for afew seconds when you turn the ignition key toRUN. If the light doesn’t come on then, haveit fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there isa problem.

Passenger Airbag Status IndicatorYour vehicle has the passenger sensing system.Your instrument panel has a passenger airbagstatus indicator.

When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START,the passenger airbag status indicator will lightON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,for several seconds as a system check. Then,after several more seconds, the status indicatorwill light either ON or OFF, or either the onor off symbol to let you know the status of theright front passenger’s frontal airbag andside impact airbag (if equipped).


211

If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, it means thatthe right front passenger’s airbag or airbagsare enabled (may inflate).

{CAUTION:

If the on indicator comes on when youhave a rear-facing child restraint installedin the right front passenger’s seat, it meansthat the passenger sensing system has notturned off the passenger’s frontal airbagand seat-mounted side impact airbag(if equipped). A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injured or killed ifthe right front passenger’s airbag inflates.This is because the back of the rear-facingchild restraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facingchild restraint in the right front passenger’sseat if the airbag is turned on.

Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sunvisor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag and side impactairbag (if equipped) if the system detectsa rear-facing child restraint, no system isfail-safe, and no one can guarantee that anairbag will not deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it is turned off.We recommend that rear-facing childrestraints be secured in the rear seat,even if the airbag is off.

212

If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on theairbag status indicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system has turned off theright front passenger’s airbag or airbags.See Passenger Sensing System on page 86for more on this, including important safetyinformation.

If, after several seconds, all status indicator lightsremain on, or if there are no lights at all, theremay be a problem with the lights or the passengersensing system. See your dealer for service.

{CAUTION:

If the off indicator and the airbag readinesslight ever come on together, it meansthat something may be wrong with theairbag system. If this ever happens, havethe vehicle serviced promptly, becausean adult-size person sitting in the rightfront passenger seat may not have theprotection of an airbag. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 210.

Charging System Light

The charging systemlight will come onbriefly when you turn onthe ignition, but theengine is not running,as a check to show youit is working.

It should go out once the engine is running. If itstays on, or comes on while you are driving,you may have a problem with the charging system.It could indicate that you have problems with agenerator drive belt, or another electrical problem.Have it checked right away. Driving while thislight is on could drain your battery.

If you must drive a short distance with the light on,be certain to turn off all your accessories, suchas the radio and air conditioner.

213

Brake System Warning LightWhen the ignition is on, the brake system warninglight will come on when you set your parkingbrake. The light will stay on if your parking brakedoesn’t release fully. If it stays on after yourparking brake is fully released, it means you havea brake problem.

Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is dividedinto two parts. If one part isn’t working, theother part can still work and stop you. For goodbraking, though, you need both parts working well.

If the warning light comes on, there could be abrake problem. Have your brake system inspectedright away.

This light should come on briefly when you turnthe ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then,have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you ifthere’s a problem.


214

If the light comes on while you are driving, pull offthe road and stop carefully. You may notice that thepedal is harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closerto the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light isstill on, have the vehicle towed for service. SeeAnti-Lock Brake System Warning Light on page 215and Towing Your Vehicle on page 384.

{CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the brake system warning lightis on. Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to an accident.If the light is still on after you have pulledoff the road and stopped carefully, havethe vehicle towed for service.

Anti-Lock Brake System WarningLight

Your vehicle hasan Anti-lock BrakeSystem (ABS)warning light.

This light should come on for a few secondswhen you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the lightdoes not come on then, have it fixed so it willbe ready to warn you if there is a problem.

If this light stays on longer than normal after youhave started your engine, turn the ignition off.If the light comes on and stays on when you aredriving, stop as soon as possible and turn theignition off. Then start the engine again to reset thesystem. If the light still stays on, or comes onagain while you are driving, the ABS needs serviceand you do not have anti-lock brakes.

215

Traction Control System (TCS)Warning Light

Your vehicle may havea traction control systemwarning light.

The traction control system warning light maycome on for the following reasons:

• If you turn the system off by pressing thetraction control button. To turn the systemback on, press the button again. The warninglight should go off. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 353 for moreinformation.

• If there is a brake system problem that isspecifically related to traction control, thetraction control system will turn off andthe warning light will come on. If your brakesbegin to overheat, the traction controlsystem will turn off and the warning light willcome on until your brakes cool down.

• If the traction control system is affected by anengine-related problem, the system will turnoff and the warning light will come on.

If the traction control system warning light comeson and stays on for an extended period oftime when the system is turned on, your vehicleneeds service.

216

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.If the red gage lamp turns on, your engine istoo hot!

It means that your engine coolant has overheated.If you have been operating your vehicle undernormal driving conditions, you should pull off theroad, stop your vehicle and turn off the engineas soon as possible.

See Engine Overheating on page 423.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine Light

Your vehicle has acomputer whichmonitors operationof the fuel, ignition,and emissioncontrol systems.

This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intendedto assure that emissions are at acceptable levels forthe life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleanerenvironment. The check engine light comes on toindicate that there is a problem and service isrequired. Malfunctions often will be indicated bythe system before any problem is apparent.


217

This may prevent more serious damage to yourvehicle. This system is also designed to assist yourservice technician in correctly diagnosing anymalfunction.

Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle withthis light on, after awhile, your emissioncontrols may not work as well, your fueleconomy may not be as good, and your enginemay not run as smoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that may not be covered byyour warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel systemof your vehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other than those of the sameTire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affectyour vehicle’s emission controls and maycause this light to come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead to costly repairs notcovered by your warranty. This may alsoresult in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 400.

This light should come on, as a check to showyou it is working, when the ignition is on and theengine is not running. If the light does notcome on, have it repaired. This light will alsocome on during a malfunction in one of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition hasbeen detected. A misfire increases vehicleemissions and may damage the emissioncontrol system on your vehicle. Diagnosis andservice may be required.

• Light On Steady — An emission controlsystem malfunction has been detected on yourvehicle. Diagnosis and service may berequired.

If the Light is FlashingThe following may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle:

• Reducing vehicle speed

• Avoiding hard accelerations

• Avoiding steep uphill grades

• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount ofcargo being hauled as soon as it is possible

218

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to doso, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to parkyour vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least10 seconds and restart the engine. If the lightremains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”following. If the light is still flashing, follow theprevious steps, and see your dealer for serviceas soon as possible.

If the Light Is On SteadyYou may be able to correct the emission systemmalfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fullyinstall the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 405.The diagnostic system can determine if thefuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving tripswith the cap properly installed should turn thelight off.

Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?If so, your electrical system may be wet. Thecondition will usually be corrected when theelectrical system dries out. A few driving tripsshould turn the light off.

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.See Gasoline Octane on page 402. Poor fuelquality will cause your engine not to run asefficiently as designed. You may notice this asstalling after start-up, stalling when you putthe vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation onacceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (Theseconditions may go away once the engine iswarmed up.) This will be detected by the systemand cause the light to turn on.If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require atleast one full tank of the proper fuel to turn thelight off.If none of the above steps have made the lightturn off, your dealer can check the vehicle.Your dealer has the proper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electricalproblems that may have developed.

219

Emissions Inspection and MaintenanceProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments haveor may begin programs to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on your vehicle. Failure to passthis inspection could prevent you from getting avehicle registration.

Here are some things you need to know to helpyour vehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if thecheck engine light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection ifthe OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determinesthat critical emission control systems have notbeen completely diagnosed by the system.The vehicle would be considered not ready forinspection. This can happen if you have recentlyreplaced your battery or if your battery hasrun down. The diagnostic system is designed toevaluate critical emission control systemsduring normal driving. This may take several daysof routine driving. If you have done this andyour vehicle still does not pass the inspection forlack of OBD system readiness, your GM dealercan prepare the vehicle for inspection.

Oil Pressure Light

If your vehicle has lowengine oil pressure, thislight will stay on afteryou start your engine,or come on whenyou are driving.

This indicates that your engine is not receivingenough oil. The engine could be low on oil,or could have some other oil problem. Have itfixed immediately by your dealer.

The oil light could also come on in three othersituations:• When the ignition is on but the engine is not

running, the light will come on as a test to showyou it is working. The light will go out when youturn the ignition on. If it does not come on withthe ignition on, you may have a problem withthe fuse or bulb. Have it fixed right away.

• If you are idling at a stop sign, the light mayblink on and then off.

• If you make a hard stop, the light may come onfor a moment. This is normal.

220

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure islow. If you do, your engine can becomeso hot that it catches fire. You or otherscould be burned. Check your oil assoon as possible and have your vehicleserviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenancemay damage the engine. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always followthe maintenance schedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.

Security Light

For informationregarding this light,see Theft-DeterrentSystems on page 123.

Cruise Control Light

This light comes onwhenever you setyour cruise control.

The light will go out when the cruise control isturned off. See Cruise Control on page 177for more information.

Highbeam On Light

This light will come onwhen the high-beamheadlamps or theFlash-to-Pass featureis in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 174.

221

Fuel Gage

When the indicator nears empty, you still have alittle fuel left, but you should get more soon.

Your fuel gage tells you about how much fuelyou have left when the ignition is on.

Here are four things some owners ask about.All these things are normal and do not indicatethat anything is wrong with the fuel gage.

• At the gas station, the gas pump shuts offbefore the gage reads full.

• It takes a little more (or less) fuel to fill upthan the gage reads. For example, thegage read half full, but it took more (or less)than half of the tank’s capacity to fill it.

• The gage pointer may move while cornering,braking or speeding up.

• The gage may not indicate empty when theignition is turned off.

Low Fuel Warning LightThe light next to the fuel gage will come on brieflywhen you are starting the engine.

This light comes on when the fuel tank is low onfuel. To turn it off, add fuel to the fuel tank.


222

Driver Information Center (DIC)Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).

All messages will appear in the DIC displaylocated in the instrument panel cluster, below thetachometer. The DIC buttons are located onthe center of the instrument panel, below thecenter outlets.

The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. Aftera short delay, the DIC will display WELCOMEDRIVER (1 or 2) if a personalized key 1 or 2is used, and then the information that was lastdisplayed before the engine was turned off.The driver number also corresponds to thenumbers, 1 or 2, on the back of the remotekeyless entry transmitters.

The DIC displays the odometer, trip odometers,fuel economy, trip computer, vehicle systeminformation, and compass display, if equipped.It also displays warning messages if a systemproblem is detected. In addition, the DIC displaysphone numbers that are called using theOnStar® system, if equipped. See OnStar®

System on page 145.

If equipped, the outside air temperatureautomatically appears in the bottom right corner ofthe DIC display when viewing all of the informationscreens, except for the oil life screens. If theoutside air temperature is at or below 37°F (3°C),the temperature reading will toggle betweendisplaying the outside temperature and the wordICE for two minutes. If there is a problem with thesystem that controls the temperature display,the letters OC (open circuit) or SC (short circuit)will appear on the display. If this occurs, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

The DIC also allows some features to becustomized or personalized, if equipped. SeeDIC Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only)on page 249 for more information.

223

DIC Operation and DisplaysThe DIC has different modes which can beaccessed by pressing the DIC buttons located onthe center of the instrument panel. The buttonsare the information, set/reset, and menu buttons.

The button functions are detailed in the followingpages.

DIC Buttons

Q4R (Information): Press this button todisplay the odometer, trip distance, time elapsed,average speed, fuel economy, battery voltage,oil life, and to turn off the DIC.

r (Set/Reset): Press this button to set or resetcertain functions and to turn off or acknowledgemessages on the DIC.

q (Menu): Press this button to display the units,language, personalization, if equipped, compasszone and compass calibration, if equipped.See DIC Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only)on page 249 and DIC Compass (Uplevel Only)on page 228 for more information.

Information Button Items

Q4R (Information): Press this button to scrollthrough the following items:

OdometerPress the information button until the odometerdisplays. This mode shows the distance thevehicle has been driven in either miles orkilometers.

224

Trip A and Trip BPress the information button until A or B displays.This mode shows the current distance traveledin either miles or kilometers since the last reset foreach trip odometer. Both trip odometers can beused at the same time.

The display will show the odometer on the top lineand the trip odometer information, either A or B,on the bottom line.

Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separatelyby pressing the set/reset button while the desiredtrip odometer is displayed.

There is also a retroactive trip odometer functionthat performs the following for each trip odometer:

• If the vehicle’s speed has exceeded 3 mph(5 km/h) during the current ignition cycle,this function will set the trip odometer to thedistance driven during the current ignition cycle.

• If the vehicle’s speed has not exceeded 3 mph(5 km/h), this function will set the trip odometerto the distance driven during the previousignition cycle plus the distance driven duringthe current ignition cycle.

Press and hold the set/reset button for threeseconds, then release the button. The retroactivetrip odometer value will be set into the currentlydisplayed trip odometer.

Time ElapsedPress the information button until TIMEELAPSED :00 displays. This mode is like astopwatch, in that you can clock the time it takesto get from one point to another. Each of thefields for the hours, minutes, and seconds aretwo numeric digits.

Once TIME ELAPSED :00 is displayed, pressthe set/reset button to start the timing feature.Press the set/reset button again to stop it. If youwill be starting and stopping your vehicle, duringa trip for instance, the TIME ELAPSED feature willautomatically start timing where it left off whenyou last stopped. To reset it, press and hold theset/reset button for approximately 1.5 seconds.The display will return to zero.

225

Average SpeedPress the information button until AVERAGESPEED displays. This mode shows the averagespeed of the vehicle in miles per hour (mph)or kilometers per hour (km/h). This average iscalculated based on the various vehicle speedrecorded since the last reset of this value. To resetthe value, press the information button to displayAVERAGE SPEED, then press and hold theset/reset button. The display will return to zero.

Fuel RangePress the information button until FUEL RANGEdisplays. This mode shows the approximatenumber of remaining miles or kilometers thevehicle can be driven without refueling.

Fuel range is based on several factors, includingdistance travelled, fuel used, fuel capacity,etc. This estimate will change if driving conditionschange. For example, if driving in traffic andmaking frequent stops, this mode may readone number, but if the vehicle is driven on afreeway, the number may change even thoughthe same amount of fuel is in the fuel tank.

This is because different driving conditionsproduce different fuel economies. Generally,freeway driving produces better fuel economythan city driving. Fuel range cannot be reset.

If your vehicle is low on fuel, FUEL RANGE LOWwill display followed by the LOW FUEL message.See “LOW FUEL” under DIC Warnings andMessages on page 230 for more information.

Average Fuel EconomyPress the information button until AVG ECONOMYdisplays. This mode shows the approximateaverage miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km). This number iscalculated based on the number of mpg (L/100 km)recorded since the last time this menu item wasreset. To reset AVG ECONOMY, press andhold the set/reset button. The display will returnto zero.

BatteryPress the information button until BATTERYdisplays. This mode shows the current batteryvoltage.

226

Your vehicle’s charging system regulates voltagebased on the state of the battery. The batteryvoltage may fluctuate when viewing thisinformation on the DIC. This is normal.

If there is a problem with the battery chargingsystem, a DIC message will display. SeeDIC Warnings and Messages on page 230 formore information.

Oil LifePress the information button until OIL LIFEdisplays. This mode shows an estimate of the oil’sremaining useful life. If you see OIL LIFE 99%on the display, that means 99% of the current oillife remains. The engine oil life system willalert you to change your oil on a scheduleconsistent with your driving conditions.

When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGEOIL SOON message will appear on the display.You should change your oil as soon as possible.See Engine Oil on page 411. In addition to theengine oil life system monitoring the oil life,additional maintenance is recommended in theMaintenance Schedule in this manual. SeeScheduled Maintenance on page 509 for moreinformation.

Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE yourselfafter each oil change. It will not reset itself.Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFEaccidentally at any time other than when the oilhas just been changed. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oil change. To resetthe engine oil life system, see Engine OilLife System on page 414. The display will show100% when the system is reset.

Menu Button Items

q (Menu): Press this button to scroll through thefollowing items:

UnitsPress the menu button until UNITS displays. Thismode allows you to select between English orMetric units of measurement. Once in this mode,press the set/reset button to select betweenENGLISH or METRIC.

227

LanguagePress the menu button until the language screendisplays. This mode allows you to select thelanguage in which the DIC messages will appear.Once in this mode, press the set/reset buttonto select among the following choices:

• English• Francais (French)• Espanol (Spanish)

Personalization (Uplevel Only)Press the menu button until PERSONALPROGRAM displays. Your vehicle may havepersonalization capabilities that allow youto program certain features to a preferred settingfor up to two drivers.

Your vehicle may also have customizationcapabilities that allow you to program certainfeatures to one preferred setting. Customizationfeatures can only be programmed to one settingon the vehicle and cannot be programmed toa preferred setting for up to two drivers. SeeDIC Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only)on page 249 for additional information onpersonal programming.

Compass Zone (Uplevel Only)Under certain circumstances, such as duringa long distance cross-country trip, it will benecessary to compensate for compass varianceand reset the zone. To change the compasszone through the DIC, see DIC Compass(Uplevel Only) on page 228.

Compass Calibration (Uplevel Only)The compass can be manually calibrated.To calibrate the compass through the DIC, seeDIC Compass (Uplevel Only) on page 228.

DIC Compass (Uplevel Only)Your vehicle may have a compass in the DriverInformation Center (DIC).

Compass ZonePress the menu button until COMPASS ZONEdisplays. Press the set/reset button to change thecompass zone. Zones 1 through 15 are available.The direction the vehicle is moving will bedisplayed in the top right corner of the DIC display.

228

Compass CalibrationUnder certain circumstances, such as duringa long distance cross-country trip, it will benecessary to compensate for compass varianceand reset the zone through the DIC.

Compass variance is the difference between theearth’s magnetic north and true geographicnorth. If not adjusted to account for compassvariance, the compass in the vehicle could givefalse readings.

In order to do this, the compass must be set orcalibrated to the variance zone in which the vehicleis traveling.

To adjust for compass variance, use the followingprocedure:

1. Press the menu button until COMPASS ZONEdisplays.

2. Find the vehicle’s current location andvariance zone number on the map.

3. Press the set/reset button to scroll throughand select the appropriate variance zone.

229

4. Press the menu button to advance to theCOMPASS CALIBRATION screen.

5. To start the compass calibration, press andhold the set/reset button until CALIBRATIONBEGUN DRIVE UNTIL DONE appears inthe DIC display.

6. Drive the vehicle slowly in a circle two timesto activate the compass.When the calibration is complete, the DIC willdisplay CALIBRATION FINISHED.

7. If the message CAL appears in the DIC, youmust manually put the compass into thecalibration mode again. RepeatSteps 1 through 6.

DIC Warnings and MessagesMessages are displayed on the DIC to notify thedriver that the status of the vehicle has changedand that some action may be needed by the driverto correct the condition. Multiple messages mayappear one after another.Some messages may not require immediateaction, but you can press any of the DIC buttonsto acknowledge that you received the messageand clear it from the DIC display.Some messages cannot be cleared from the DICdisplay because they are more urgent. Thesemessages require action before they can becleared.If there are any active warning messages when thevehicle is turned off, two chimes sound and the DICgoes into a reminder mode. The reminder modedisplays any active message. If there are multiplemessages, the DIC displays each message for fiveseconds. After each active message is displayedonce, the reminder mode turns off.You should take any messages that appear onthe display seriously and remember that clearingthe messages will only make the messagesdisappear, not correct the problem.

230

The following are the possible messages that canbe displayed and some information about them.

A/C OFF FOR ENGINE PROTECTIONThis message displays when the engine coolantbecomes hotter than the normal operatingtemperature. See Engine Coolant TemperatureGage on page 217. To avoid added strain on ahot engine, the air conditioning compressoris automatically turned off. When the coolanttemperature returns to normal, the air conditioningcompressor turns back on. You can continue todrive your vehicle.

This message comes on while the ignition is inRUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledgethis warning message and to clear it from thescreen.

This message continues to display for two secondsif it has not been acknowledged when the engineis turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds ifthe message has been acknowledged, but thecondition still exists when the engine is turned off.

If the condition still exists, the message re-appearswhen the engine is turned on. If this messagecontinues to appear, have the system repaired byyour dealer as soon as possible to avoiddamage to the engine.

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVEThis message displays when the system detectsthat the battery voltage is dropping beyond areasonable level. The battery saver system startsreducing certain features of the vehicle thatyou may be able to notice. At the point that thefeatures are disabled, this message is displayed.It means that the vehicle is trying to save thecharge in the battery.

Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow thebattery to recharge.

The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to15.5 volts. You can monitor the battery voltage bypressing the information button until BATTERYdisplays.

231

CHANGE OIL SOONThis message displays when service is requiredfor the vehicle. See your dealer. See Engine Oilon page 411 and Scheduled Maintenance onpage 509 for more information.

The CHANGE OIL SOON message is reset byacknowledging the message. The OIL LIFE screenunder the gages menu on the DIC must also bereset. See “Oil Life” under DIC Operation andDisplays on page 224 and Engine Oil Life Systemon page 414.

This message displays while the ignition is in RUN.Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge thismessage and to clear it from the screen.


If the condition still exists, the message re-appearswhen the engine is turned on.

CHARGING SYSTEM FAILUREThis message displays when there is a problemwith the generator and battery charging systems.Driving with this problem could drain the battery.Turn off all unnecessary accessories. Stopand turn off the vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso. Have the electrical system checked by yourdealer immediately.

This message displays and a chime sounds whilethe ignition is in RUN. Press any of the DICbuttons to acknowledge this message and to clearit from the screen.



232

CHECK GAS CAPThis message displays if the fuel cap is not on,or is not fully tightened. Check the fuel capto ensure that it is on properly. See Filling theTank on page 405 for more information.

This message displays and a chime sounds whilethe ignition is in RUN. Press any of the DICbuttons to acknowledge this message and to clearit from the screen.



DELAYED LOCKINGThis message displays to inform the driver thateven though a door lock switch or the lock buttonon the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitterhas been pressed, that actual locking of the doorsis being delayed because the delayed lockingfeature has been activated in the DIC.

See “DELAYED LOCKING” under DIC VehiclePersonalization (Uplevel Only) on page 249for more information.

This message appears and a chime sounds whenthe ignition is off.

This message cannot be acknowledged.

DRIVER’S DOOR AJARThis message displays when the driver’s door is notclosed properly. When this message appears, makesure that the driver’s door is closed completely.

This message displays while the ignition is in RUN.A chime sounds when the ignition is shifted outof PARK (P). Press any of the DIC buttonsto acknowledge this message and to clear it fromthe screen.



233

DRIVER’S REAR DOOR AJARThis message displays when the driver’s side reardoor is not closed properly. When this messageappears, make sure that the driver’s side rear dooris closed completely.

This message displays while the ignition is inRUN. A chime sounds when the ignition is shiftedout of PARK (P). Press any of the DIC buttonsto acknowledge this message and to clear it fromthe screen.



ENGINE COOLANT HOTNotice: If you drive your vehicle while theengine is overheating, severe engine damagemay occur. If an overheat warning appearson the instrument panel cluster and/orDIC, stop the vehicle as soon as possible.Do not increase the engine speed abovenormal idling speed. See Engine Overheatingon page 423 for more information.

This message displays when the engine coolanttemperature is too hot. The engine coolanttemperature warning light also appears on theinstrument panel cluster. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gage on page 217 for moreinformation.

To avoid added strain on the engine, turn offthe air conditioner if it is on. When the coolanttemperature returns to normal, the air conditionercan be turned back on.

This message displays only when the ignition isin RUN. A chime sounds continuously whenthis message is displayed. Press any of theDIC buttons to acknowledge this message andto clear it from the screen.

234



HEADLAMPS SUGGESTEDThis message displays when the amount ofavailable light outside of the vehicle is low, or thewindshield wipers have been on for approximately30 seconds, and the exterior lamps control isoff or in the park lamps position. This messageinforms the driver that turning on the exterior lampsis recommended. See Exterior Lamps onpage 181 for more information.




HOOD AJARIf your vehicle has the remote start feature, thismessage displays when the hood is not closedproperly. When this message appears, make surethat the hood is closed completely. See HoodRelease on page 409.




235

KEY FOB BATTERY LOWThis message displays when the battery in theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter needs tobe replaced. To replace the battery, see “BatteryReplacement” under Remote Keyless EntrySystem Operation on page 99.




KEY IN IGNITIONThis message displays and a chime soundscontinuously when the driver’s door is open andthe key is in ACCESSORY or LOCK.


This message disappears and the chiming stopswhen the key is removed from the ignition.

LEFT FRONT TURN LAMP OUTThis message displays when the left front turnsignal bulb needs to be replaced. See Headlampsand Sidemarker Lamps on page 443.




LEFT REAR TURN LAMP OUTThis message displays when the left rear turnsignal bulb needs to be replaced. See Taillamps,Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lampson page 445.


236



LIFT GATE AJARThis message displays when the liftgate is notclosed completely. Make sure that the liftgate isclosed completely. See Liftgate on page 119.

This message displays while the ignition is in RUN.A chime sounds when the ignition is shifted outof PARK (P). Press any of the DIC buttonsto acknowledge this message and to clear it fromthe screen.



LOW BRAKE FLUIDThis message displays when the brake fluidlevel is low. Have the brake system serviced byyour dealer as soon as possible. See Brakeson page 434 for proper fluid level.

The brake system warning light also appears onthe instrument panel cluster when this messageappears on the DIC. See Brake System WarningLight on page 214.

This message displays and a chime sounds onlywhile the ignition is in RUN. Press any of theDIC buttons to acknowledge this message and toclear it from the screen.



237

LOW FUELThis message displays when your vehicle is lowon fuel. Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible.See Fuel Gage on page 222 and Filling the Tankon page 405 for more information.

The message displays and a chime soundswhile the ignition is in RUN. Press any of theDIC buttons to acknowledge this message andto clear it from the screen.


LOW OIL PRESSURE

Notice: If the LOW OIL PRESSURE warningmessage appears on the DIC display, stop thevehicle immediately. Do not drive the vehicleuntil the cause of the low oil pressure iscorrected. Severe engine damage can resultfrom driving a vehicle with low oil pressure. SeeEngine Oil on page 411 for more information.

This message displays when the vehicle’s engineoil pressure is low. The oil pressure light alsoappears on the instrument panel cluster. SeeOil Pressure Light on page 220.

Stop the vehicle immediately, as engine damagecan result from driving a vehicle with low oilpressure. Have the vehicle serviced by your dealeras soon as possible when this message isdisplayed.

This message displays only when the ignition is inRUN. A chime sounds continuously when thismessage is displayed.

This message cannot be acknowledged andcleared from the screen. This message re-displaysfor a few seconds if the condition still existswhen the engine is turned off.


PARKING BRAKE ONThis message displays to alert the driver whenthe vehicle’s parking brake is on, the ignition isin RUN, and the vehicle speed is greaterthan 5 mph (8 km/h). Release the parking brakebefore driving. See Parking Brake on page 137for more information.

238


A chime sounds continuously while this messageis displayed if driving above 5 mph (8 km/h).Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge thismessage and to clear it from the screen.



PARK LAMPS ONThis message displays to alert the driver when theheadlamps or parking lamps are on while theignition is off and the driver’s door is opened. SeeExterior Lamps on page 181 for more information.A chime sounds continuously while this messageis displayed.


PASSENGER’S DOOR AJARThis message displays when the front passenger’sdoor is not closed properly. When this messageappears, make sure that the front passenger’sdoor is closed completely.




239

PASSENGER’S REAR DOOR AJARThis message displays when the passenger’s siderear door is not closed properly. When thismessage appears, make sure that the passenger’sside rear door is closed completely.




PASSENGER SEATBELT IS NOTFASTENEDThis message reminds you to buckle thepassenger’s safety belt.

This message displays and a chime soundswhen the ignition is on, the driver’s safety belt isbuckled, the passenger’s safety belt is unbuckledwith the passenger airbag enabled, and thevehicle is in motion. You should have thepassenger buckle their safety belt.

The reminder will be repeated if the ignition is on,the vehicle is in motion, the driver is unbuckledand the passenger is still unbuckled and thepassenger airbag is enabled. If the passenger’ssafety belt is already buckled, this messageand chime will not come on.

240

REDUCED ENGINE POWERThis message displays when the vehicle’s enginepower is reduced. This happens when drivingconditions, such as climbing a steep hill, make thetransaxle overwork in a gear that may causedamage to the vehicle’s engine or transaxle.Reduced engine power can affect the vehicle’sability to accelerate.

This message displays and a chime sounds onlywhen the ignition is in RUN. Press any of theDIC buttons to acknowledge this message and toclear it from the screen.



REDUCED POWER STOP WHEN SAFEThis message displays when your vehicle is inan overheated engine operating mode. Thisoperating mode allows your vehicle to be driven toa safe place in an emergency. In this mode,you will notice a significant loss in power andengine performance. See Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode on page 425 for moreinformation. Anytime this message is on, thevehicle should be taken to your dealer for serviceas soon as possible.

This message displays and a chime sounds onlywhen the ignition is in RUN. Press any of theDIC buttons to acknowledge this message and toclear it from the screen.



241

REMOTE START DISABLEDIf your vehicle has the remote start feature, thismessage displays if a remote start attempt isunsuccessful. This may be caused if any of thefollowing conditions are true when a remotestart attempt is made:• The remote start system is disabled through

the DIC.• The key is in the ignition.• The hood or the doors are not closed.• There is an emission control system

malfunction.• The engine coolant temperature is too high.• The oil pressure is low.• The hazard warning flashers are turned on.• The maximum number of remote starts

or remote start attempts between ignitioncycles has been reached.

• The content theft-deterrent alarm is on whileattempting to remote start the vehicle.

See “REMOTE START” under DIC VehiclePersonalization (Uplevel Only) on page 249 and“Remote Vehicle Start” under Remote KeylessEntry System Operation on page 99 for moreinformation.

REMOTE START ONIf your vehicle has the remote start feature, thismessage displays when a remote start is initiated.See “Remote Vehicle Start” under Remote KeylessEntry System Operation on page 99 for moreinformation.

RIGHT FRONT TURN LAMP OUTThis message displays when the right front turnsignal bulb needs to be replaced. See Headlampsand Sidemarker Lamps on page 443.




242

RIGHT REAR TURN LAMP OUTThis message displays when the right rear turnsignal bulb needs to be replaced. See Taillamps,Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lampson page 445.




SERVICE ABS SYSTEMThis message displays when the vehicle’sAnti-lock Brake System (ABS) is not functioningproperly. Have the ABS serviced by your dealeras soon as possible.

The ABS warning light also appears on theinstrument panel cluster when this messageappears on the DIC. See Anti-Lock Brake SystemWarning Light on page 215.

This message only displays while the ignition is inRUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledgethis message and to clear it from the screen.



243

SERVICE AIR BAGThis message displays along with the airbagreadiness light if there is a problem with the airbagsystem. Have your dealer inspect the systemfor problems. See Airbag Readiness Lighton page 210 and Airbag System on page 76 formore information.




SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEMThis message displays when a problem with thebrake system has been detected. Have yourvehicle serviced by your dealer as soon aspossible.





244

SERVICE PARK LAMPSThis message displays when there is a problemwith the park lamps. Check to see if the park lampfuse is blown and replace the fuse if necessary.See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 497 andInstrument Panel Fuse Block on page 498 formore information. If changing the fuse does notcorrect the problem, see your dealer.




SERVICE STABILITY SYSTEMIf your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this messagedisplays if there has been a problem detected withStabiliTrak®. See StabiliTrak® System on page 355.

If this message turns on while you are driving, pulloff the road as soon as possible and stopcarefully. Try resetting the system by turning theignition off and then back on. If this messagestill stays on or turns back on again while you aredriving, your vehicle needs service. Have theStabiliTrak® System inspected by your dealer assoon as possible.

This message displays only while the ignition is inRUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledgethis message and to clear it from the screen.



245

SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEMIf your vehicle has the Traction ControlSystem (TCS), this message displays when thesystem is not functioning properly. A warning lightalso appears on the instrument panel cluster.See Traction Control System (TCS) WarningLight on page 216. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 353 for more information.Have the TCS serviced by your dealer as soonas possible.




SERVICE VEHICLE SOONThis message displays when a non-emissionsrelated malfunction occurs. Have the vehicleserviced by your dealer as soon as possible.




STABILITY CONTROL ACTIVEIf your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this messagedisplays when StabiliTrak® is actively assisting youwith directional control of the vehicle. Slipperyroad conditions may exist when this message isdisplayed, so adjust your driving accordingly.See StabiliTrak® System on page 355.

246

This message displays only while the ignition is inRUN. This message stays on until road conditionschange and StabiliTrak® is not active.

This message cannot be acknowledged andcleared from the screen.

STABILITY CONTROL OFFIf your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this messagedisplays any time the system turns off. When thismessage has been displayed, StabiliTrak® isno longer available to assist you with directionalcontrol of the vehicle. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. See StabiliTrak® System on page 355.

This message displays only while the ignition isin RUN.

Any of the following conditions may cause theStabiliTrak® system to turn off:

• The battery is low.

• There is a StabiliTrak® system failure.See your dealer for service.

STARTING DISABLEDThis message displays if the starting of the engineis disabled due to the electronic throttle controlsystem or vehicle theft-deterrent system. Have yourvehicle serviced by your dealer immediately.

This message only appears while the ignition isin RUN and will not disappear until the problemis resolved.


TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVEIf your vehicle has the Traction ControlSystem (TCS), this message displays when thesystem is on. Slippery road conditions may existif this message is displayed, so adjust yourdriving accordingly. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 353 for more information.

This message only displays while the ignition is inRUN and will not disappear until driving conditionschange and the TCS is no longer active.

This message cannot be acknowledged orcleared from the screen.

247

TRACTION CONTROL OFFIf your vehicle has the Traction ControlSystem (TCS), this message displays when theTCS turns off. See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 353 for more information.

This message only displays while the ignition is inRUN and disappears after two seconds.

Any of the following conditions may cause theTCS to turn off:

• The TCS is turned off by pressing the tractioncontrol button located on the center of theinstrument panel. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 353.

• The battery is low.

• There is a TCS failure. See your dealerfor service.

TRANSMISSION FLUID HOTThis message displays when the transaxle fluidin your vehicle is too hot. Stop the vehicleand allow it to idle until it cools down. If thewarning message continues to display, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer as soon aspossible.

This message displays and a chime sounds onlywhile the ignition is in RUN. Press any of theDIC buttons to acknowledge this message and toclear it from the screen.



TURN SIGNAL ONThis message displays as a reminder to turn offthe turn signal if you drive your vehicle formore than about 0.75 mile (1.2 km) with a turnsignal on. See Turn Signal/Multifunction Leveron page 173.

This message displays and a chime sounds onlywhen the ignition is in RUN. This messageclears from the DIC if the turn signal is manuallyturned off, a turn is completed, or the messageis acknowledged.

248

DIC Vehicle Personalization(Uplevel Only)Your vehicle may have customization capabilitiesthat allow you to program certain features toone preferred setting. Customization featurescan only be programmed to one setting onthe vehicle and cannot be programmed to apreferred setting for two different drivers. Thecustomization features include the following:• Exterior lighting delay• Interior lighting delay• Delayed locking• Content theft• Remote keyless entry feedback• Remote start• Rear park chime

Your vehicle may also have personalizationcapabilities that allow you to program certainfeatures to a preferred setting for up to two drivers.The first personalized key corresponds to driver 1and the second personalized key corresponds todriver 2. The driver number also corresponds to thenumbers, 1 or 2, on the back of the remote keylessentry transmitters.

The personalization features include the following:

• Radio station presets• Auto door unlock preferences• Remote keyless entry unlock preferences

All of the customization and personalizationoptions may not be available on your vehicle.Only the options available will be displayedon your DIC.

The default settings for the customization andpersonalization features were set when yourvehicle left the factory, but may have beenchanged from their default setting since then.

The customization preferences are automaticallyrecalled.

The driver’s personalization preferences arerecalled by using the key programmed fordriver 1 or 2. The driver number also correspondsto the numbers, 1 or 2, on the back of theremote keyless entry transmitters.

To change customization and personalizationpreferences, use the following procedure.

249

Entering the Personal Program Menu1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle

in PARK (P).To avoid excessive drain on the battery,it is recommended that the headlamps areturned off.

2. Press the menu button until PERSONALPROGRAM displays.If the vehicle is not in PARK (P), PERSONALPROGRAM ONLY IN PARK will display.If the vehicle is not able to enter the personalprogram menu, PERSONAL PROGRAMNOT AVAILABLE will display.

3. Press the set/reset button to begin.

4. The DIC will then display an instruction screen.Press the menu button to display the modesthat are available to program.Press the set/reset button to change thesetting of each mode.

Customization Menu ItemsThe following are customization features that allowyou to program settings to the vehicle:

FACTORY DEFAULTSThis feature allows you to set all of thecustomization and personalization features back totheir factory default settings.

Press the menu button until FACTORY DEFAULTSappears on the DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton to scroll through the following choices:

NO (default): The customization andpersonalization features will not be set to theirfactory default settings.

YES: The customization and personalizationfeatures will be set to their factory default settings.

If YES is selected, the keys will need to bepersonalized again to be recognized as key 1 or 2.See “PERSONALIZE KEY” later in this sectionfor more information.

Choose one of the available settings and pressthe menu button while it is displayed on the DIC toselect it and move on to the next feature.

250

ALL KEYS RESETThis screen will only display if YES was selectedon the FACTORY DEFAULTS screen.

Press the set/reset button to scroll through thefollowing choices:

CANCEL (default): The features will not be set totheir factory default settings and the DIC willreturn to the FACTORY DEFAULTS screen.

OK: The features will be set to their factory defaultsettings, the DIC will exit the personal programmenu, and PERSONAL OPTIONS SAVEDwill display.

EXT (Exterior) LIGHT DELAYThis feature allows you to set the amount of timethe exterior lamps remain on after the key isremoved from the ignition or the vehicle isunlocked using the remote keyless entrytransmitter.

Press the menu button until EXT LIGHT DELAYappears on the DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton to scroll through the following choices:

OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.

15 seconds: The exterior lamps will stay on for15 seconds.

30 seconds (default): The exterior lamps willstay on for 30 seconds.



Choose one of the available settings and pressthe menu button while it is displayed on the DICto select it and move on to the next feature.

251

INT (Interior) LIGHTS KEYS REMOVEDThis feature enables the interior lamps inthe vehicle to turn on for about 25 seconds afterthe key is removed from the ignition.

Press the menu button until INT LIGHTS KEYSREMOVED appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button to scroll through the followingchoices:

OFF: Removing the key from the ignition will notcause the interior lamps to turn on.

ON (default): Removing the key from the ignitionwill cause the interior lamps to be turned on forabout 25 seconds.


DELAYED LOCKINGThis feature allows the locking of the vehicle to bedelayed until all of the doors have been closedfor approximately five seconds.

When the delayed locking feature is enabled, itmay be activated when the key is out of theignition by doing one of the following:

• Pressing the driver’s door power lock switchone time while the driver’s door is open.

• Pressing the passenger’s door power lockswitch one time while the passenger’sdoor is open.

• Pressing the lock button on the remotekeyless entry transmitter one time while anydoor is open.

Two chimes will sound to signal that delayedlocking is active.

The doors may be locked immediately by repeatingone of the above actions more than one time.

If a door remains open, without any otherdoor being opened or closed, the vehicle will lockafter approximately 45 seconds.

If a key is in the ignition, this feature will not lockthe doors. See Delayed Locking on page 108for more information.

252

Press the menu button until DELAYED LOCKINGappears on the DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton to scroll through the following choices:

OFF: There will be no delayed locking ofthe vehicle’s doors.

ON (default): The locking of the vehicle’s doorswill be delayed by five seconds while a dooris open after a power door lock switch is pressed,or the lock button on the remote keyless entrytransmitter is pressed while a door is open.


CONTENT THEFTIf your vehicle has the content theft-deterrentsystem, once this feature is turned on, the systemwill activate if someone tries to enter the vehiclewithout using the remote keyless entry transmitteror the correct key. It will also activate when anincorrect key is used in the ignition.

Press the menu button until CONTENT THEFTappears on the DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton to scroll through the following choices:

OFF: The content theft-deterrent system will beturned off.

ON (default): The content theft-deterrent systemwill be turned on.

When ON is selected, the content theft-deterrentsystem will be armed when the vehicle is locked bypressing the lock button on the remote keylessentry transmitter or by pressing the powerdoor lock switch. See Content Theft-Deterrent onpage 124 and Power Door Locks on page 107for more information.


253

FOB LOCK FEEDBACKThis feature allows you to select the type offeedback you will receive when locking the vehiclewith the remote keyless entry transmitter.

Press the menu button until FOB LOCKFEEDBACK appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button to scroll through the followingchoices:

OFF: There will be no feedback when locking thevehicle.

LIGHTS: The exterior lamps will flash when youpress the lock button on the remote keylessentry transmitter.

LIGHTS and HORN (default): The exterior lampswill flash when you press the lock button on theremote keyless entry transmitter, and the horn willsound when the lock button is pressed againwithin five seconds of the previous command.

Choose one of the available settings and press themenu button while it is displayed on the DIC toselect it and move on to the next feature.

REMOTE STARTIf your vehicle has remote start, this feature allowsthe remote start to be turned OFF or ON. Theremote start feature allows you to start the enginefrom outside of the vehicle using the remotekeyless entry transmitter. See “Remote VehicleStart” under Remote Keyless Entry SystemOperation on page 99 for more information.

Press the menu button until REMOTE STARTappears on the DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton to scroll through the following choices:

OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.

ON (default): The remote start feature willbe enabled.


REAR PARK CHIMEIf your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) system, this feature allowsthe URPA system’s chime to be turned OFF orON. See Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA)on page 188 for more information.

254

Press the option button until REAR PARK CHIMEappears on the DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton to scroll through the following choices:

OFF: The URPA system’s chime will be disabled.

ON (default): The URPA system’s chime willbe enabled.


Personalization Menu ItemsThe following are personalization features thatallow you to program setting for up to two drivers:

PERSONALIZE KEYIf you are using a key that has already beenpersonalized to be recognized as key 1 or 2,this screen will not display. This feature allowsyou to personalize a key to be recognizedas key 1 or 2. A personalized key allows you toprogram personalization features to a preferredsetting to correspond to key 1 or 2.

Press the menu button until PERSONALIZE KEYappears on the DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton to scroll through the following choices:

NO (default): The key will not be personalized.

YES: The key will be personalized.


REPLACE KEYThis screen displays only if YES was selected forthe PERSONALIZE KEY feature, keys 1 and 2have already been personalized, and the currentkey being used is not key 1 or 2. This featureallows you to program a key to be recognized askey 1 or 2 in the event that the previouslyprogrammed key needs to be replaced.

1: The key will be programmed to be recognizedas key 1.

2: The key will be programmed to be recognizedas key 2.

CANCEL (default): The key will not beprogrammed.

255

RADIO STATIONS PERSONALIZEDThis screen displays only if YES was selected forthe PERSONALIZE KEY feature. This featureallows you to set the radio station presets to berecognized for the key, 1 or 2, that is beingused. Once this message displays, set the radiostation presets. If the presets are not set atthis time, the presets will not be recognized forkey 1 or 2, however, the vehicle radio stationpresets will be maintained.

AUTO DOOR UNLOCKThis feature allows automatic door unlocking to beturned off, used for the driver’s door only, or forall of the doors.

Press the menu button until AUTO DOOR UNLOCKappears on the DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton to scroll through the following choices:

OFF: None of the doors will unlock when thevehicle is shifted into PARK (P) or the key is takenout of the ignition.

DRIVER: Only the driver’s door will unlock whenthe vehicle is shifted into PARK (P) or the keyis taken out of the ignition.

ALL (default): All of the doors will unlock whenthe vehicle is shifted into PARK (P) or the keyis taken out of the ignition.


AUTO UNLOCK ONThis feature displays only if DRIVER or ALL wasselected for the AUTO DOOR UNLOCK feature.This feature allows the selection of when thevehicle’s doors will unlock.

Press the menu button until AUTO UNLOCK ONappears on the DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton to scroll through the following choices:

KEY-OUT: The door(s) will unlock when the keyis taken out of the ignition.

PARK (default): The door(s) will unlock when thevehicle is shifted into PARK (P).


256

FOB UNLOCK ON 1ST PRESSThis feature allows the selection of which doorswill unlock on the first press of the unlockbutton on the remote keyless entry transmitter.See Remote Keyless Entry System Operation onpage 99 for more information.

Press the menu button until FOB UNLOCK ON1ST PRESS appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button to scroll through the followingchoices:

DRIVER (default): The driver’s door will unlockon the first press of the unlock button on theremote keyless entry transmitter.

ALL: All of the doors will unlock on the first pressof the unlock button on the remote keylessentry transmitter.

Choose one of the available settings and pressthe menu button while it is displayed on theDIC to select it. The DIC will then displayPRESS UNLOCK SWITCH ON KEY FOB.

Press the unlock button on the remote keylessentry transmitter and your setting will be saved forthat remote keyless entry transmitter.

After programming the last option, the messageKEY FOB NOW PERSONALIZED will appearon the DIC display for a few seconds if youpersonalized the key. Next, the messagePERSONAL OPTIONS SAVED will appear brieflyon the DIC display, then the display will returnto the PERSONAL PROGRAM main screen.

Exiting the Personal Program MenuThe personal program menu will be exited whenany of the following occurs:

• The vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).

• The vehicle is no longer in RUN.

• The end of the personal program menuis reached.

257

Audio System(s)Determine which radio your vehicle has and thenread the pages following to familiarize yourselfwith its features.

Driving without distraction is a necessity for asafer driving experience. See Defensive Driving onpage 346. By taking a few moments to read thismanual and get familiar with your vehicle’saudio system, you can use it with less effort, aswell as take advantage of its features. While yourvehicle is parked, set up your audio system bypresetting your favorite radio stations, setting thetone, and adjusting the speakers. Then, whendriving conditions permit, you can tune toyour favorite stations using the presets andsteering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.

{CAUTION:

This system provides you with a far greateraccess to audio stations and song listings.Giving extended attention to entertainmenttasks while driving can cause a crash andyou or others can be injured or killed.Always keep your eyes on the road andyour mind on the drive — avoid engagingin extended searching while driving.

Keeping your mind on the drive is important forsafe driving. Here are some ways in which you canhelp avoid distraction while driving.While your vehicle is parked:• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.• Familiarize yourself with its operation.• Set up your audio system by presetting your

favorite radio stations, setting the tone, andadjusting the speakers. Then, when drivingconditions permit, you can tune to your favoriteradio stations using the presets and steeringwheel controls if the vehicle has them.

258

Notice: Before adding any sound equipmentto your vehicle, such as an audio system,CD player, CB radio, mobile telephone,or two-way radio, make sure that it can beadded by checking with your dealer. Also,check federal rules covering mobile radio andtelephone units. If sound equipment can beadded, it is very important to do it properly.Added sound equipment may interfere with theoperation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, orother systems, and even damage them.Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with theoperation of sound equipment that hasbeen added.

Notice: The chime signals related to safetybelts, parking brake, and other functionsof your vehicle operate through theradio/entertainment system. If that equipmentis replaced or additional equipment is addedto your vehicle, the chimes may not work.Make sure that replacement or additionalequipment is compatible with your vehiclebefore installing it. See Accessories andModifications on page 400.

Your vehicle has a feature called RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audiosystem can be played even after the ignitionis turned off. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 130 for more information.

Setting the TimePress the H or the M button to enter clock mode.Press and hold H until the correct hour appearson the display. Press and hold M until the correctminute appears on the display.

To change the time default setting from 12 hour to24 hour, press either the H or the M button toenter the clock mode, then press the tune knob toselect between the 12 or 24 hour display format.The clock mode will automatically time out withthe changed display format set as the currentdefault setting.

259

Radio with CD Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).RDS features are available for use only on FMstations that broadcast RDS information.

With RDS, the radio can do the following:

• Seek to stations broadcasting the selectedtype of programming

• Receive announcements concerning local andnational emergencies

• Display messages from radio stations

• Seek to stations with traffic announcements

This system relies upon receiving specificinformation from these stations and only workswhen the information is available. In rare cases, aradio station may broadcast incorrect informationthat causes the radio features to work improperly.If this happens, contact the radio station.

While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, thestation name or call letters appear on the display.RDS stations may also provide the time of day,a program type (PTY) for current programming,and the name of the program being broadcast.

Radio with CD shown, Radio with Six-Disc CDsimilar

260

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based inthe 48 contiguous United States and Canada.XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coastchannels including music, news, sports, talk,traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’sprogramming. XM™ provides digital qualityaudio and text information that includes song titleand artist name. A service fee is required inorder to receive the XM™ service. For moreinformation, contact XM™; In the U.S. atwww.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).

Playing the Radio

Top Knob (Power/Volume): Press this knobto turn the system on and off. Turn this knobclockwise or counterclockwise to increase orto decrease the volume.

4 (Information): For RDS, press this button tochange what appears on the display whileusing RDS. The display options are station name,RDS station frequency, PTY (program type),and the name of the program (if available).

For XM™ (if equipped), press the informationbutton while in XM™ mode to retrieve four differentcategories of information related to the currentsong or channel: Artist, Song Title, Categoryor PTY, Channel Number/Channel Name.

To change the default on the display, press theinformation button until you see the desireddisplay, then hold the button for two seconds.The radio produces one beep and the selecteddisplay becomes the default.

AUTO n (Automatic Volume): With automaticvolume, the audio system adjusts automaticallyto make up for road and wind noise as you drive,by increasing the volume as the vehicle speedincreases.

Set the volume at the desired level. Press thisbutton to select AUTO VOLUME MIN (minimum),AUTO VOLUME MED (medium), or AUTOVOLUME MAX (maximum). Each higher settingprovides more volume compensation at fastervehicle speeds. To turn automatic volumeoff, press this button until AUTO VOLUME OFFappears on the display.

261

MUTE: Press this button to silence the system.Press this button again to turn the sound on.

This button is not available on the Radiowith Six-Disc CD.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch betweenFM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped).The display shows the selection.

O /e (Tune): Turn this knob to select radiostations.

t SEEK u: Press the right or the left arrowto go to the next or to the previous station and staythere.

The radio only seeks stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

t SCAN u: Press and hold either arrow fortwo seconds until FREQUENCY SCAN appears onthe display. The radio goes to a station, playsfor a few seconds, then goes to the next station.Press either arrow again to stop scanning.

To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrowfor four seconds until PRESET SCAN appears onthe display. The radio goes to the next presetstation, plays for a few seconds, then goes to thenext preset station. Press either scan arrow againor one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning presets.

The radio only scans stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

Setting Preset StationsUp to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can beprogrammed on the six numbered pushbuttons,by performing the following steps:1. Turn the radio on.2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1

or XM2.3. Tune in the desired station.4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.5. Press and hold one of the six numbered

pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Wheneverthat numbered pushbutton is pressed, thestation that was set returns and the equalizationthat was selected is stored for that pushbutton.

6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

262

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

e (Bass/Treble/Midrange): Press this knob toselect BASS, MIDRANGE, or TREBLE. Turnthe knob to increase or to decrease. If a station isweak or has static, decrease the treble.

To adjust the bass, midrange, and treble to themiddle position, press and hold this knob when thetone control is on the display. The level changesto the middle position.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to themiddle position, press and hold this knob when notone or speaker control is displayed. AUDIOSETTINGS CENTERED appears on the display.

AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Pressthis button to select customized equalizationsettings designed for country/western, jazz, talk,pop, rock, and classical. Selecting CUSTOMor changing bass or treble, returns the EQ to themanual bass and treble settings.

The radio saves separate AUTO EQ settings foreach preset and source.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

e (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balancebetween the right and the left speakers, press thisknob until BALANCE appears on the display.Turn the knob to move the sound toward the rightor the left speakers.

To adjust the fade between the front and the rearspeakers, press this knob until FADE appearson the display. Turn the knob to move the soundtoward the front or the rear speakers.

To adjust the balance and fade to the middleposition, press and hold this knob when thespeaker control is on the display. The levelchanges to the middle position.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to themiddle position, press and hold this knob when notone or speaker control is displayed. AUDIOSETTINGS CENTERED appears on the display.

263

Finding a Category Station(RDS and XM™)To select and find a desired category perform thefollowing:

1. Press the CAT (category) button. The lastselected category appears on the display.

2. Turn the tune knob to select the category.

3. Once the desired category is displayed, presseither SEEK arrow to take you to a category’sstation. SEEKING CATEGORY appears onthe display.

4. To go to another station within that category,press the CAT button to display the category,then press either SEEK arrow to go toanother station.

If both category and traffic are on, the radiosearches for stations with the selected categoryand traffic announcements. This function does notwork with XM™.

If the radio cannot find the desired category,NONE appears on the display and the radioreturns to the last station you were listening to.This function does not work with XM™.

SCAN: Scan the stations within a category byperforming the following:

1. Press the CAT button. The last selectedcategory appears on the display.

2. Turn the tune knob to select the category.

3. Once the desired category is displayed, pressand hold either SCAN arrow until you hear abeep and SCAN CATEGORY appears onthe display. The radio begins scanningthe stations in the category.

4. Press either SCAN arrow to stop scanning.

If both category and TRAF (traffic) are on,the radio scans for stations with the selectedcategory and traffic announcements.

BAND (AF – Alternate Frequency): Alternatefrequency allows the radio to switch to astronger station with the same category. To turnalternate frequency on, press and hold BAND forfour seconds. AF ON appears on the display.The radio may switch to stations with a strongerfrequency.

264

To turn alternate frequency off, press and holdBAND again for four seconds. AF OFF appears onthe display. The radio does not switch to otherstations.

This function does not apply for XM™ SatelliteRadio Service.

RDS Messages

ALERT!: Alert warns of local or nationalemergencies. When an alert announcementcomes on the current radio station, ALERT!appears on the display. You will hear theannouncement, even if the volume is low or a CDis playing. If a CD is playing, play stops duringthe announcement. Alert announcements cannotbe turned off.

ALERT! is not affected by tests of the emergencybroadcast system. This feature is not supportedby all RDS stations.

4 (INFO – Information): If the current station hasa message, INFO appears on the display. Pressthis button to see the message. The message maydisplay the artist, song title, call in phonenumbers, etc.

If the entire message is not displayed, parts ofthe message appears every three seconds.To scroll through the message, press and releasethis button. A new group of words appears onthe display after every press of the button. Oncethe complete message has displayed, INFOdisappears from the display until another newmessage is received. The last message canbe displayed by pressing this button. You canview the last message until a new messageis received or a different station is tuned to.

When a message is not available from a station,NO INFO appears on the display.

TRAF (TA – Traffic): If TA appears on the display,the tuned station broadcasts traffic announcementsand when a traffic announcement comes on thetuned radio station you will hear it.

If the station does not broadcast trafficannouncements, press the TRAF button and theradio seeks to a station that does. When a stationthat broadcasts traffic announcements is found, theradio stops seeking and TA appears on the display.If no station is found that broadcasts trafficannouncements, NO TRAFFIC appears on thedisplay.

265

If TA is on the display, press the TRAF button toturn off the traffic announcements.

The radio plays the traffic announcement even if thevolume is low. The radio interrupts the play of a CDif the last tuned station broadcasts trafficannouncements.

This function does not apply to XM™ SatelliteRadio Service.

Radio Messages

CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio systemhas been calibrated for your vehicle from thefactory. If CAL ERR appears on the display, itmeans that the radio has not been configuredproperly for your vehicle and must be returned toyour dealer for service.

LOCKED: This message is displayed when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Takethe vehicle to your dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it downand provide it to your dealer when reporting theproblem.

Radio Messages for XM™ OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 280 later in thissection for further detail.

Playing a CD (Single CD Player)Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. Theplayer pulls it in and the CD should begin playing.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in theplayer, it stays in the player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD starts playing where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

When a CD is inserted, CD and the CD symbolappears on the display. As each new track starts toplay the track number appears on the display.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs andthe smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality (and playbackperformance) may be reduced due to the CD-Rquality, method of recording, the quality ofthe music that has been recorded, and the waythe CD-R has been handled. For better playbackperformance when home burning audio discs,use brand named CD media showing the CompactDisc™, and a burn rate no faster than 12X.

266

There may be an increase in skipping, difficulty infinding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading andejecting. If these problems occur, check the bottomsurface of the CD. If the surface of the CD isdamaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched,the CD will not play properly. If the surface ofthe CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs and DVDson page 343 for more information.

If there is no apparent damage, try a knowngood CD.

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen.

Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insertmore than one CD into the slot at a time,or attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs,you could damage the CD player. Whenusing the CD player, use only CDs in goodcondition without any label, load one CD at atime, and keep the CD player and the loadingslot free of foreign materials, liquids, anddebris.

If an error appears on the display, see“CD Messages” later in this section.

O /e (Tune): Turn this knob to go to thenext or previous track.

{ (Reverse): Press and hold this button toreverse the current track.

| (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button tofast forward through the current track.

RDM (Random): Press this button to hear thetracks in random, rather than sequential,order. RANDOM DISC appears on the display.Press this button again to turn off random play.

RPT (Repeat): Press this button to hear atrack over again. REPEAT appears on the display.Press this button again to turn off repeat play.


267

t SEEK u: Press the left arrow to go to thestart of the current track if more than eight secondshave played. Press the right arrow to go to thestart of the next track. If either arrow is heldor pressed more than once, the player continuesmoving backward or forward through the CD.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The inactive CD remainssafely inside the radio for future listening.

CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play aCD when listening to the radio. CD appears on thedisplay when a CD is in the player. If the systemhas a remote playback device, pressing this buttona second time allows the remote device to play.

AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): PressAUTO EQ to select the equalization settingwhile playing a CD. The equalization is storedwhenever a CD is played. For more information onAUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ” listed previously inthis section.

X (Eject): Press this button to eject the CD.EJECT may be activated with either the ignitionor radio off.

Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in theplayer, it stays in the player. When the ignitionor radio is turned on, the CD starts playing whereit stopped, if it was the last selected audiosource.

When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol appearson the CD. As each new track starts to play,the track number appears on the display.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDsand the smaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.


268



Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recordedCD with a marking pen.

Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insertmore than one CD into the slot at a time,or attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs,you could damage the CD player. Whenusing the CD player, use only CDs in goodcondition without any label, load one CD at atime, and keep the CD player and the loadingslot free of foreign materials, liquids, anddebris.


M (Load): Press this button to load CDs into theCD player. This CD player holds up to six CDs.

To insert one CD, do the following:

1. Turn the ignition on.

2. Press and release the load button.

3. When INSET CD # appears on the display,load a CD. Insert the CD partway into theslot, label side up. The player pulls the CD in.

To insert multiple CDs, do the following:

1. Turn the ignition on.

2. Press and hold the load button fortwo seconds.A beep will sound and LOAD ALL DISCappears on the display.

3. When INSERT CD # appears on the display,load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls the CD in.Once the CD is loaded, wait for INSERT CD #to appear on the display, then load the nextCD. The CD player takes up to six CDs. Do nottry to load more than six.

269

To load more than one CD but less than six,complete Steps 1 through 3. When finished loadingCDs, press the load button to cancel the loadingfunction. The radio begins to play the last CDloaded.

If more than one CD has been loaded, a numberfor each CD appears on the display.

Playing a Specific Loaded CDFor every CD loaded, a number appears on thedisplay. To play a specific CD press the numberedpushbutton that corresponds to the CD.

If an error appears on the display, see “CDMessages” later in this section.

X (Eject): Press this button to eject CD(s).

To eject the CD that is currently playing, pressand release this button.

To eject multiple CDs, do the following:

1. Press and hold the eject button fortwo seconds.A beep will sound and EJECT ALL DISCSappears on the display.

2. When REMOVE DISC appears on the display,the CD ejects and can be removed.To stop ejecting the CDs, press the load orthe eject button.

If the CD is not removed, after 25 seconds, theCD automatically pulls back into the player.If CD is pushed back into the player, before the25 second time period is complete, the playersenses an error and tries to eject the CD severaltimes before stopping.

Do not repeatedly press the eject button to eject aCD after you have tried to push it in manually.The player’s 25-second eject timer resets at eachpress of eject, causing the player to not ejectthe CD until the 25-second time period haselapsed.

O /e (Tune): Turn this knob to go to the nextor previous track.

{ (Reverse): Press and hold this button toreverse within the current track.

| (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button tofast forward through the current track.

270

RDM (Random): Press this button to hear thetracks in random, rather than sequential order,on one CD or all of the loaded CDs.

To use random, do one of the following:

• To play the tracks on the CD you are listeningto in random order, press and release thisbutton until RANDOM DISC PLAY appearson the display.

• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that areloaded in random order, press and releasethis button until RANDOM ALL DISCS appearson the display.

To turn off random play, press and release theRDM button until RANDOM OFF appears on thedisplay.

RPT (Repeat): Press this button to hear a trackor an entire CD over again.

To use repeat, do one of the following:

• To repeat a track, press and release thisbutton until REPEAT appears on the display.

• To repeat an entire CD, press and release thisbutton until REPEAT ONE DISC appears onthe display.

To turn off repeated play, press and release theRPT button until REPEAT OFF appears onthe display.

t SEEK u: Press the left arrow to go to thestart of the current track, if more than ten secondshave played. Press the right arrow to go to thenext track. If either arrow is held or pressed morethan once, the player continues moving backwardor forward through the CD.

t SCAN u: To scan one CD, press and holdeither SCAN arrow for more than two seconds untilSCAN appears on the display and you hear abeep. The radio goes to the next track, plays for10 seconds, then goes to the next track. Presseither SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning.

To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold eitherSCAN arrow for more than four seconds until CDSCAN appears on the display and you hear abeep. Use this feature to listen to 10 seconds ofthe first track of each loaded CD. Press eitherSCAN arrow again, to stop scanning.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio whena CD is playing. The inactive CD(s) will remainsafely inside the radio for future listening.

271

CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play aCD when listening to the radio. CD appears on thedisplay when a CD is in the player. If yoursystem has a remote playback device, pressingthis button a second time allows the remote deviceto play.

AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): PressAUTO EQ to select the equalization setting whileplaying a CD. The equalization is storedwhenever a CD is played. For more information onAUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ” listed previously inthis section.

Playing an MP3 CD-R DiscYour vehicle’s radio system may have the MP3feature. If it has this feature, it is capable of playingan MP3 CD-R disc. For more information onhow to play an MP3 CD-R disc, see Using an MP3on page 274 later in this section.

Using R (Song List) Mode(Single CD, MP3, and Six-Disc CD)This feature is capable of saving 20 trackselections. To save tracks into the song listfeature, perform the following steps:

1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at leastone CD.

2. Check to see that the CD player is not insong list mode. S-LIST (sound list) shouldnot appear on the display. If S-LIST is present,press the song list button to turn it off.

3. Select the desired CD by pressing thenumbered pushbutton and then use the SEEKright arrow or turn the tune knob to locate thetrack to be saved. The track begins to play.

4. Press and hold the song list button to savethe track into memory. When song list ispressed, one beep will sound. ADDED SONGwill appear on the display.

5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving otherselections.

SONGLIST FULL appears on the display if you tryto save more than 20 selections.

272

To play the song list, press the song list button.The recorded tracks begins to play in theorder they were saved.

Seek through the song list by using the SEEKarrows. Seeking past the last saved track returnsto the first saved track.

To delete tracks from the song list, perform thefollowing steps:

1. Turn the CD player on.

2. Press the song list button to turn song list on.S-LIST appears on the display.

3. Press either SEEK arrow or turn the tuneknob to select the desired track to bedeleted.

4. Press and hold the song list button fortwo seconds. Release the button whenSONG REMOVED appears on the display.

After a track has been deleted, the remainingtracks are moved up the list. When another trackis added to the song list, the track is added tothe end of the list.

To delete the entire song list, perform thefollowing steps:

1. Turn the CD player on.

2. Press the song list button to turn song list on.S-LIST appears on the display.

3. Press and hold the song list button for morethan four seconds. One beep will sound.SONGLIST EMPTY appears on the displayindicating the song list has been deleted.

If a CD is ejected, and the song list containssaved tracks from that CD, those tracks areautomatically deleted from the song list. Any trackssaved to the song list again are added to thebottom of the list.

To end song list mode, press the song list button.One beep will sound and S-LIST will be removedfrom the display.

273

CD Messages

CHECK CD: If this message appears on thedisplay and/or the CD comes out, it could be forone of the following reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returnsto normal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road.When the road becomes smoother, theCD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about anhour and try again.

• There may have been a problem whileburning the CD.

• The label may be caught in the CD player.If the CD is not playing correctly, for any otherreason, try a known good CD.If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it downand provide it to your dealer when reportingthe problem.

Using an MP3

MP3 CD-R DiscMP3 FormatIf you burn your own MP3 disc on a personalcomputer:

• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on aCD-R disc.

• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files onone disc.

• Make sure playlists have a .m3u or .wplextension, other file extensions may not work.

• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixedor variable bit rates. Song title, artist name,and album will be available for display bythe radio when recorded using ID3 tagsversion 1 and 2.

• Create a folder structure that makes it easyto find songs while driving. Organize songsby albums using one folder for each album.Each folder or album should contain 18 songsor less.

274

• Make sure to finalize the disc when burningan MP3 disc, using multiple sessions. It isusually better to burn the disc all at once.

• Do not use CD-RW discs.

• Do not use colored discs.

The player will be able to read and play amaximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions,and 255 files. Long file names, folder names,or playlist names may use more disc memoryspace than necessary. To conserve space on thedisc, minimize the length of the file, folder, orplaylist names. You can also play an MP3 CD thatwas recorded using no file folders. The systemcan support up to 11 folders in depth, though,keep the depth of the folders to a minimumin order to keep down the complexity andconfusion in trying to locate a particular folderduring playback. If a CD contains more than themaximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions,and 255 files the player lets you access andnavigate up to the maximum, but all items overthe maximum cannot be accessed.

Root DirectoryThe root directory will be treated as a folder.If the root directory has compressed audiofiles, the directory is displayed as F1 ROOT.All files contained directly under the root directoryare accessed prior to any root directory folders.However, playlists (Px) are always accessedbefore root folders or files.

Empty Directory or FolderIf a root directory or a folder exists somewherein the file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no compressed files directlybeneath them, the player advances to the nextfolder in the file structure that contains compressedaudio files. The empty folder will not display.

No FolderWhen the CD contains only compressed files, thefiles will be located under the root folder. Thenext and previous folder functions will not functionon a CD that was recorded without folders orplaylists. When displaying the name of the folderthe radio displays ROOT.

275

When the CD contains only playlists andcompressed audio files, but no folders, all filesare located under the root folder. The folder downand the folder up buttons search playlists (Px)first and then go to the root folder. When theradio displays the name of the folder the radiodisplays ROOT.

Order of PlayTracks are played in the following order:

• Play begins from the first track in the firstplaylist and continues sequentially throughall tracks in each playlist. When the last trackof the last playlist has played, play continuesfrom the first track of the first playlist.

• If the CD does not contain any playlists,then play begins from the first track underthe root directory. When all tracks fromthe root directory have played, play continuesfrom files according to their numericallisting. After playing the last track from the lastfolder, play begins again at the first track ofthe first folder or root directory.

When play enters a new folder, the display doesnot automatically show the new folder name unlessyou have chosen the folder mode as the defaultdisplay. See the information button later inthis section for more information. The new trackname appears on the display.

File System and NamingThe song name that displays is the song name thatis contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is notpresent in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays thefile name without the extension (such as .mp3)as the track name.

Track names longer than 32 characters orfour pages are shortened. Parts of words onthe last page of text and the extension ofthe filename will not display.

Preprogrammed PlaylistsPreprogrammed playlists that were created usingWinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed, however, they cannotbe edited using the radio. These playlists aretreated as special folders containing compressedaudio song files.

276

Playing an MP3Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in, and READING appearson the display. The CD should begin playing andthe CD symbol appears on the display.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD inthe player it stays in the player. When the ignitionor radio is turned on, the CD starts to playwhere it stopped, if it was the last selected audiosource.

As each new track starts to play, the track numberappears on the display.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDsand the smaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.




Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen.

Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insertmore than one CD into the slot at a time, orattempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, youcould damage the CD player. When using theCD player, use only CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD at a time, andkeep the CD player and the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, and debris.


277

O /e (Tune): Turn this knob to go to the nextor previous track.

{ (Previous Folder): P ress this button to goto the first track in the previous folder. Pressand hold this button to reverse through thecurrent track.

| (Next Folder): Press this pushbutton to go tothe first track in the next folder. Press and holdthis button to fast forward the current track.

RDM (Random): Press this button to hear thetracks in random, rather than sequential order, onone CD, one folder, or all of the loaded CDs.

To use random, do one of the following:

• To play the tracks on the CD you arelistening to in random order, press andrelease this button until RANDOM DISCappears on the display.

• To play the tracks in the folder you arelistening to in random order, press andrelease this button until RANDOM FOLDERappears on the display.

• To play the tracks on all of the CDs thatare loaded in random order, press andrelease this button until RANDOM ALLappears on the display.

To turn off random play, press and release theRDM button until RANDOM OFF appears onthe display

RPT (Repeat): Press this button to hear a track,CD, or a folder over again.

To use repeat, do one of the following:

• To repeat a track, press and release thisbutton until REPEAT TRACK appears onthe display.

• To repeat a CD, press and release this buttonuntil REPEAT DISC appears on the display.

• To repeat a folder, press and releasethis button until REPEAT FOLDER appearson the display.

278

To turn off repeated play, press and release theRPT button until REPEAT OFF appears onthe display


This button is not available on the Radiowith Six-Disc CD.

t SEEK u: Press the left arrow to go to thestart of the current track, if more than 10 secondshave played. Press the right arrow to go to thenext track. If either arrow is held or pressed morethan once, the player continues moving backwardor forward through the CD.

4 (Information): Press this button to displaythe artist name and album contained in theID3 tag.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The inactive CD remainssafely inside the radio for future listening.

CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play aCD when listening to the radio. The CD symbolappears on the display when a CD is loaded.

Y (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD.Eject may be activated with either the ignitionor radio off.

279

XM Radio Messages

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels)

XL on the radio display,after the channel name,indicates content withexplicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at acustomer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This process should take no longerthan 30 seconds.

No Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in alocation that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you moveinto an open area, the signal should return.

Loading XM Acquiring channel audio(after 4 second delay)

The audio system is acquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. This message shoulddisappear shortly.

CH Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune to anotherchannel.

CH Unavail Channel no longeravailable

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.Tune to another station. If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station for that preset button.

No Info Artist Name/Featurenot available

No artist information is available at this time on this channel.The system is working properly.

280

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

No Info Song/Program Titlenot available

No song title information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Info Category Namenot available

No category information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Info No Text/Informationalmessage available

No text or informational messages are available at this timeon this channel. The system is working properly.

Not Found No channel available forthe chosen category

There are no channels available for the selected category.The system is working properly.

XM Locked Theft lock active The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously beenin another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receiverscannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message isreceived after having your vehicle serviced, check with yourGM dealer.

Radio ID Radio ID label(channel 0)

If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with theXM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is neededto activate the service.

Unknown Radio ID not known(should only be ifhardware failure)

If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, theremay be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.

Chk XMRcvr Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period oftime, your receiver may have a fault. Consult with yourGM dealer.

281

Navigation/Radio SystemYour vehicle may have a navigation radio system.

The navigation system has built-in featuresintended to minimize driver distraction. Technologyalone, no matter how advanced, can neverreplace your own judgment. See the NavigationSystem manual for some tips to help youreduce distractions while driving.

Rear Seat Entertainment System(Option A, Uplevel)Your vehicle may have this type of DVD RearSeat Entertainment (RSE) system. If it hasthis feature, it will include a DVD player, a videodisplay screen, auxiliary inputs, two sets ofwireless headphones (if included), and a remotecontrol.

Parental Control

rj (Parental Control): This button is locatedbehind the video screen, below the auxiliary jacks.Press this button while using RSA, or when aDVD or CD is playing to blank the video screenand to mute the audio. The power indicatorlights on the DVD player will flash. Turning on theparental control will also disable all other buttonoperations from the remote control and theDVD player, except for the eject button. Press thisbutton again to restore operation of the RSA,DVD player, and remote control.

This button may also be used to turn the DVDplayer power on and automatically resume playif the vehicle is on and a disc is in the player.If no disc is in the player, the system will powerup in auxiliary mode.

282

Before You DriveThe RSE is designed for rear seat passengersonly. The driver cannot safely view the videoscreen while driving and should not try to do so.The RSE system will play DVD, CD, and MP3discs. You can also connect an auxiliary device tothe RSE system to play games, watch videos,look at pictures, etc.

Normal operation may be limited under extremelylow or high temperatures, in order to protectthe system from damage. Operate the RSE systemunder normal or comfortable cabin temperatureranges.

HeadphonesWireless HeadphonesThe RSE system may include two sets of wirelessheadphones (batteries are included).

The wireless headphones have an ON/OFFswitch, a channel select switch, and a volumecontrol. To use the headphones, turn the switchto ON. An indicator light on the headphoneswill illuminate. If the light does not illuminate, thebatteries may need to be replaced.

See “Battery Replacement” later in this section formore information. Switch the headphones toOFF when not in use.

The headphones will shut off automatically to savethe battery power if the RSE system is shut offor if the headphones are out of range of thetransmitters for more than three minutes. Thetransmitters are located next to the DVD faceplate.If you move too far forward or step out of thevehicle, the headphones will lose the audio signal.

DVD and auxiliary audio will always be foundon channel (CHA or CH1) of the wirelessheadphones. RSA audio is dedicated to CHB orCH2 of the wireless headphones.

To adjust the volume on the wireless headphones,use the volume control.

Notice: Do not store the headphones in heator direct sunlight. This could damage theheadphones and repairs will not be covered byyour warranty. Keep the headphones storedin a cool, dry place.

If there is a decreased audio signal during CD,MP3, or DVD play, there may be a low hissingnoise through the speakers and/or headphones.

283

If the hissing sound in the wireless headphonesseems excessive, make sure that the headphonebatteries are fully charged. Some amount ofhissing is normal.

Both sets of rear seat headphones may includefoam ear pads that can be replaced.

Foam ear pads on these headphones maybecome worn or damaged. The headphone foamear pads can become damaged if they are nothandled or stored properly. If the foam ear pads dobecome damaged or worn out, the pads can bereplaced separately from the headphone set.It is not necessary to replace the completeheadphone set.

The headphone replacement foam ear pads canbe ordered in pairs. See your dealer for moreinformation.

Battery ReplacementTo change the batteries, do the following:

1. Loosen the screw on the battery compartmentdoor located on the left side of the headphoneearpiece.

2. Replace the two AAA batteries in thecompartment. Make sure that they areinstalled correctly using the diagram on theinside of the battery compartment.

3. Tighten the screw on the batterycompartment door.

If the headphones are to be stored for a longperiod of time, remove the batteries, and keepthem in a cool, dry place.

284

Wired HeadphonesThere is a right and left wired headphone jack.To adjust the volume, do the following:

1. Plug the headphone into the correspondingjack, located behind the video screen, nextto the auxiliary jacks.

2. Press the corresponding headphone buttonon the DVD faceplate.

3. Press the right and left arrow buttons, on theDVD faceplate, to increase or to decrease thevolume.

The wired headphones work as follows:

• DVD on / RSA off: The wired headphoneswill play RSE audio.

• DVD off / RSA on: The wired headphoneswill play RSA audio.

• DVD on / RSA on: The wired headphoneswill play RSA audio.

Stereo RCA Jacks

The RCA jacks are located behind the video screenon the DVD console. The RCA jacks allow audioand video signals to be connected from an auxiliarydevice such as a camcorder or a video game unit tothe RSE. The yellow RCA jack is used for videoinputs, the red RCA jack for right audio inputs, andthe white RCA jack for left audio inputs. The systemrequires standard RCA cables, not included, toconnect the auxiliary device to the RCA jacks. Referto the manufacturer’s instructions for proper usage.

285

To use the auxiliary audio and video inputs,connect an external auxiliary device such as acamcorder to the RCA jacks and turn on both theauxiliary device power and the power on thefront of the RSE player.

If a disc is present when the RSE power is turnedon, the player will automatically begin playingthe disc and the user will need to press the AUXbutton on the remote control or on the DVDplayer faceplate to switch the system between theDVD player and the auxiliary device. See “DVDPlayer” and “Remote Control” later in this sectionfor more information.

Audio OutputAudio from the DVD player or auxiliary devices canbe heard through the following possible sources:

• Vehicle Speakers

• Wireless Headphones

• Wired Headphones (not included)

Vehicle SpeakersOnly one audio source can be heard through thevehicle’s speakers at a time.

The RSE system or an auxiliary device can beheard through all of the vehicle’s speakers whenthe following occurs:

• A DVD or auxiliary device is playing

• The front audio system is on and the CD AUXbutton is pressed to enable the RSE system

DVD will appear on the radio display when theRSE system is on.

To turn the vehicles speakers on and off, pressthe CD AUX button on the radio. The audiofrom the RSE system can be heard through thewireless headphones and the vehicles speakers atthe same time. The volume on the radio mayvary when switching between the radio, CD, DVD,MP3, or an auxiliary device.

286

Video ScreenThe video screen is located in the overheadconsole.

To use the video screen, do the following:

1. Push forward on the release button and thescreen will fold down.

2. Adjust its position as desired.

When the video screen is not in use, push it upinto its stowed and latched position.

Notice: Avoid directly touching the videoscreen, as damage may occur. See “Cleaningthe Video Screen” later in this section formore information.

DVD PlayerThe DVD player is located in the overheadconsole.

The DVD player can be controlled by the buttonson the DVD player and/or by the buttons onthe remote control. See “Remote Control” later inthis section for more information.

The RSE system DVD player is only compatiblewith DVDs of the appropriate region code forthe country that the vehicle was sold. The DVDregion code is printed on the jacket of most DVDs.

Standard audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, enhancedCDs, video CDs, and CD-ROM with MP3media are supported by this DVD player. DVD+R,DVD+RW, and copy protected CDs may ormay not be supported by the DVD player. TheDVD player does not support DVD-RAM,DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD-R/W, and DVD audiomedia. An error message will appear on thedisplay if this type of media is inserted into theDVD player.

If an error message appears on the video screen,see “DVD Messages” later in this section.

287

DVD Player Buttons

cY (Stop/Eject): Press and release this buttonto stop playing, rewinding, or fast forwarding.

Press this button twice to eject a disc. If the player isalready stopped, then only press this button once.

O (Power): Press this button to turn the DVDplayer on and off.

AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to switch thesystem between the DVD player and an auxiliarydevice.

s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start playof a disc. Press this button while a disc is playing topause it. Press it again to continue play of a disc.

tr /[u (Previous and Fast Reverse/Nextand Fast Forward): These controls can beused to move forward or backward through a disc.

These buttons can also be used to modify RSA,rear temperature, rear fan speed, and wiredheadphone volume adjustment. See “Headphones”earlier in this section, Rear Seat Audio (RSA)(Option A, Uplevel) on page 314 or RearSeat Audio (RSA) (Option B, Uplevel) onpage 316, and Rear Climate Control System(Option A, Uplevel) on page 200 or Rear ClimateControl System (Option B, Uplevel) on page 203for more information.

When a DVD is playing in the DVD player and theRSA system is on, the stop/eject and play/pausebuttons are the only buttons that will work.

288

Playing a DiscTo play a disc, gently insert the disc, with thelabel side up, into the loading slot. The DVD playerwill continue loading the disc and the player willautomatically start if the vehicle is inACCESSORY, RUN, or RAP.

If a disc is already in the player, make sure thatthe DVD player is on, then press the play/pausebutton on the player faceplate or on the remotecontrol. You can also, press the CD AUX button onthe radio faceplate, until RSE appears on thedisplay, to start playing a disc.

Some DVDs will not allow fast forwarding orskipping of the copyright information or previews.Some DVDs will begin playing after the previewshave finished. If the DVD does not beginplaying at the main title, refer to the on-screeninstructions.

Stopping and Resuming PlaybackTo stop playing a disc, press and release thestop button on the DVD player faceplate orthe remote control.

To resume playback, press the play/pause buttonon the DVD player faceplate or the remote control.The movie should resume play from where it waslast stopped if the disc has not been ejected.

If the disc has been ejected, the disc will resumeplay at the beginning of the disc.

Ejecting a DiscPress the eject button on the DVD playerfaceplate, when the disc is stopped, to eject thedisc. There is not an eject button on theremote control.

If a disc is ejected from the player, but not removed,the DVD player will reload the disc after a shortperiod of time.

289

Remote ControlThe RSE system will include a remote control(batteries are included). To use the remote control,aim it at the transmitter window next to the RSEfaceplate and press the desired button. Directsunlight or very bright light may affect the ability ofthe transmitter to receive signals from theremote control. If the remote control does notseem to be working, the batteries may need to bereplaced. See “Battery Replacement” later inthis section. Objects blocking the line of sight willaffect the function of the remote control.

Notice: Storing the remote control in a hotarea or in direct sunlight may damage it,and the repairs will not be covered by yourwarranty. Keep the remote control stored ina cool, dry place.

Remote Control Buttons


P (Backlight): Press this button to turn theremote control backlighting on. The backlight willautomatically turn off after eight seconds.

v (Title): Press this button to display the currenttitle number. Each press of this button willmove the disc to the next available title.

290

n, q, p, o (Directional Arrows): Press thesebuttons to move through DVD menus.

The up and down arrows will move through MP3folders.

r (Enter): Press this button to select thechoice that is highlighted in any menu.

z (Display Control Button): Press this buttonto open the RSE On-Screen Display (OSD) menusto adjust the color, tint, brightness, contrast, anddisplay modes.

y (Main Menu): Press this button to view themain DVD menu. The menu is different on everydisc. Use the up, down, right, and left arrowbuttons to move the cursor around the menu.After making a selection, press the enter button.

q (Return): Press this button to go backone step in the RSE OSD menu and some DVDmenus. Press this button to exit the currentmenu and to move to the previous menu.

c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing,rewinding, or fast forwarding a disc.

s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start playof a disc. Press this button while a disc isplaying to pause it. Press it again to continueplaying the disc.

t (Prior Chapter/Track): Press this button to goto the beginning of the current chapter or track.Press this button again to return to the previouschapter or track. This button may not workwhen the DVD is playing the copyright informationor previews.

u (Next Chapter/Track): Press this button to goto the beginning of the next chapter or track.This button may not work when the DVD is playingthe copyright information or the previews.

r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to fastreverse the DVD and CD. To stop reversing, pressthe play or stop button. This button may notwork when the DVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

[ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fastforward the DVD and CD. To stop fast forwarding,press the play or stop button. This button maynot work when the DVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

291

e (Sound): Press this button to display thecurrent audio track. Each press will move the DVDto the next language or commentary. The formatand content of this function will vary for each disc.

{ (Subtitles): Press this button to display thecurrent subtitles. Each press of this buttonwill move the DVD to the next available subtitleoption (English, Spanish, French, etc., if available).The format and content of this function will varyfor each disc.

AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to switch thesystem between the DVD player and an auxiliarysource.

d (Camera): Press this button to display thecurrent camera angle on DVDs that havethis feature. Each press will move the DVD to thenext available camera angle. The format andcontent of this function will vary for each disc.

0 through 9 (Numeric Keypad): The numerickeypad provides the capability of direct chapter ortrack number selection.

\ (Clear): Press this button within two secondsafter inputting a numeric selection, to clear allnumeric inputs.

} 10 (Multiple Digit Entries): Press this buttonto select chapter or track numbers greaterthan 9. Press this button before inputting thenumber.

RSE On-Screen Display (OSD) MenuTo use the RSE OSD menu when using a DVD oran auxiliary device, do the following:

To access this menu, press the display button onthe remote control. Once the menu is on thescreen, use the directional arrows and the enterbutton to navigate the screen. This menu willlet you select default preferences for video format,language preference, brightness, color, contrast,and tint. Not all DVDs support all the featuredefaults in the setup menus. If a feature is notsupported, the defaults will be provided bythe DVD media. To exit this menu, press thedisplay or the return button on the remote controlor wait for the menu to time out.

The default language selection will apply to allfuture DVDs.

292

To use the RSE OSD menu when using a CD oran MP3, do the following:

Make sure that a CD or an MP3 is loaded in theRSE system and that the system is not in auxiliary,then press the display button on the remote control.Once the menu is on the screen, use the directionalarrows and the enter button to navigate the screen.This menu will let you select default preferences forlanguage and playback settings. To exit this menu,press the display or the return button on the remotecontrol or wait for the menu to time out.

Battery ReplacementTo change the remote control batteries, do thefollowing:1. Slide the battery door, located on the back

of the remote control, down.2. Replace the two AA batteries in the

compartment. Make sure that they areinstalled correctly, using the diagram onthe inside of the battery compartment.

3. Close the battery door.

If the remote control is to be stored for a longperiod of time, remove the batteries and keephem in a cool, dry place.

Tips and Troubleshooting Chart

Problem Recommended Action

No power. The ignition may not bein ACCESSORY, RUN,or RAP.

Disc will not play. The system might be off.The parental controlbutton might have beenpressed. The powerindicator lights will flash.The system might be inauxiliary source mode.Press the AUX button toswitch between the DVDplayer and the auxiliarysource. The disc is upsidedown or is not compatible.

No sound — WirelessHeadphones

Turn the headphones on.Make sure the correctchannel is selected onthe wireless headphones.Check the batteries.The volume on theheadphones could be toolow, adjust the volume.

293


No sound — WiredHeadphones

Make sure the wiredheadphones are pluggedin. Adjust the volume.If RSA is on, DVD audiowill not be heard.

No sound — VehicleSpeakers

If the DVD system isbeing heard through thevehicle speakers, adjustthe volume on the radio.Press the CD AUX buttonon the radio to make surethat RSE is enabled. Therear speakers will mutewhen RSA is on.

The picture is distortedduring fast forward orreverse.

This is normal for thisoperation.

The picture does not fillthe screen. There areblack borders on thetop and bottom or onboth sides or it looksstretched out.

Video mode may notbe correctly set. See“RSE OSD” earlier inthis section.


I ejected the disc andtried to take it out, butit was pulled back intothe slot.

Press the ejectbutton once.

The language in the audioor on the screen is wrong.

Press the main menubutton on the remotecontrol and change theaudio or languageselection on the DVDmenu. To change thelanguage preference,press the display buttonto access the RSE OSDmenu. See “RSE OSD”earlier in this section.

The remote controldoes not work.

Point the remote controldirectly at the face of theDVD unit. The batteriescould be weak or put inwrong. The parentalcontrol button might havebeen pressed, the powerindicator lights will flash.

294


How do I get subtitleson or off?

Press the subtitle buttonon the remote control toselect subtitle option or goto the DVDs main menuand follow the screenprompts.

The auxiliary source isrunning but there is nopicture or sound.

Press and release theAUX button on the remotecontrol or the DVD playerto get to auxiliary input.Check to make sure thatthe auxiliary source isconnected to the inputsproperly.

The audio or video skipsor jumps.

The DVD could be dirty orscratched. Try cleaningthe disc.


The fast forward, fastreverse, previous,and next functionsdo not work.

Some commands that doone thing for DVDs willnot always work orperform the same functionfor audio, audio discs, orgames. These functionsmay also be disabledwhen the DVD is playingthe copyright informationor the previews. WhenRSA is on, these buttonscontrol RSA functions.

My disc is stuck in theplayer. The eject buttondoes not work.

Press the eject button onthe DVD player. Turn theignition off, then on again,then press the ejectbutton on the DVD player.Do not attempt to force orremove the disc from theplayer. If the problempersists, return to yourGM dealer for furtherassistance.

295


I lost the remote controland/or the headphones.

Contact your GM dealerfor assistance.

Sometimes the wirelessheadphone audio cuts outor buzzes for a moment,then it comes back.

This could be caused byinterference from celltowers or by using thecellular telephone or otherradio transmitter devicesin the vehicle.

DVD System inoperable. In severe or extremetemperatures the DVDsystem might not beoperable. Temperaturesbelow −4°F (−20°C) orabove 140°F (60°C) coulddamage the DVD system.Operate the DVD systemunder normal orcomfortable cabintemperature ranges.See your GM dealer ifthe problem persists.


The wireless headphoneshave audio distortion.

Verify that theheadphones are facingto the front of the vehicle,left and right sidesare indicated on theheadphones to ensurethat the signal isreceived properly.Verify that there is noobstruction between theheadphone(s) and thetransmitter.Verify that the batterieshave a full charge.

In auxiliary mode, thepicture moves or scrolls.

Check the signal comingfrom the auxiliary deviceand make sure that theconnection and the signalis good.

296

DVD MessagesThe following errors may be displayed on thevideo screen.

Disc Format Error: This message will bedisplayed if a disc is inserted upside down,if the disc is not readable, or if the disc formatis not compatible.

Disc Play Error: This message will be displayedif the mechanism cannot play the disc. Scratchedor damaged discs will cause this error.

Region Code Error: This message will bedisplayed if the region code of the DVD is notcompatible with the region code of the DVD player.

Load/Eject Error: This message will bedisplayed if the disc is not properly loaded orejected.

No Disc: This message will be displayed whenyou try to play or eject a disc that is not inthe player.

X: A white X will be displayed, in the upper leftcorner of the video screen, if the operation thathas been selected is not currently available.

DVD DistortionThere may be an experience with video distortionwhen operating cellular phones, scanners, CBradios, Global Position Systems (GPS)*, two-wayradios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies.

It may be necessary to turn off the DVD playerwhen operating one of these devices in or nearthe vehicle.

*Excludes the OnStar® System.

Cleaning the DVD PlayerWhen cleaning the outside DVD faceplate andbuttons, use only a clean cloth dampenedwith clean water.

Cleaning the Video ScreenWhen cleaning the video screen, use only aclean cloth dampened with clean water. Use carewhen directly touching or cleaning the screen,as damage may result.

297

Rear Seat Entertainment System(Option B, Uplevel)Your vehicle may have this type of DVD RearSeat Entertainment (RSE) system. If it hasthis feature, it will include a DVD player, a videodisplay screen, auxiliary inputs, two sets ofwireless headphones, and a remote control.

Parental Control

rj (Parental Control): This button is locatedbehind the video screen, next to the auxiliary jacks.Press this button while using rear seat audio(RSA), or when a DVD or CD is playing to makethe video screen go blank and to mute theaudio. The power indicator lights on the DVDplayer will flash. Turning on the parental controlwill also disable all other button operationsfrom the remote control and the DVD player,except for the eject button. Press this button againto restore operation of the RSA, DVD player,and remote control.

This button may also be used to turn the DVDplayer power on and to automatically resume playof a disc that is in the player while the vehicleis on. If no disc is in the player, the systemwill power up and display no display on theLCD screen.

Before You DriveThe RSE is designed for rear seat passengersonly. The driver cannot safely view the videoscreen while driving and should not try to do so.The RSE system can play DVD, CD, and MP3discs. You can also connect an auxiliary device tothe RSE system to play games, watch videos,look at pictures, etc.Normal operation may be limited under extremelylow or high temperatures, in order to protectthe system from damage. Operate the RSE systemunder normal or comfortable cabin temperatureranges.

HeadphonesNotice: Do not store the headphones in heator direct sunlight. This could damage theheadphones and repairs will not be coveredby your warranty. Keep the headphones storedin a cool, dry place.

298

Wireless HeadphonesThe RSE system may include two sets of wirelessheadphones (batteries may be included withthe headphone sets).

The wireless headphones have an ON/OFFswitch, a channel select switch, and a volumecontrol. To use the headphones, turn the ON/OFFswitch to ON. An indicator light on the headphoneswill come on. If the light does not come on, thebatteries may need to be replaced. See “BatteryReplacement” later in this section for moreinformation. Switch the headphones to OFFwhen not in use.

The headphones will shut off automatically tosave the battery power if the RSE system is offor if the headphones are out of range of thetransmitters for more than three minutes.The transmitters are located next to the DVDfaceplate. If you move too far forward or step outof the vehicle, the headphones will lose theaudio signal.

DVD and auxiliary audio will always be found onchannel (CHA or CH1) of the wireless headphones.RSA audio is dedicated to CHB or CH2 of thewireless headphones.

To adjust the volume on the wireless headphones,use the volume control located on the headphones.

If there is a decreased audio signal during CD,MP3, or DVD play, there may be a low hissingnoise through the speakers and/or headphones.If the hissing sound in the wireless headphonesseems excessive, make sure that the headphonebatteries are fully charged. Some amount ofhissing is normal.

Both sets of rear seat headphones may includefoam ear pads that can be replaced.

Foam ear pads on these headphones may becomeworn or damaged. The headphone foam ear padscan become damaged if they are not handled orstored properly. If the foam ear pads do becomedamaged or worn out, the pads can be replacedseparately from the headphone set. It is notnecessary to replace the complete headphone set.

The headphone replacement foam ear pads canbe ordered in pairs. See your dealer for moreinformation.

299

Battery ReplacementTo change the batteries, do the following:

1. Loosen the screw on the battery compartmentdoor located on the left side of the headphoneearpiece.

2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment.Make sure that they are installed correctlyusing the diagram on the inside of thebattery compartment.

3. Tighten the screw on the batterycompartment door.

If the headphones are to be stored for a longperiod of time, remove the batteries, and keepthem in a cool, dry place.

Wired HeadphonesThere is a right and left wired headphone jack.To adjust the volume, do the following:

1. Plug the headphone into the correspondingjack, located behind the video screen,next to the auxiliary jacks.

2. Press the headphone volume control buttonuntil the Wired Headset Volume is displayedand the Left wired headphone is highlightedfor selection. Press the volume control buttonagain to select the Right volume control.Another way to select either the Left or RightWired Headset Volume is to press the upor down arrows on the DVD faceplate.

3. Press the right and left arrow buttons on theDVD faceplate to increase or to decreasethe volume. Press the headphone volumecontrol button again or wait for a few secondsuntil the screen disappears.

The wired headphones work as follows:

• DVD on / RSA off: The wired headphoneswill play RSE audio.

• DVD off / RSA on: The wired headphoneswill play RSA audio.

• DVD on / RSA on: The wired headphoneswill play RSA audio.

300

Stereo RCA Jacks

The RCA jacks are located behind the video screenon the DVD console. The RCA jacks allow audioand video signals to be connected from an auxiliarydevice such as a camcorder or a video game unit tothe RSE. The yellow RCA jack is used for videoinput, the red RCA jack for right audio inputs, andthe white RCA jack for left audio inputs. The systemrequires standard RCA cables, not included, toconnect the auxiliary device to the RCA jacks. Referto the manufacturer’s instructions for proper usage.

To use the auxiliary audio and video inputs,connect an external auxiliary device such as acamcorder to the RCA jacks and turn on both theauxiliary device power and the power on thefront of the RSE player.

If a disc is present when the RSE power is turnedon, the player may automatically begin playingthe disc. Press the AUX button on the remotecontrol or the DVD AUX button on the DVD playerfaceplate to switch the system between theDVD player and the auxiliary device. See “DVDPlayer” and “Remote Control” later in this sectionfor more information.

Audio OutputAudio from the DVD player or auxiliary devicescan be heard through the following sources:

• Vehicle Speakers

• Wireless Headphones

• Wired Headphones (not included)

301

Vehicle SpeakersOnly one audio source can be heard through thevehicle’s speakers at a time.

The RSE system or an auxiliary device can beheard through all of the vehicle’s speakers whenthe following occurs:

• A DVD or auxiliary device is playing

• The front audio system is on and the CD AUXbutton is pressed to enable the RSE system

DVD appears on the radio display when the RSEsystem is on.

To turn the vehicles speakers on and off, pressthe CD AUX button on the radio. The audiofrom the RSE system can be heard through thewireless headphones and the vehicles speakers atthe same time. The volume on the radio mayvary when switching between the radio, CD, DVD,MP3, or an auxiliary device.

Video ScreenThe video screen is located in the overheadconsole.

To use the video screen, do the following:

1. Push the release button and the screen willfold down.

2. Adjust its position as desired.

When the video screen is not in use, push it upinto its stowed and latched position.

Notice: Avoid directly touching the videoscreen, as damage may occur. See “Cleaningthe Video Screen” later in this section formore information.

302

DVD PlayerThe DVD player is located in the overhead console.

The DVD player can be controlled by the buttonson the DVD player and/or by the buttons onthe remote control. See “Remote Control” laterin this section for more information.

The RSE system DVD player is only compatiblewith DVDs of the appropriate region code forthe country that the vehicle was sold. The DVDregion code is printed on the jacket of most DVDs.

The player is capable of playing the following mediaformats: DVD (single and dual player), DVD+R/RW,DVD-R/RW, DVD-ROM with MP3, DVD-ROM withWMA, CD-DA, CD-R/RW, CD-ROM with MP3,CD-ROM with WMA, Enhanced CD, SACD (CDplayer only). An error message may appear onthe display if any other type of media is insertedinto the DVD player.

If an error message appears on the video screen,see “DVD Messages” later in this section.

DVD Player Buttons

cY (Stop/Eject): Press and release thisbutton to stop playing, rewinding, or fastforwarding.

Press this button twice to eject a disc. If the player isalready stopped, then only press this button once.

DVD AUX (Disc Auxiliary): Press this button toswitch the system between the DVD player and anauxiliary device.

rj (Play/Pause): Press the play button tostart play of a disc. Press the pause button whilea disc is playing to pause it. Press it again tocontinue play of a disc.

RSE Faceplate with Rear Seat ClimateControls shown, RSE Faceplate without

Rear Seat Climate Controls similar

303

43 (Wired Headphone Volume): Press thisbutton to select the correct headphone. Then pressthe left or right arrow buttons to increase ordecrease the headphone volume.

When a DVD is playing in the DVD player and theRSA system is on, the stop/eject and play/pausebuttons are the only buttons that will work.

RSA SRC (Rear Seat Audio Source): Press thisbutton to switch between playing the AM, FM1,FM2, XM1™ or XM2™ Satellite Radio Service(if equipped), or the front CD player. If one of thesources are not loaded, the system will skipover the source when this button is pressed.

q, Q, r, R (Directional Arrows): Press thesebuttons to move through DVD menus.


g (Fast Reverse): Press this button to fastreverse the DVD and CD. To stop reversing,press the play or stop button. This button maynot work when the DVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

l (Fast Forward): Press this button to fastforward the DVD and CD. To stop forwarding,press the play or stop button. This button may notwork when the DVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

MENU (Disc): Press this button to view the mainDVD menu. The menu is different on everydisc. Use the up, down, right, and left arrowbuttons to move the cursor around the menu.After making a selection, press the enter button.

r (Enter/Select): Press this button to select thechoice that is highlighted in any menu.

z (Display Control Button): For vehicleswithout rear seat climate control, this button willtake the place of the fan/temp button. For vehicleswith rear seat climate control, this button is alsofound on the remote control. Press this buttonto open the RSE On-Screen Display (OSD) menusto adjust the color, tint, brightness, contrast, anddisplay modes.

304

Playing a DiscTo play a disc, gently insert the disc, with the labelside up, into the loading slot. The DVD playerwill continue loading the disc and the player willautomatically start if the vehicle is inACCESSORY, RUN, or RAP.

If a disc is already in the player, make sure thatthe DVD player is on, then press the play/pausebutton on the player faceplate or on the remotecontrol. You can also press the DVD AUX buttonon the player faceplate, or the CD AUX buttonon the radio faceplate until RSE appears onthe display, to start playing a disc.

Some DVDs will not allow fast forwarding orskipping of the copyright information or previews.Some DVDs will begin playing after the previewshave finished. If the DVD does not beginplaying at the main title, refer to the on-screeninstructions.

Stopping and Resuming PlaybackTo stop playing a disc, press and release thestop button on the DVD player faceplate orthe remote control.

To resume playback, press the play/pause buttonon the DVD player faceplate or the remote control.The movie should resume play from where it waslast stopped if the disc has not been ejected.

If the disc has been ejected, the disc will resumeplay at the beginning of the disc.

Ejecting a DiscPress the eject button on the DVD player faceplate,when the disc is stopped, to eject the disc. There isno eject button on the remote control.

If a disc is ejected from the player, but not removed,the DVD player will reload the disc after a shortperiod of time.

305

Remote ControlThe RSE system includes a remote control(batteries may be included with the remotecontrol). To use the remote control, aim it at thetransmitter window next to the RSE faceplate andpress the desired button. Direct sunlight or verybright light may affect the ability of the transmitterto receive signals from the remote control. Ifthe remote control does not seem to be working,the batteries may need to be replaced. See“Battery Replacement” later in this section. Objectsblocking the line of sight will affect the functionof the remote control.

Notice: Storing the remote control in a hotarea or in direct sunlight may damage it,and the repairs will not be covered by yourwarranty. Keep the remote control storedin a cool, dry place.

Remote Control Buttons


P (Backlight): Press this button to turn theremote control backlighting on. The backlight willautomatically turn off after eight seconds.

v (Title): Press this button to display the currenttitle number. Each press of this button willmove the disc to the next available title.

306

q, Q, r, R (Directional Arrows): Press thesebuttons to move through DVD menus.


r (Enter): Press this button to select thechoice that is highlighted in any menu.

z (Display Control Button): Press this buttonto open the RSE On-Screen Display (OSD) menusto adjust the color, tint, brightness, contrast, anddisplay modes.

y (Main Menu): Press this button to view themain DVD menu. The menu is different on everydisc. Use the up, down, right, and left arrowbuttons to move the cursor around the menu.After making a selection, press the enter button.

q (Return): Press this button to go backone step in the RSE OSD menu and some DVDmenus. Press this button to exit the currentmenu and to move to the previous menu.

c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing,rewinding, or fast forwarding a disc.

s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start playof a disc. Press this button while a disc isplaying to pause it. Press it again to continueplaying the disc.

t (Prior Chapter/Track): Press this button to goto the beginning of the current chapter or track.Press this button again to return to the previouschapter or track. This button may not workwhen the DVD is playing the copyright informationor previews.

u (Next Chapter/Track): Press this button to goto the beginning of the next chapter or track.This button may not work when the DVD is playingthe copyright information or the previews.

r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to fastreverse the DVD and CD. To stop reversing, pressthe play or stop button. This button may notwork when the DVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

[ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fastforward the DVD and CD. To stop fast forwarding,press the play or stop button. This button maynot work when the DVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

307

e (Sound): Press this button to display thecurrent audio track. Each press will move the DVDto the next language or commentary. The formatand content of this function will vary for each disc.

{ (Subtitles): Press this button to display thecurrent subtitles. Each press of this buttonwill move the DVD to the next available subtitleoption (English, Spanish, French, etc., if available).The format and content of this function will varyfor each disc.

AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to switch thesystem between the DVD player and an auxiliarysource.

d (Camera): Press this button to display thecurrent camera angle on DVDs that havethis feature. Each press will move the DVD to thenext available camera angle. The format andcontent of this function will vary for each disc.

0 through 9 (Numeric Keypad): The numerickeypad provides the capability of direct chapter ortrack number selection.

\ (Clear): Press this button within two secondsafter entering a numeric selection, to clear allnumeric inputs.

} 10 (Multiple Digit Entries): Press this button toselect chapter or track numbers greater than 9.Press this button before entering the number.

RSE On-Screen Display (OSD) MenuTo use the RSE OSD menu when using a DVDor an auxiliary device, do the following:

To access this menu, press the display buttonon the remote control or on the DVD faceplate,if you do not have rear seat climate control. Oncethe menu is on the screen, use the directionalarrows and the enter button to navigate the screen.This menu will let you select default preferencesfor video format, language preference, brightness,color, contrast, and tint. Not all DVDs supportall the feature defaults in the setup menus.If a feature is not supported, the defaults will beprovided by the DVD media. To exit this menu,press the display button, or the return buttonon the remote control, or faceplate if there is norear seat climate control, or wait for the menuto time out.

The default language selection will apply to allfuture DVDs.

308

To use the RSE OSD menu when using a CD oran MP3, do the following:

Make sure that a CD or an MP3 is loaded in theRSE system and that the system is not in auxiliary,then press the display button on the remotecontrol, or faceplate if there is no rear seat climatecontrol. Once the menu is on the screen, usethe directional arrows and the enter buttonto navigate the screen. This menu lets you selectdefault preferences for language and playbacksettings. To exit this menu, press the displaybutton, or the return button on the remote control,or faceplate if there is no rear seat climatecontrol, or wait for the menu to time out.

Battery ReplacementTo change the remote control batteries, do thefollowing:

1. Slide the battery door, located on the back ofthe remote control, down.

2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment.Make sure that they are installed correctly,using the diagram on the inside of the batterycompartment.

3. Close the battery door.

If the remote control is to be stored for a long periodof time, remove the batteries and keep them in acool, dry place.

Tips and Troubleshooting Chart


No power. The ignition may not bein ACCESSORY, RUN,or RAP.

Disc will not play. The system might be off.The parental controlbutton might have beenpressed. The powerindicator lights will flash.The system might be inauxiliary source mode.Press the DVD AUXbutton on the playerfaceplate or the AUXbutton on the remote toswitch between the DVDplayer and the auxiliarysources. The disc isupside down or is notcompatible.

309


No sound — WirelessHeadphones

Turn the headphones on.Make sure the correctchannel is selected onthe wireless headphones.Check the batteries.The volume on theheadphones could be toolow, adjust the volume.

No sound — WiredHeadphones

Make sure the wiredheadphones are pluggedin. Adjust the volume.If RSA is on, DVD audiowill not be heard.

No sound — VehicleSpeakers

If the DVD system isbeing heard through thevehicle speakers, adjustthe volume on the radio.Press the CD AUX buttonon the radio to make surethat RSE is enabled. Therear speakers will mutewhen RSA is on.

The picture is distortedduring fast forward orreverse.

This is normal for thisoperation.


The picture does not fillthe screen. There areblack borders on thetop and bottom or onboth sides or it looksstretched out.

Video mode may notbe correctly set. See“RSE OSD” earlier inthis section.

I ejected the disc andtried to take it out, butit was pulled back intothe slot.

Press the ejectbutton once.

The language in theaudio or on the screenis wrong.

Press the main menubutton on the remotecontrol and change theaudio or languageselection on the DVDmenu. To change thelanguage preference,press the display buttonto access the RSE OSDmenu. See “RSE OSD”earlier in this section.

310


The remote controldoes not work.

Point the remote controldirectly at the face of theDVD unit. The batteriescould be weak or put inwrong. The parentalcontrol button might havebeen pressed, the powerindicator lights will flash.

How do I get subtitleson or off?

Press the subtitle buttonon the remote control toselect subtitle option or goto the DVDs main menuand follow the screenprompts.

The auxiliary source isrunning but there is nopicture or sound.

Press and release theAUX button on the remotecontrol or the DVD AUXbutton on the playerfaceplate to get toauxiliary input. Check tomake sure that theauxiliary source isconnected to the inputsproperly.

The audio or video skipsor jumps.

The DVD could be dirty orscratched. Try cleaningthe disc.


The fast forward, fastreverse, previous,and next functions donot work.

Some commands that doone thing for DVDs willnot always work orperform the same functionfor audio, audio discs, orgames. These functionsmay also be disabledwhen the DVD is playingthe copyright informationor the previews. WhenRSA is on, these buttonsmay control RSAfunctions.

My disc is stuck in theplayer. The eject buttondoes not work.

Press the eject button onthe DVD player. Turn theignition off, then on again,then press the ejectbutton on the DVD player.Do not attempt to force orremove the disc from theplayer. If the problempersists, return to yourdealer for furtherassistance.

I lost the remote controland/or the headphones.

Contact your dealer forassistance.

311


Sometimes the wirelessheadphone audio cuts outor buzzes for a moment,then it comes back.

This could be caused byinterference from celltowers or by using thecellular telephone or otherradio transmitter devicesin the vehicle.

DVD System inoperable. In severe or extremetemperatures the DVDsystem might not beoperable. Temperaturesbelow −4°F (−20°C) orabove 140°F (60°C) coulddamage the DVD system.Operate the DVDsystem under normalor comfortable cabintemperature ranges.See your dealer if theproblem persists.


The wireless headphoneshave audio distortion.

Verify that theheadphones are facingto the front of the vehicle,left and right sidesare indicated on theheadphones to ensurethat the signal is receivedproperly.Verify that there is noobstruction between theheadphone(s) and thetransmitter.Verify that the batterieshave a full charge.

In auxiliary mode, thepicture moves or scrolls.

Check the signal comingfrom the auxiliary deviceand make sure that theconnection and thesignal is good.

312

DVD MessagesThe following errors may be displayed on thevideo screen.

Disc Format Error: This message is displayed ifa disc is inserted upside down, if the disc isnot readable, or if the disc format is notcompatible.

Disc Play Error: This message is displayed if themechanism cannot play the disc. Scratched ordamaged discs will cause this error.

Region Code Error: This message is displayedif the region code of the DVD is not compatiblewith the region code of the DVD player.

Load/Eject Error: This message is displayed ifthe disc is not properly loaded or ejected.

No Disc: This message is displayed when you tryto play or eject a disc that is not in the player.

X: A white X is displayed, in the upper left cornerof the video screen, if the operation that hasbeen selected is not currently available.

DVD DistortionThere may be an experience with video distortionwhen operating cellular phones, scanners, CBradios, Global Position Systems (GPS)*, two-wayradios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies.

It may be necessary to turn off the DVD playerwhen operating one of these devices in or near thevehicle.

*Excludes the OnStar® System.

Cleaning the DVD PlayerWhen cleaning the outside DVD faceplate andbuttons, use only a clean cloth dampenedwith clean water.

Cleaning the Video ScreenWhen cleaning the video screen, use only a cleancloth dampened with clean water. Use carewhen directly touching or cleaning the screen, asdamage may result.

313

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)(Option A, Uplevel)Your vehicle may have this type of rear seataudio (RSA) system, if it has this feature, it willallow rear seat passengers to listen to and controlany of the following audio sources: AM/FMtuner, front CD player, and XM™ Satellite RadioService (if equipped). However, the rear seatpassengers can only control the sources that thefront seat passengers are not listening to. Forexample, rear seat passengers may listen to a CDin the front radio and control it while the driverlistens to the radio through the front speakers.The rear seat passengers have control ofthe volume for each set of headphones.

The front seat audio controls always havepriority over the RSA controls. If the front seatpassengers switch the source for the main radio toa remote source, the RSA will not be able tocontrol the remote source. You can operate theRSA when the main radio is off.

The DVD or auxiliary device will always beavailable on channel (CHA or CH1) of the wirelessheadphones. All other RSA sources are availableon CHB or CH2 of the wireless headphones,as well as the wired headphones. If the RSA isoff, the wired headphones will provide DVDor auxiliary device audio. The rear seatpassengers will not be able to listen to XM, onCHB or CH2, if the front passenger is listening toa DVD or auxiliary device.

The remote control will not operate any of theRSA features.

314

RSAO (Power): Press this button to turn theRSA system on or off. RSA CHB or RSA CH2 willappear on the display when the system is on toindicate the channel to receive audio for thewireless headphones. Pressing this button will alsosilence the rear speakers.

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). Theselected radio station will appear on the display.If the front passengers are listening to theradio, the RSA will not switch between the bandsand cannot change the station.

tr /[u (Tune): When listening to theradio, press the right or the left arrow to go to thenext or the previous station and stay there.This function is inactive if the front seatpassengers are listening to the radio.

When a CD is playing, press the left arrow to goto the start of the current track or to the previoustrack. Press the right arrow to go to the nexttrack on the CD. This function is inactive if the frontseat passengers are listening to a CD.

PROG (Program): Press this button to select thenext preset station stored on the radio. Eachpress of this button will take you to the next presetstation. This function is inactive if the front seatpassengers are listening to the radio.

When a CD is playing in the single CD player,press this button to select the next track.This function is inactive if the front seatpassengers are listening to a CD.

When a CD is playing in the six-disc CD changer,press this button to select the next CD, ifmultiple CDs are loaded. This function is inactive ifthe front seat passengers are listening to a CD.

315

SRCE (Source): Press this button to switchbetween playing the AM/FM tuner, front CD player,and XM™ Satellite Radio Service (if equipped). Ifone of the sources are not loaded, the system willskip over the source when this button is pressed.

X (Headphone): Press the right or the leftheadphone button to enable volume control of thewired headphone connected to the correspondingjack. Press the right and left arrow buttons tochange the volume.

rj (Parental Control): This button is locatedbehind the video screen, below the auxiliary jacks.Press this button while using RSA, or when aDVD or CD is playing to blank the video screenand to mute the audio. The power indicatorlights on the DVD player will flash. Turning on theparental control will also disable all other buttonoperations from the remote control and theDVD player, except for the eject button. Press thisbutton again to restore operation of the RSA,DVD player, and remote control.

This button may also be used to turn the DVDplayer power on and automatically resume play ifthe vehicle is on and a disc is in the player. Ifno disc is in the player then the system will powerup in auxiliary mode.

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)(Option B, Uplevel)Your vehicle may have this type of rear seataudio (RSA) system, if it has this feature, it willallow rear seat passengers to listen to and controlany of the following audio sources: AM/FMtuner, front CD player, and XM™ Satellite RadioService (if equipped). However, the rear seatpassengers can only control the sources that thefront seat passengers are not listening to. Forexample, rear seat passengers may listen to a CDin the front radio and control it while the driverlistens to the radio through the front speakers.The rear seat passengers have control ofthe volume for each set of headphones.

316

The front seat audio controls always havepriority over the RSA controls. If the front seatpassengers switch the source for the main radio toa remote source, the RSA will not be able tocontrol the remote source. You can operate theRSA when the main radio is off.

The DVD or auxiliary device will always beavailable on channel (CHA or CH1) of the wirelessheadphones. All other RSA sources are availableon channel (CHB or CH2) of the wirelessheadphones, as well as the wired headphones.If the RSA is off, the wired headphones will provideDVD or auxiliary device audio. The rear seatpassengers will not be able to listen to XM, onchannel (CHB or CH2), if the front passengeris listening to a DVD or auxiliary device.

The remote control will not operate any of theRSA features.

RSA SRC (Rear Seat Audio Source): Press thisbutton to turn on the RSA system. Press thisbutton to switch between playing the AM, FM1,FM2, XM1™ or XM2™ Satellite Radio Service(if equipped), or the front CD player. If one ofthe sources is not loaded, the system will skip overthe source when this button is pressed.Hold this button down to turn off RSA.

Q, R, q, r, (Directional Arrows):Up Arrow – Press this button while in AM/FMtuner, or XM™ Satellite Radio Service to switchbetween the station presets. Press this buttonwhile sourcing the single CD player to go to thenext track. Press this button while sourcingthe six-disc CD player to go to the next disc.

317

Down Arrow – Press this button while in AM/FMtuner to change the BAND from AM/FM tunerto the front CD player or to the XM™ SatelliteRadio Service.

Left Arrow – Press this button while in AM/FMtuner, or XM™ Satellite Radio Service toseek down. Press this button while sourcing thesingle CD player, or the six-disc CD player to goto the previous track.

Right Arrow – Press this button while in AM/FMtuner, or XM™ Satellite Radio Service to seekup. Press this button while sourcing the single CDplayer, or the six-disc CD player to go to thenext track.

43 (Wired Headphone Volume): Press thisbutton to select the correct headphone. Then pressthe left or right arrow buttons to increase ordecrease the headphone volume.

rj (Parental Control): This button is locatedbehind the video screen next to the auxiliaryand headphone jacks. Press this button whileusing RSA, or when a DVD or CD is playingto blank the video screen and to mute the audio.The power indicator lights on the DVD playerwill flash. Turning on the parental control will alsodisable all other button operations from theremote control and the DVD player, except for theeject button. Press this button again to restoreoperation of the RSA, DVD player, and remotecontrol.

This button may also be used to turn the DVDplayer power on and automatically resume playif the vehicle is on and a disc is in the player.If no disc is in the player then the systemwill power up in auxiliary mode.

318

Mobile Digital Media SystemYour vehicle may have the GM Mobile DigitalMedia system which is made up of a digital mediaplayer, a wireless game controller, the digitalmedia storage (DMS) cartridge, the USB 2.0 cradle(docking station), and the PhatNoise™ MediaManager software.

See the following information to learn more aboutthe components that make up the completeDigital Media system.

Digital Media Player

The digital mediaplayer is containedin an overhead console.It is attached to thevehicle’s overhead railsystem, locatedbehind the second rowdomelamp.

The overhead console has an opening that opensdownward and is used to insert or remove theDMS cartridge. Pull the panel down to insert theremovable cartridge. Close this panel to completelyhide the cartridge inside the console.

With the DMS cartridge inserted, the digital mediaplayer is capable of playing back all of thecontent that has been stored on the cartridge.Audio content is accessible through the radioand steering wheel controls. Audio, videos, andgames are accessible through the rear seat videoscreen.

319

Wireless Game Controller

Most of the functions onthe game controller willvary, depending onthe game being played.

The wireless game controller will allow the rearseat passengers to interact with the video gamesbeing played. While playing a game, press thebuttons on the controller to send commands to thegame being played.

DMS (Digital Media Storage) Cartridge

The DMS cartridge isa palm-sized 40GBportable hard drive.

This type of cartridge should allow for storageof up to 5,000 songs in MP3 format, or up to15 typical movies in MPEG format, and hours ofgame collections, or any combination of the three.

320

USB 2.0 Cradle

This type of cradle isthe docking station forthe DMS cartridge.

The USB 2.0 cradle is the docking station thatconnects the DMS cartridge to the home computerallowing new content to be added to the DMScartridge. When the cradle is connected tothe home computer, you can read from and writeto the DMS cartridge. The system is compatiblewith home computers that support USBcommunication (Microsoft® Windows 98 SR2and higher).

The USB 2.0 cradle is also backward compatiblefor computers equipped with USB 1.1.

PhatNoise™ Media Manager

The PhatNoise™ Media Manager (PMM) supportsthe in-vehicle GM Mobile Digital Media system.The PMM can be used to save audio CDs to theDMS cartridge as well as organize and transferexisting tracks on your PC, load video filesonto your DMS cartridge, purchase the preloadedvideos and games, and much more.

321

Selecting Your Mobile Digital Media as theActive SourceYour radio and rear seat entertainment systemcommunicate with the GM Mobile Digital Mediasystem, as one compact unit that can be accessedby everyone seated inside the vehicle. The GMMobile Digital Media system can hold thousands ofsongs, hours of videos, and hundreds of games.

To help use this system, see the following“Quick Start” information:

• Front seat driver and passenger, use the radioand steering wheel controls to access the musiccollection with PhatNoise Voice Index™technology. The preset buttons can be used toselect the browsing category. The Next,Previous, and Seek buttons can be used tobrowse within a browsing category. Browse themusic collection by artist, album, genre, orcustom playlist as the system uses the voicemode to announce these selections. See “Usingthe GM Mobile Digital Media System for FrontSeat Audio Entertainment” later in this manual.

• Rear seat passengers, use the wireless DVDremote control to navigate the menu displayedon the overhead DVD video screen, then select

to play music, videos, or games. A dedicatedgame controller is included with the MobileDigital Media package. See “Using the GMMobile Digital Media System for Rear SeatEntertainment” later in this manual.

Your vehicle may have audio steering wheelcontrols. Some audio controls can be adjusted atthe steering wheel. See Audio Steering WheelControls on page 341 in your owner manual.

If your vehicle has the OnStar®/Mute audiosteering wheel control, read the followinginstructions.

For vehicles with OnStar®:

• Press and hold the mute button to activateOnStar®.

• Press and release this button once againto deactivate OnStar® mode and go tomute mode.

• Press this button twice to return to sound fromthe GM Mobile Digital Media system.

For vehicles without OnStar®:

• Press the mute button to silence the system,press and release this button once again toturn the sound back on.

322

Using GM Mobile Digital Media Systemfor Front Seat Audio Entertainment

A. AlbumB. ArtistC. Genre

D. PlaylistE. Mode ItemsF. Tracks

The GM Mobile Digital Media is controlled throughthe radio and steering wheel controls on yourvehicle’s audio system. This system functionsdifferently than a typical CD changer. The DigitalMedia system allows you to switch betweendifferent playback modes. These modes determinethe next song that will play. Using modes, youcan browse through playlists, artists, albums, andgenres while the system reads Voice Index™names to you while you drive. By selecting PlaylistMode, you can access the music collection inthe order placed onto the DMS cartridge, or youcan have the system sort the music by Album,Artist, or Genre by selecting the correspondingModes.

323

Starting the System for Front SeatEntertainmentThe GM Mobile Digital Media system is availablethrough the DMS mode of your radio. Thissystem will power on and off automatically andresume where the system last stopped.

To begin playback, follow the instructionslisted below:

1. Insert the DMS cartridge into the GM MobileDigital Media player.

2. Turn on your radio and switch to the DMSmode by pressing the CD/AUX button onyour radio.

3. Press any of the first four pushbuttons (A-D)to select different browse modes.

4. Press the left or right SEEK/SCAN arrow (E)to navigate through the mode items.

5. Turn the tune knob (F) to navigate throughsongs in a song list.

Modes OverviewThe numbered preset buttons one through fourare used to change the order tracks are groupedand played. For example, in artist mode, alltracks are grouped by artist names. Artist namesare listed alphabetically.

The SEEK/SCAN arrows are used to change themode item. For example, in Album Mode this willchange to the next or previous album. The mode listname will display for five seconds, time-out, thenupdate to show which list the GM Mobile DigitalMedia system is currently playing.

The tune knob is used to change the song withinthe current category. For example, while in aplaylist (Playlist Mode) turning the tune knob tothe right will change from track 1 to track 2.

t SEEK/SCAN u: Once a mode has been set,navigate through the categories within that modeby pressing the right or left SEEK/SCAN arrow.The category items will display for five seconds,time-out, then update to show which category theDigital Media system is currently playing.

To change the song that is currently playing, pressthe right or left SEEK/SCAN arrow to navigatethrough the songs.

324

Setting the Browse Mode UsingVoice Index™The system automatically organizes all of thesongs on the DMS (digital media storage)cartridge for you. With Voice Index™ browsing,the six numbered pushbuttons are used as modebuttons to browse as the system reads album,artist, genre and playlist names to you whileyou drive.

1-6 (Pushbuttons): The GM Digital Media systemuses the numbered station preset buttons toswitch through the browse modes. Press one ofthe pushbuttons to set the browse mode. Theselected browse mode will be announced and thebrowse mode name will appear on the display.

The preset pushbuttons and the modes associatedwith those numbers are:

• (1) Album

• (2) Artist

• (3) Genre

• (4) Playlist

• (5) Not Used

• (6) Not Used

Changing Song Lists Within aBrowse ModeEach browse mode contains lists of songs.For example, Genre mode might contain a list ofClassical songs, a list of Rock songs, and alist of Country songs.

Once the audio system is set to one of the fourmodes, press the SEEK/SCAN button to navigatethrough the song lists. For example, press theright arrow while in Album mode to change to thenext album. Press the left arrow to go back tothe previous Album item.

t SEEK/SCAN u: Press the SEEK/SCANbutton once to change to the next song list.

Mode 1 (Album Mode): Press the (1) pushbuttonto put the system into Album mode. Press theright or left SEEK/SCAN arrow once to change tothe next or previous Album. Albums are listedalphabetically in groups of Artists.

Mode 2 (Artist Mode): Press the (2) pushbuttonto put the system into Artist mode. Press theright or left SEEK/SCAN arrow once to change tothe next or previous Artist. Artists are listed inalphabetical order.

325

Mode 3 (Genre Mode): Press the (3) pushbuttonto put the system into Genre mode. Press theright or left SEEK/SCAN arrow once to changeto the next or previous Genre in alphabetical order.

Mode 4 (Playlist Mode): Press the (4) pushbuttonto put the system into Playlist mode. Press theright or left SEEK/SCAN arrow once to change tothe next or previous Playlist in the order theplaylists were saved to the DMS cartridge.

The Album, Artist, and Genre lists are generatedand organized automatically using thePhatnoise™ Media Manager.

Seeking Through Song List Titles

t SEEK/SCAN u: Press and hold theSEEK/SCAN button for more than 2 seconds tostart seeking through song list titles. Pressthis button again to stop on a song list title.

The Digital Media system will announce thefollowing in each mode:

Mode 1 (Album Mode): Album names areannounced.

Mode 2 (Artist Mode): Artist names areannounced. Press and hold the SEEK/SCANbutton until the system announces the first letterof each artist name.

Mode 3 (Genre Mode): The first letter of Artistnames are announced in alphabetical order. Pressand hold the SEEK/SEEK button until the systemannounces the first letter of each artist name.

Mode 4 (Playlist Mode): Seeking through songsis not available in Playlist Mode.

Finding Songs in a Song ListAfter finding a playlist, artist, album, or genre,navigate through the songs by turning thetune knob.

326

Using the Fast Forward and FastReverse Buttons

{| (Fast Forward/Fast Reverse): Press andhold the fast forward or fast reverse arrow tofast forward or reverse within the current track.

Using the GM Mobile Digital MediaSystem for Rear Seat Entertainment

Rear seat passengerscan enjoy audio, videoand games over thewireless headphones.

Access to the Audio, Video, and Games on themenu system is displayed on the video screen.The DVD remote control and the controls on theDVD player itself can be used to make theselections.

Starting the System for Rear SeatEntertainmentThe GM Mobile Digital Media system is availablethrough the auxiliary mode of the DVD player.

To begin using the system, follow the instructionlist below:

1. Insert the DMS cartridge into the GM MobileDigital Media player.

2. Turn on your video screen by pressing thepower button.

3. Switch to the DMS mode by pressing theAUX button.

Overhead Video Screen

327

Navigating the On-Screen Menus Usingthe DVD Remote ControlThe on-screen menus provide access to theAudio, Video, and Game content on your digitalmedia storage (DMS) cartridge. Use the DVDremote control to navigate the on-screen menus.

A. Up ListB. Top MenuC. LeftD. Down ListE. Select

F. OptionsG. RightH. Return to

Current Selection

n, q, p, o (Up List, Down List, Right, andLeft Directional Arrows): For the GM MobileDigital Media system, press the up list or down listdirectional arrows (A, D) to move the highlightarea up or down the list of items.

Press the right directional arrow (G) to go furtherinto the selected item, or press the left directionalarrow (C) to go back one menu level.

r (Enter/Select): For the GM Mobile DigitalMedia system, press the enter/select button (E)to go into any selected menu item.

v (Title/Top Menu): For the GM MobileDigital Media system, press the title/top menubutton (B) to jump to the start screen.

q (Return/Current Selection): For the GMMobile Digital Media system, if audio is playing orin the pause mode, press the return/currentselection button (H) to go back to the currentselection.

328

y (Menu/Options): For the GM Mobile DigitalMedia system, press the menu/options button (F)to display the options list.

c (Stop): For the GM Mobile Digital Mediasystem, press this button to stop playback of theselected option.

r /j (Play/Pause): For the GM Mobile DigitalMedia system, press this button to start playbackof a selected option. Press this button whilean option is in the play mode to pause it.Press it again to continue playback of thecurrent option.

DVD Remote Control BatteriesIf the remote control does not seem to beworking, the batteries may need to be replaced.See Remote Control, “Battery Replacement”in your vehicle’s owner manual.

Browsing Audio

1. Select the Audio option through the menusystem displayed on the video screen.

329

2. Press the up list or down list directionalarrows (A, D) on the remote control tonavigate through the menu options suchas album, artist, playlist or genre. See“Navigating the On-Screen Menus Usingthe DVD Remote Control” earlier in thissection for more information.

3. Press the select button (E) on the remotecontrol to begin playing an album, artist,genre, playlist, or song. See “Navigating theOn-Screen Menus Using the DVD RemoteControl” earlier in this section for moreinformation.

330

4. If you want to find a particular song, pressthe right directional arrow (G) on the remotecontrol to go further into the selected item.See “Navigating the On-Screen Menus Usingthe DVD Remote Control” earlier in thissection for more information.

Video BrowsingBrowse digital videos stored on the systemthrough the menu display. MPEG format issupported, so you can play back recorded showsand movies from television, home movies,downloaded videos and pre-packaged featurefilms and shows. See the following instructionsfor further screen display information:

1. Select the Video option through the menusystem displayed on the video screen.

331

2. Press the up list or down list directionalarrows (A, D) on the remote control tonavigate through preloaded videos andunlocked video playlists. See “Navigating theOn-Screen Menus Using the DVD RemoteControl” earlier in this section for moreinformation.

3. If you want to find a particular video, pressthe right directional arrow (G) on the remotecontrol to go further into the selected item.See “Navigating the On-Screen Menus Usingthe DVD Remote Control” earlier in thissection for more information.

332

Games BrowsingBrowse games that are stored on the systemthrough the menu display. Video games arepreloaded on the DMS cartridge and played withrich screen graphics and the included wirelessgame controller.

1. Select the Games option through the menusystem displayed on the video screen.

2. Press the up list or down list directionalarrows (A, D) on the remote control tonavigate through the preloaded gamepackages. Game packages can be purchasedand unlocked from your desktop computer.See the PhatNoise™ Media Manager Owner’sManual for more information on how tounlock games.

333

Wireless Game Controller

A. Start ButtonB. Start LightC. Select ButtonD. Select Light

E. Left ThumbstickF. Left RockerpadG. Right Thumbstick

The wireless game controller transmits radiofrequency signals to the overhead monitor.Wireless means, there are no cords to hinder yourmovement while playing games.The key pad as shown above has six buttonslocated on the upper right side of the gamecontroller.

334

Wireless Game Controller SynchronizationIn the event that your GM Mobile Digital Mediagame controller needs to be re-synchronized withyour vehicle, open the battery compartmentand remove a battery. As soon as the battery isreplaced, the game controller will synchronize withthe vehicle during the next ignition cycle.

Wireless Game Controller Play ModeThe functionality of your GM Mobile Digital MediaGame Controller is dependant upon the gamebeing played. In cases where there are two playeroptions for a game, you may desire to have asecond controller in your vehicle which maybe purchased through your dealer.

Wireless Game Controller PowerSaving ModeYour GM Mobile Digital Media Game Controllerhas a built-in power saving mode to conservebattery life. When not in use, the game controllerwill automatically go into “Sleep” mode. Thegame controller can be awakened at any time bypressing the “Start” button.

Important Safety and HandlingInstructionsThis equipment has been tested and found tocomply with the limits for a Class B digital device,pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Theselimits are designed to provide reasonableprotection against harmful interference in aresidential installation. This equipment may causeharmful interference to radio communications,if it is not installed and used in accordance withthe instructions provided. However, there isno guarantee that interference will not occur ina particular installation. If this equipment doescause harmful interference to radio or televisionreception, which can be determined by turningthe equipment off and on, consult the dealerfor help.

This device also complies with RSS-210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:



335

Changes and modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

Read the following for instructions on handling andtaking care of your Mobile Digital Media systemand its components.

Digital Media Storage (DMS)Cartridge Care• Do not leave the DMS cartridge in locations

with extremely high temperatures such ason a car dashboard or in the rear windowwhere it will be subject to direct sunlight.

• Do not drop the DMS cartridge or subject itto a violent shock.

• Do not spill liquid on the DMS cartridgeor submerge the DMS cartridge in liquid.The only effective protection for data and othermaterial stored on the DMS cartridge is theregular backing up of that data by you.

Mobile Digital Media Player Care• Never spray any type of liquid such as a

cleaning agent inside of an open cartridgepanel on the Digital Media player. Doing thismay damage the parts or inside mechanismneeded to help operate the unit.

• Do not use any object to probe the opening ofthe Mobile Digital Media player and do not putany body parts or other foreign objects inthe opening of the product.

336

Tips and Troubleshooting ChartProblem Cause and Solution

The Digital Media system and RSE system will notcome on at all.

• A fuse in the car has blown. After checking for shortcircuits in the wires, replace the fuse with one of thesame rating.

The RSE screen displays DMS MEDIA NOTINSERTED.

• The DMS cartridge is not fully inserted.Fully insert the DMS cartridge.

The RSE screen displays DMS MEDIA LOADING. • The system is still booting. Please wait up to15 seconds for the system to boot and then switchback to digital media mode.

The RSE screen displays DMS MEDIA ERROR. • The DMS cartridge is not operating properly or isdamaged. See your dealer if the problem persists.

The RSE screen displays DMS MEDIA FILE ERROR. • A file on your DMS cartridge is corrupted and willnot play properly. Run the PhatNoise DMS Doctoron your computer and follow the recommendations.

337

Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont’d)Problem Cause and Solution

The green light blinks at a steady rate for longerthan 20 seconds.

• You have updated the firmware on the DMScartridge and the Mobile Digital Media system isreprogramming itself. DO NOT REMOVE THE DMSCARTRIDGE. Allow the Digital Media system toreprogram itself for up to 10 minutes. Whenreprogramming is complete, the lights will turn offand stay off. The system will be ready to use.

No Sound. • Adjust the volume of the head unit.• Make sure the head unit has the Digital Media

player as the active source.

No Sound.The head unit cannot access the Digital Media system.

• File(s) on your cartridge may be corrupt. Run thePhatNoise DMS Doctor on your computer and followthe recommendations.

• If you have just downloaded new firmware, this isnormal. Wait about seven minutes until the greenlight stops blinking, then both lights should go off.

338


Audio skipping occurs during playback. Many things can cause a “skip”, or any break duringplayback. If you are hearing breaks in playback, hereare some things to check:• When you hear a skip, restart the track, or seek

backwards a bit, to hear if the skip is actually in themusic file.

• Check to see if you are using the latest firmwareand desktop software. This is very important, assoftware is updated frequently. See PhatNoiseMusic Manager manual.

• Sometimes a heavily fragmented cartridge canskip due to increased seek times. Defragment thecartridge for best performance. See PhatNoiseMedia Manager™ software instructions fordefragmenting a cartridge.

WMA files are not playing in the Mobile DigitalMedia system.

Some software such as Windows Media Player featurescopy protection in their WMA encoding tools. Thisprevents the tracks from playing on any device otherthan your computer. Disable any “Copy Protect Music”check box when encoding music. Consult yoursoftware’s manual for more information.

339


Voice prompts are missing in the vehicle. Check your voice prompt settings on your desktopcomputer:• Insert the DMS.• Open the Device view and select the DMS.• Press the Hardware Options button.• Open the DMS Database/Voice Prompts tab and

click Fix Voice Prompts.

Customer Assistance CenterFor customer assistance in the United States,call 1-877-GM-PHATN (877-467-4286) or contactthe Customer Assistance Center through theinternet at gmmobilemediasupportgedas.com

For customer assistance in Canada, seethe Customer Assistance Offices in the index ofyour vehicle’s owner manual.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theftof your vehicle’s radio. The feature worksautomatically by learning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). If the radio ismoved to a different vehicle, it will not operate andLOCKED will appear on the display.

With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will notoperate if stolen.

340

Audio Steering Wheel Controls

If your vehicle has this feature, some audiocontrols can be adjusted at the steering wheel.They include the following:

wt u x (Seek): Press the up or the downarrow to go to the next or previous station andstay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either arrow fortwo seconds until FREQUENCY SCAN appearson the display. The radio will go to a station, playfor a few seconds, then go to the next station.Press either arrow again to stop scanning.

The sound will mute while seeking or scanning.The radio will only seek or scan stations witha strong signal that are in the selected band.

When a CD is playing, press either arrow to go tothe previous or next track, if more than eightseconds have played. If either arrow is held orpressed more than once, the player will continuemoving backward or forward through the CD.

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped).

341

1 - 6: Press this button to scan the stations thatare programmed on the radio preset pushbuttons.The radio will go to the next preset stationstored on the pushbuttons, play for a few seconds,then go on to the next preset station. Press thisbutton again to stop scanning. The radio willonly scan preset stations with a strong signal thatare in the selected band.

$ (Mute): Press this button to silence the system.Press this button again, to turn the sound on.

r (Play): When listening to the radio, press thisbutton to play a CD.

wux (Volume): Press the up or down arrowto increase or decrease the volume.

Radio ReceptionYou may experience frequency interference andstatic during normal radio reception if itemssuch as cellphone chargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronic devicesare plugged into the accessory power outlet.If there is interference or static, unplug the itemfrom the accessory power outlet.

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than forFM, especially at night. The longer range cancause station frequencies to interfere with eachother. For better radio reception, most AMradio stations will boost the power levels duringthe day, and then reduce these levels duringthe night. Static can also occur when things likestorms and power lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, try reducing thetreble on your radio.

342

FM StereoFM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signalswill reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FMsignals, causing the sound to fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radioreception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,tall buildings or hills can interfere with satelliteradio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.In addition, traveling or standing under heavyfoliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may causeloss of the XM™ signal for a period of time.The radio may display NO SIGNAL to indicateinterference.

Care of Your CDs and DVDsHandle CDs carefully. Store them in their originalcases or other protective cases and away fromdirect sunlight and dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If the surface of aCD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD will not play properly or notat all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take asoft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth ina mild, neutral detergent solution mixed withwater, and clean it. Make sure the wiping processstarts from the center to the edge.

Do not touch the bottom side of a CD whilehandling it; this could damage the surface. Pick upCDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge ofthe hole and the outer edge.

Care of the CD and DVD PlayerThe use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is notadvised, due to the risk of contaminating the lensof the CD optics with lubricants internal to theCD mechanism.

343

Fixed Mast AntennaThe fixed mast antenna can withstand most carwashes without being damaged. If the mast shouldever become slightly bent, straighten it out byhand. If the mast is badly bent, replace it.

Check occasionally to make sure the mast is stilltightened to the antenna base located on thehood of the vehicle. If tightening is required, tightenby hand.

XM™ Satellite Radio AntennaSystemThe XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located onthe roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear ofsnow and ice build up for clear radio reception.

Loading items onto the roof of your vehiclecan interfere with the performance of the XM™system. Make sure that the XM™ satellite antennais not obstructed.

Chime Level AdjustmentThe radio is used to adjust the vehicle’s chimelevel. To change the volume level of the chime,press and hold pushbutton 6 with the ignitionon and the radio power off. The volume level willchange from the normal level to loud, andLOUD will appear on the radio display. To changeback to the default or normal setting, press andhold pushbutton 6 again. The volume levelwill change from the loud level to normal, andNORMAL will appear on the radio display.Removing the radio and not replacing it with afactory radio or chime module will disablevehicle chimes.

344

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle ............................................ 346Defensive Driving ...................................... 346Drunken Driving ........................................ 347Control of a Vehicle .................................. 350Braking ...................................................... 350Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 351Braking in Emergencies ............................. 353Traction Control System (TCS) .................. 353StabiliTrak® System ................................... 355Steering .................................................... 357Off-Road Recovery .................................... 360Passing ..................................................... 360Loss of Control .......................................... 362Driving at Night ......................................... 363Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 365

City Driving ............................................... 368Freeway Driving ........................................ 369Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................. 370Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 371Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 371Winter Driving ........................................... 373If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,

Ice, or Snow .......................................... 377Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 378Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 378

Towing ........................................................ 384Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 384Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 384Level Control ............................................. 385Towing a Trailer ........................................ 386

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

345

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle

Defensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about driving is:Drive defensively.

Please start with a very important safety device inyour vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: TheyAre for Everyone on page 26.

{CAUTION:

Defensive driving really means “Be readyfor anything.” On city streets, rural roads,or expressways, it means “Always expectthe unexpected.” Assume that pedestriansor other drivers are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipate what theymight do and be ready. Rear-endcollisions are about the most preventableof accidents. Yet they are common. Allowenough following distance. Defensivedriving requires that a driver concentrateon the driving task. Anything thatdistracts from the driving task makesproper defensive driving more difficultand can even cause a collision, withresulting injury. Ask a passenger to helpdo these things, or pull off the road in asafe place to do them. These simpledefensive driving techniques could saveyour life.

346

Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking anddriving is a national tragedy. It is the numberone contributor to the highway death toll, claimingthousands of victims every year.Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs todrive a vehicle:

• Judgment• Muscular Coordination• Vision• Attentiveness

Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In mostcases, these deaths are the result of someone whowas drinking and driving. In recent years, more than16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths havebeen associated with the use of alcohol, with morethan 300,000 people injured.

Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half theadult population — choose never to drink alcohol,so they never drive after drinking. For personsunder 21, it is against the law in every U.S. state todrink alcohol. There are good medical,psychological, and developmental reasons forthese laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drinkalcohol and then drive. But what if people do?How much is “too much” if someone plansto drive? It is a lot less than many might think.Although it depends on each person and situation,here is some general information on the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) ofsomeone who is drinking depends uponfour things:

• The amount of alcohol consumed

• The drinker’s body weight

• The amount of food that is consumed beforeand during drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol

347

According to the American Medical Association, a180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up witha BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person wouldreach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce(120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks ifeach had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of liquors likewhiskey, gin, or vodka.

It is the amount of alcohol that counts. Forexample, if the same person drank three doublemartinis (3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each)within an hour, the person’s BAC would be closeto 0.12 percent. A person who consumes foodjust before or during drinking will have a somewhatlower BAC level.

There is a gender difference, too. Womengenerally have a lower relative percentage of bodywater than men. Since alcohol is carried in bodywater, this means that a woman generally willreach a higher BAC level than a man of her samebody weight will when each has the samenumber of drinks.

The law in most U.S. states, and throughoutCanada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. Insome other countries, the limit is even lower. Forexample, it is 0.05 percent in both France andGermany. The BAC limit for all commercial driversin the United States is 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three tosix drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we haveseen, it depends on how much alcohol is in thedrinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.

348

But the ability to drive is affected well below aBAC of 0.10 percent. Research shows thatthe driving skills of many people are impaired at aBAC approaching 0.05 percent, and that theeffects are worse at night. All drivers are impairedat BAC levels above 0.05 percent. Statisticsshow that the chance of being in a collisionincreases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance ofhaving a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent,the chance of this driver having a collision is12 times greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, thechance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of thealcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or numberof cold showers will speed that up. “I will be careful”is not the right answer. What if there is anemergency, a need to take sudden action, as whena child darts into the street? A person with even amoderate BAC might not be able to react quicklyenough to avoid the collision.

There is something else about drinking and drivingthat many people do not know. Medical researchshows that alcohol in a person’s system can makecrash injuries worse, especially injuries to thebrain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that whenanyone who has been drinking — driver orpassenger — is in a crash, that person’s chanceof being killed or permanently disabled ishigher than if the person had not been drinking.

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,attentiveness, and judgment can beaffected by even a small amount ofalcohol. You can have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive after drinking.Please do not drink and drive or ride with adriver who has been drinking. Ride home ina cab; or if you are with a group, designatea driver who will not drink.

349

Control of a VehicleYou have three systems that make your vehicle gowhere you want it to go. They are the brakes, thesteering, and the accelerator. All three systemshave to do their work at the places where the tiresmeet the road.

Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow orice, it is easy to ask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide. That meansyou can lose control of your vehicle. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 353 andStabiliTrak® System on page 355.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 400.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light on page 214.

Braking action involves perception time andreaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brakepedal. That is perception time. Then you have tobring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about three-fourths of asecond. But that is only an average. It mightbe less with one driver and as long as two orthree seconds or more with another. Age, physicalcondition, alertness, coordination, and eyesightall play a part. So do alcohol, drugs, andfrustration. But even in three-fourths of a second,a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in anemergency, so keeping enough space betweenyour vehicle and others is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances varygreatly with the surface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition of the road,whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; thecondition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake force applied.

350

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drivein spurts — heavy acceleration followed byheavy braking — rather than keeping pace withtraffic. This is a mistake. The brakes may not havetime to cool between hard stops. The brakeswill wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavybraking. If you keep pace with the traffic andallow realistic following distances, you willeliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That meansbetter braking and longer brake life.

If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you aredriving, brake normally but do not pump thebrakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder topush down. If the engine stops, you will still havesome power brake assist. But you will use itwhen you brake. Once the power assist is usedup, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedalwill be harder to push.


Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)Your vehicle has the Anti-Lock Brake System(ABS), an advanced electronic braking system thatwill help prevent a braking skid.

When you start your engine and begin to driveaway, ABS will check itself. You may hear amomentary motor or clicking noise while this testis going on, and you may even notice thatyour brake pedal moves or pulses a little. This isnormal.

If there is a problemwith ABS, this warninglight will stay on.See Anti-Lock BrakeSystem WarningLight on page 215.

351

Let us say the road is wet and you are drivingsafely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front ofyou. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.Here is what happens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work the brakes at eachwheel.

ABS can change the brake pressure faster thanany driver could. The computer is programmed tomake the most of available tire and roadconditions. This can help you steer around theobstacle while braking hard.

As you brake, your computer keeps receivingupdates on wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

352

Remember: ABS does not change the time youneed to get your foot up to the brake pedalor always decrease stopping distance. If you gettoo close to the vehicle in front of you, you will nothave time to apply your brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Always leave enoughroom up ahead to stop, even though youhave ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brakepedal down firmly and let anti-lock work for you.You may feel a slight brake pedal pulsationor notice some noise, but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesWith ABS, you can steer and brake at the sametime. In many emergencies, steering can help youmore than even the very best braking.

Traction Control System (TCS)Your vehicle may have a traction control systemthat limits wheel spin. This is especially usefulin slippery road conditions. The system operates ifit senses that one or both of the front wheelsare spinning or beginning to lose traction. Whenthis happens, the system brakes the spinningwheel(s) and/or reduces engine power tolimit wheel spin.

The TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVE message willcome on in the Driver Information Center (DIC)when the traction control system is limiting wheelspin. You may feel or hear the system working,but this is normal.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when thetraction control system begins to limit wheel spin,the cruise control will automatically disengage.When road conditions allow you to safelyuse it again, you may re-engage the cruise control.

353

This warning light willcome on to let youknow if there isa problem with yourtraction control system.

When this warning light is on, the system will notlimit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.

If the SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM message inthe DIC comes on and stays on or comes onwhile you are driving, there’s a problem with yourtraction control system. Have the tractioncontrol system serviced by your GM dealer assoon as possible.

When this warning message is on, the TRACTIONCONTROL OFF message in the DIC will comeon to remind you that the system will not limitwheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.

The traction control system automatically comeson whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheelspin, especially in slippery road conditions, youshould always leave the system on. But youcan turn the traction control system off if you everneed to. You should turn the system off if yourvehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud or snow androcking the vehicle is required. See RockingYour Vehicle to Get It Out on page 378 and If YourVehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow onpage 377.

To turn the system off,press the tractioncontrol button locatedon the center ofthe instrument panel.

354

If the system is limiting wheel spin when youpress the button, the TRACTION CONTROLACTIVE message will go off, but the system willnot turn off until there is no longer a currentneed to limit wheel spin. The TRACTIONCONTROL OFF message will come on to remindyou the system is off. You can turn the systemback on at any time by pressing the button again.The traction control system warning messageshould go off.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 400 for more information.

StabiliTrak® SystemYour vehicle may be equipped with StabiliTrak®

which combines anti-lock brake, traction andstability control systems and helps the drivermaintain directional control of the vehicle in mostdriving conditions.

When you first start your vehicle and begin todrive away, the system performs several diagnosticchecks to insure there are no problems. Youmay hear or feel the system working. Thisis normal and does not mean there is a problemwith your vehicle.

If the system fails to turn on or activate, theSERVICE STABILITY SYSTEM message will bedisplayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC). Ifthe vehicle has gone through heavy accelerationor braking or multiple turns during the firsttwo miles of driving after starting your vehicle, theSTABILITY CONTROL OFF message mayappear on the DIC. If this is the case, your vehicledoes not need servicing. You will need to turnthe vehicle off and then restart it to initializeStabiliTrak®. If either message appears on theDIC, and your vehicle has not gone through hardacceleration, braking or multiple turns in thefirst two miles of driving, your vehicle should betaken in for service.

The STABILITY CONTROL ACTIVE message willappear on the DIC only when the system is bothon and activated. It means that an advancedcomputer-controlled system has come on to helpyour vehicle continue to go in the direction in whichyou are steering. StabiliTrak® activates when thecomputer senses that your vehicle is just starting tospin, as it might if you hit a patch of ice or otherslippery spot on the road. When the systemactivates, you may hear a noise or feel a vibration inthe brake pedal. This is normal.

355

When the STABILITY CONTROL ACTIVEmessage is on, you should continue to steer in thedirection you want to go. The system is designed tohelp you in bad weather or other difficult drivingsituations by making the most of whatever roadconditions will permit. For more information on thestability messages, see Driver Information Center(DIC) on page 223.

If the StabiliTrak® system turns off, the tractioncontrol system warning light will illuminate, and theSTABILITY CONTROL OFF message willappear on the DIC to warn the driver thatStabiliTrak® is no longer available to assist youwith directional control of the vehicle. Adjust yourdriving accordingly.

To realize the full benefits of the stabilityenhancement system, you should normally leaveStabiliTrak® on, but it may be necessary toturn the system off if your vehicle is stuck in sand,mud, ice or snow, and you want to “rock” yourvehicle to attempt to free it. See RockingYour Vehicle to Get It Out on page 378 and IfYour Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snowon page 377.

Traction Control OperationThe traction control system is part of theStabiliTrak® system. Traction control limits wheelspin by reducing engine power to the wheels(engine speed management) and by applyingbrakes.

The traction control system is enabledautomatically when you start your vehicle. It willactivate and display the TRACTION CONTROLACTIVE message in the DIC if it senses that oneor both of the front wheels are spinning orbeginning to lose traction while driving.

If the brake traction-control system activatesconstantly or if the brakes have heated up due tohigh-speed braking, brake traction-control willbe disabled and the TRACTION CONTROLACTIVE message will be displayed. In the limitedmode, the traction control system will only useengine traction-control and is limited in its ability toprovide optimal performance since the systemwill not utilize brake traction-control to control slipon the drive wheels. The system will return tonormal operation after the brakes have cooled.This can take up to two minutes or longerdepending on brake usage.

356

The traction control system may activate ondry or rough roads or under conditions such asheavy acceleration while turning or abruptupshifts/downshifts of the transaxle. Whenthis happens you may notice a reduction inacceleration, or may hear a noise or vibration.This is normal.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the systemactivates, the STABILITY CONTROL ACTIVEmessage will appear on the DIC and the cruisecontrol will automatically disengage. Whenroad conditions allow you to use cruise again, youmay re-engage the cruise control. See CruiseControl on page 177.

StabiliTrak® may also turn off automatically if itdetermines that a problem exists with the system.If the problem does not clear itself after restartingthe vehicle, you should see your dealer forservice.

Steering

Power SteeringIf you lose power steering assist because theengine stops or the system is not functioning, youcan steer but it will take much more effort.

Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at a reasonablespeed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidentsmentioned on the news happen on curves.Here is why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us issubject to the same laws of physics when drivingon curves. The traction of the tires against theroad surface makes it possible for the vehicle tochange its path when you turn the front wheels. Ifthere is no traction, inertia will keep the vehiclegoing in the same direction. If you have evertried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you willunderstand this.

357

The traction you can get in a curve depends onthe condition of your tires and the road surface, theangle at which the curve is banked, and yourspeed. While you are in a curve, speed is the onefactor you can control.

Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Bothcontrol systems — steering and braking — haveto do their work where the tires meet the road.Unless you have four-wheel anti-lock brakes,adding the hard braking can demand too much ofthose places. You can lose control.

The same thing can happen if you are steeringthrough a sharp curve and you suddenlyaccelerate. Those two control systems — steeringand acceleration — can overwhelm thoseplaces where the tires meet the road and makeyou lose control. See Traction Control System(TCS) on page 353 and StabiliTrak® System onpage 355.

What should you do if this ever happens? Ease upon the brake or accelerator pedal, steer thevehicle the way you want it to go, and slow down.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that youshould adjust your speed. Of course, the postedspeeds are based on good weather and roadconditions. Under less favorable conditions you willwant to go slower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approacha curve, do it before you enter the curve, whileyour front wheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive”through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steadyspeed. Wait to accelerate until you are out ofthe curve, and then accelerate gently intothe straightaway.


358

Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be moreeffective than braking. For example, you comeover a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, ora car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or achild darts out from between parked cars andstops right in front of you. You can avoid theseproblems by braking — if you can stop in time. Butsometimes you cannot; there is not room. Thatis the time for evasive action — steering aroundthe problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencieslike these. First apply your brakes.

See Braking on page 350. It is better to remove asmuch speed as you can from a possible collision.Then steer around the problem, to the left orright depending on the space available.

An emergency like this requires close attentionand a quick decision. If you are holding thesteering wheel at the recommended 9 and3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full180 degrees very quickly without removing eitherhand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly,and just as quickly straighten the wheel once youhave avoided the object.

The fact that such emergency situations arealways possible is a good reason to practicedefensive driving at all times and wear safety beltsproperly.

359

Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your right wheels have droppedoff the edge of a road onto the shoulder while youare driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below thepavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease offthe accelerator and then, if there is nothing in theway, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edgeof the pavement. You can turn the steering wheelup to one-quarter turn until the right front tirecontacts the pavement edge. Then turn yoursteering wheel to go straight down the roadway.

PassingThe driver of a vehicle about to pass another on atwo-lane highway waits for just the right moment,accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, thengoes back into the right lane again. A simplemaneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on atwo-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,since the passing vehicle occupies the same laneas oncoming traffic for several seconds. Amiscalculation, an error in judgment, or a briefsurrender to frustration or anger can suddenly putthe passing driver face to face with the worst of alltraffic accidents — the head-on collision.

360

So here are some tips for passing:

• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to thesides, and to crossroads for situationsthat might affect your passing patterns. If youhave any doubt whatsoever about makinga successful pass, wait for a better time.

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings,and lines. If you can see a sign up aheadthat might indicate a turn or an intersection,delay your pass. A broken center lineusually indicates it is all right to pass, providingthe road ahead is clear. Never cross a solidline on your side of the lane or a double solidline, even if the road seems empty ofapproaching traffic.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you wantto pass while you are awaiting an opportunity.For one thing, following too closely reducesyour area of vision, especially if you arefollowing a larger vehicle. Also, you will nothave adequate space if the vehicle aheadsuddenly slows or stops. Keep back areasonable distance.

• When it looks like a chance to pass is comingup, start to accelerate but stay in the right laneand do not get too close. Time your move soyou will be increasing speed as the time comesto move into the other lane. If the way is clear topass, you will have a running start that morethan makes up for the distance you would loseby dropping back. And if something happens tocause you to cancel your pass, you need onlyslow down and drop back again and wait foranother opportunity.

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slowvehicle, wait your turn. But take care thatsomeone is not trying to pass you as you pullout to pass the slow vehicle. Remember toglance over your shoulder and check theblind spot.

• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and start your left lane change signalbefore moving out of the right lane to pass.When you are far enough ahead of the passedvehicle to see its front in your vehicle’s insidemirror, activate the right lane change signal andmove back into the right lane. Remember thatyour vehicle’s passenger side outside mirror isconvex. The vehicle you just passed may seemto be farther away from you than it really is.

361

• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a timeon two-lane roads. Reconsider before passingthe next vehicle.

• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle toorapidly. Even though the brake lamps are notflashing, it may be slowing down or startingto turn.

• If you are being passed, make it easy for thefollowing driver to get ahead of you. Perhapsyou can ease a little to the right.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts sayabout what happens when the three controlsystems — brakes, steering, andacceleration — do not have enough frictionwhere the tires meet the road to do what the driverhas asked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying tosteer and constantly seek an escape route orarea of less danger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by takingreasonable care suited to existing conditions, andby not overdriving those conditions. But skidsare always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to yourvehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,your wheels are not rolling. In the steering orcornering skid, too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, too much throttlecauses the driving wheels to spin.

A cornering skid is best handled by easing yourfoot off the accelerator pedal.

Remember: Any traction control system helpsavoid only the acceleration skid. If your tractioncontrol system is off, then an accelerationskid is also best handled by easing your foot offthe accelerator pedal.

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot offthe accelerator pedal and quickly steer theway you want the vehicle to go. If you start

362

steering quickly enough, your vehicle maystraighten out. Always be ready for a second skidif it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,ice, gravel, or other material is on the road.For safety, you will want to slow down and adjustyour driving to these conditions. It is importantto slow down on slippery surfaces becausestopping distance will be longer and vehicle controlmore limited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction,try your best to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking, including reducing vehiclespeed by shifting to a lower gear. Any suddenchanges could cause the tires to slide. You maynot realize the surface is slippery until yourvehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warningclues — such as enough water, ice, or packedsnow on the road to make a mirroredsurface — and slow down when you haveany doubt.

Remember: Any Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)helps avoid only the braking skid.

Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous than day driving.One reason is that some drivers are likely tobe impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with nightvision problems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce theglare from headlamps behind you.

• Since you cannot see as well, you may needto slow down and keep more space betweenyou and other vehicles.

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only somuch road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.

• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safeplace and rest.

363

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.But as we get older these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice asmuch light to see the same thing at night as a20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect yournight vision. For example, if you spend theday in bright sunshine you are wise to wearsunglasses. Your eyes will have less troubleadjusting to night. But if you are driving, do notwear sunglasses at night. They may cut down onglare from headlamps, but they also make alot of things invisible.

You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, oreven several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjustto the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,as from a driver who does not lower the highbeams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,slow down a little. Avoid staring directly intothe approaching headlamps.

Keep the windshield and all the glass on yourvehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night ismade much worse by dirt on the glass. Eventhe inside of the glass can build up a film causedby dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle andflash more than clean glass would, making thepupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that the headlamps light up far less of aroadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep youreyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimlylighted objects. Just as the headlamps should bechecked regularly for proper aim, so should youreyes be examined regularly. Some drivers sufferfrom night blindness — the inability to see in dimlight — and are not even aware of it.

364

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. Ona wet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, orturn as well because your tire-to-road traction isnot as good as on dry roads. And, if your tires donot have much tread left, you will get even lesstraction. It is always wise to go slower andbe cautious if rain starts to fall while you aredriving. The surface may get wet suddenly whenyour reflexes are tuned for driving on drypavement.

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Evenif your windshield wiper blades are in goodshape, a heavy rain can make it harder to seeroad signs and traffic signals, pavement markings,the edge of the road, and even people walking.

365

It is wise to keep your windshield wiper andwasher system in good shape and keep yourwindshield washer fluid reservoir filled with washerfluid. Replace your windshield wiper insertswhen they show signs of streaking or missingareas on the windshield, or when strips of rubberstart to separate from the inserts.

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. Theymay not work as well in a quick stop andmay cause pulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle ofwater or a car wash, apply your brakepedal lightly until your brakes worknormally.

Driving too fast through large water puddles oreven going through some car washes can causeproblems, too. The water may affect yourbrakes. Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, tryto slow down before you hit them.

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water canbuild up under your tires that they can actually rideon the water. This can happen if the road is wetenough and you are going fast enough. When yourvehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contactwith the road.

Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can ifyour tires do not have much tread or if thepressure in one or more is low. It can happen if alot of water is standing on the road. If you cansee reflections from trees, telephone poles,or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’ssurface, there could be hydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.There just is not a hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is to slow downwhen it is raining.

366

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

Notice: If you drive too quickly throughdeep puddles or standing water, water cancome in through your engine’s air intake andbadly damage your engine. Never drive throughwater that is slightly lower than the underbodyof your vehicle. If you cannot avoid deeppuddles or standing water, drive through themvery slowly.

Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strongforces. If you try to drive through flowingwater, as you might at a low watercrossing, your vehicle can be carried



away. As little as six inches of flowingwater can carry away a smaller vehicle. Ifthis happens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do not ignorepolice warning signs, and otherwise bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips• Turn on your low-beam headlamps — not just

your parking lamps — to help make you morevisible to others.

• Besides slowing down, allow some extrafollowing distance. And be especially carefulwhen you pass another vehicle. Allow yourselfmore clear room ahead, and be prepared tohave your view restricted by road spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth. SeeTires on page 449.

367

City Driving

One of the biggest problems with city streets isthe amount of traffic on them. You will wantto watch out for what the other drivers are doingand pay attention to traffic signals.

Here are ways to increase your safety in citydriving:

• Know the best way to get to where you aregoing. Get a city map and plan your tripinto an unknown part of the city just as youwould for a cross-country trip.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscrossmost large cities. You will save time andenergy. See Freeway Driving on page 369.

• Treat a green light as a warning signal. Atraffic light is there because the corner isbusy enough to need it. When a light turnsgreen, and just before you start to move,check both ways for vehicles that have notcleared the intersection or may be running thered light.

368

Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,parkways, expressways, turnpikes, orsuperhighways — are the safest of all roads.But they have their own special rules.

The most important advice on freeway driving is:Keep up with traffic and keep to the right.Drive at the same speed most of the other driversare driving.

Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth trafficflow. Treat the left lane on a freeway as apassing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leadsto the freeway. If you have a clear view of thefreeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, youshould begin to check traffic. Try to determinewhere you expect to blend with the flow. Try tomerge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, andglance over your shoulder as often as necessary.Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speedto the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if itis slower. Stay in the right lane unless you wantto pass.

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Thenuse your turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quicklyover your shoulder to make sure there is notanother vehicle in your blind spot.

Once you are moving on the freeway, makecertain you allow a reasonable following distance.Expect to move slightly slower at night.

369

When you want to leave the freeway, move to theproper lane well in advance. If you miss yourexit, do not, under any circumstances, stop andback up. Drive on to the next exit.

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quitesharply. The exit speed is usually posted.

Reduce your speed according to yourspeedometer, not to your sense of motion. Afterdriving for any distance at higher speeds, you maytend to think you are going slower than youactually are.

Before Leaving on a Long TripMake sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. Ifyou must start when you are not fresh — suchas after a day’s work — do not plan to make toomany miles that first part of the journey. Wearcomfortable clothing and shoes you can easilydrive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep itserviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If itneeds service, have it done before starting out.

Of course, you will find experienced and ableservice experts in GM dealerships all across NorthAmerica. They will be ready and willing to helpif you need it.

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoirfull? Are all windows clean inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have youchecked all levels?

• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lensesclean?

• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enoughfor long-distance driving? Are the tiresall inflated to the recommended pressure?

• Weather Forecasts: What is the weatheroutlook along your route? Should youdelay your trip a short time to avoid a majorstorm system?

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

370

Highway HypnosisIs there actually such a condition as highwayhypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at thewheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack ofawareness, or whatever.

There is something about an easy stretch of roadwith the same scenery, along with the hum ofthe tires on the road, the drone of the engine, andthe rush of the wind against the vehicle thatcan make you sleepy. Do not let it happen to you!If it does, your vehicle can leave the road inless than a second, and you could crash and beinjured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis? First,be aware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:

• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, witha comfortably cool interior.

• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road aheadand to the sides. Check your mirrors and yourinstruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,service, or parking area and take a nap, getsome exercise, or both. For safety, treatdrowsiness on the highway as an emergency.

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is differentfrom driving in flat or rolling terrain.

371

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you areplanning to visit there, here are some tips thatcan make your trips safer and more enjoyable.

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Checkall fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,cooling system, and transaxle. These partscan work hard on mountain roads.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, your brakescould get so hot that they would not workwell. You would then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let your engine assistyour brakes on a steep downhill slope.

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or withthe ignition off is dangerous. Your brakeswill have to do all the work of slowingdown. They could get so hot that theywould not work well. You would then havepoor braking or even none going down ahill. You could crash. Always have yourengine running and your vehicle in gearwhen you go downhill.

• Know how to go down hills. The most importantthing to know is this: let your engine do some ofthe slowing down. Shift to a lower gear whenyou go down a steep or long hill.

• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shiftdown to a lower gear. The lower gears helpcool your engine and transaxle, and you canclimb the hill better.

372

• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-laneroads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wideor cut across the center of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in your own lane.

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. Therecould be something in your lane, like a stalledcar or an accident.

• You may see highway signs on mountains thatwarn of special problems. Examples are longgrades, passing or no-passing zones, a fallingrocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to theseand take appropriate action.

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

• You may want to put winter emergencysupplies in your vehicle.

Also see Tires on page 449.

373

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, asupply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, somewinter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, ared cloth, and a couple of reflective warningtriangles. And, if you will be driving under severeconditions, include a small bag of sand, apiece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags tohelp provide traction. Be sure you properlysecure these items in your vehicle.

Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where the tiresmeet the road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between the tiresand the road, you can have a very slipperysituation. You will have a lot less traction, or grip,and will need to be very careful. What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold

snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.But wet ice can be even more trouble because itmay offer the least traction of all. You can getwet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), andfreezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid drivingon wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.

Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.

374

Traction control improves your ability to acceleratewhen driving on a slippery road. But you canturn the traction system off if you ever need to.You should turn the traction system off if yourvehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice,or Snow on page 377. Even though your vehiclehas a traction system, you will want to slowdown and adjust your driving to the roadconditions. Under certain conditions, you maywant to turn the traction system off, such as whendriving through deep snow and loose gravel, tohelp maintain vehicle motion at lower speeds. SeeTraction Control System (TCS) on page 353and StabiliTrak® System on page 355.

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) improves yourvehicle’s stability when you make a hard stopon a slippery road. Even though you have ABS,you will want to begin stopping sooner thanyou would on dry pavement. See Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS) on page 351.

• Allow greater following distance on anyslippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might befine until you hit a spot that is covered withice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patches

may appear in shaded areas where the suncannot reach, such as around clumps of trees,behind buildings, or under bridges. Sometimesthe surface of a curve or an overpass mayremain icy when the surrounding roadsare clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead ofyou, brake before you are on it. Try notto brake while you are actually on the ice, andavoid sudden steering maneuvers.

If You Are Caught in a BlizzardIf you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be ina serious situation. You should probably staywith your vehicle unless you know for sure that youare near help and you can hike through thesnow. Here are some things to do to summonhelp and keep yourself and your passengers safe:• Turn on your hazard flashers.• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police

that you have been stopped by the snow.• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around

you. If you do not have blankets or extraclothing, make body insulators fromnewspapers, burlap bags, rags, floormats — anything you can wrap around yourselfor tuck under your clothing to keep warm.

375

You can run the engine to keep warm, but becareful.

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under yourvehicle. This can cause deadly CO(carbon monoxide) gas to get inside. COcould overcome you and kill you. Youcannot see it or smell it, so you might notknow it is in your vehicle. Clear awaysnow from around the base of yourvehicle, especially any that is blockingyour exhaust pipe. And check aroundagain from time to time to be sure snowdoes not collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side ofthe vehicle that is away from the wind.This will help keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must. Thissaves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go alittle faster than just idle. That is, push theaccelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for theheat that you get and it keeps the battery charged.

376

You will need a well-charged battery to restart thevehicle, and possibly for signaling later on withyour headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.

Then, shut the engine off and close the windowalmost all the way to preserve the heat. Startthe engine again and repeat this only when youfeel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it aslittle as possible. Preserve the fuel as long asyou can. To help keep warm, you can get out ofthe vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercisesevery half hour or so until help comes.

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or SnowIn order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, youwill need to spin the wheels, but you do notwant to spin your wheels too fast. The methodknown as rocking can help you get out when youare stuck, but you must use caution.

{CAUTION:

If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and you orothers could be injured. And, thetransaxle or other parts of the vehicle canoverheat. That could cause an enginecompartment fire or other damage. Whenyou are stuck, spin the wheels as little aspossible. Do not spin the wheels above35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on thespeedometer.

Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroy partsof your vehicle as well as the tires. If youspin the wheels too fast while shiftingthe transaxle back and forth, you can destroythe transaxle. See Rocking Your Vehicle toGet It Out on page 378.

For information about using tire chains on yourvehicle, see Tire Chains on page 467.

377

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It OutFirst, turn the steering wheel left and right.That will clear the area around the front wheels.Turn the traction system off. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 353 andStabiliTrak® System on page 355. Then shift backand forth between REVERSE (R) and a forwardgear, spinning the wheels as little as possible.Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, andpress lightly on the accelerator pedal when thetransaxle is in gear. By slowly spinning the wheelsin the forward and reverse directions, you willcause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle.If that does not get your vehicle out after a fewtries, it may need to be towed out. If your vehicledoes need to be towed out, see Towing YourVehicle on page 384.

Loading Your VehicleIt is very important to know how much weight yourvehicle can carry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight and includes the weight ofall occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installedoptions. Two labels on your vehicle show howmuch weight it may properly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label and the Certification/Tirelabel.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

378

Tire and Loading Information Label

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar) of yourvehicle. With the driver’s door open, you will find thelabel attached below the door lock post (striker).The tire and loading information label shows thenumber of occupant seating positions (A), and themaximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilogramsand pounds.

The Tire and Loading Information label also showsthe size of the original equipment tires (C) andthe recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).For more information on tires and inflation seeTires on page 449 and Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 456.

There is also important loading information on thevehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you theGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) andthe Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for thefront and rear axle. See “Certification/Tire Label”later in this section.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on yourvehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driverand passengers that will be riding in yourvehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

Example Label

379

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity calculated inStep 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo and luggageload capacity for your vehicle.

See Towing a Trailer on page 386 for importantinformation on towing a trailer, towing safety rules,and trailering tips.

Item Description Total

A Vehicle Capacity Weightfor Example 1 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

BSubtract OccupantWeight 150 lbs(68 kg) × 2 =

300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg)

Example 1

380




750 lbs (340 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 250 lbs (113 kg)




1,000 lbs (453 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 0 lbs (0 kg)

Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading informationlabel for specific information about your vehicle’scapacity weight and seating positions. Thecombined weight of the driver, passengers, andcargo should never exceed your vehicle’s capacityweight.

Example 2 Example 3

381

Certification/Tire Label

A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label isattached to the rear edge of the driver’s door.

The label shows the gross weight capacity of yourvehicle. This is called the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight ofthe vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo.

The Certification/Tire label also tells you themaximum weights for the front and rear axles,called the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Tofind out the actual loads on your front and rearaxles, you need to go to a weigh station and weighyour vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this.Be sure to spread out your load equally onboth sides of the centerline.

Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or theGAWR for either the front or rear axle.

382

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

If you put things inside your vehicle — likesuitcases, tools, packages, or anything else, theywill go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you haveto stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, theywill keep going.

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle canstrike and injure people in a sudden stopor turn, or in a crash.

• Put things in the cargo area of yourvehicle. Try to spread the weightevenly.

• Never stack heavier things, likesuitcases, inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are above the tops ofthe seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

• Do not leave a seat folded downunless you need to.

383

Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your dealer or a professional towingservice if you need to have your disabled vehicletowed. See Roadside Assistance Program onpage 532.

If you want to tow your vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes (such as behinda motorhome), see “Recreational VehicleTowing” following.

Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing means towing yourvehicle behind another vehicle – such as behind amotorhome. The two most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing are known as “dinghytowing” (towing your vehicle with all four wheelson the ground) and “dolly towing” (towingyour vehicle with two wheels on the ground andtwo wheels up on a device know as a “dolly”).

With the proper preparation and equipment, manyvehicles can be towed in these ways. See“Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.

Here are some important things to consider beforeyou do recreational vehicle towing:

• What’s the towing capacity of the towingvehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehiclemanufacturer’s recommendations.

• How far will you tow? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and how long theycan tow.

• Do you have the proper towing equipment?See your dealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice and equipmentrecommendations.

• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just asyou would prepare your vehicle for a longtrip, you’ll want to make sure your vehicle isprepared to be towed. See Before Leaving ona Long Trip on page 370.

384

Dinghy TowingYour vehicle was not designed to be towed withall of its wheels on the ground. It can be towedwith the two rear wheels on the ground. See “DollyTowing” following for more information.

Dolly TowingTo dolly tow your vehicle, do the following:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).

3. Set the parking brake and then removethe key.

4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-aheadposition with a clamping device designed fortowing.

5. Release the parking brake.

Level ControlWith this feature, the rear of the vehicle isautomatically kept level as you load or unloadyour vehicle. However, you should still not exceedthe GVWR or the GAWR. See Loading YourVehicle on page 378.

You may hear the compressor operating when youload or unload your vehicle, and periodically asthe system self-adjusts. This is normal. Thecompressor should operate for brief periods oftime. If the sound continues for an extended periodof time, your vehicle needs service.

Using heavier suspension components to getadded durability might not change your weightratings. Ask your dealer to help you loadyour vehicle the right way.

385

Towing a Trailer

{CAUTION:

If you do not use the correct equipmentand drive properly, you can lose controlwhen you pull a trailer. For example, if thetrailer is too heavy, the brakes may notwork well — or even at all. You and yourpassengers could be seriously injured.Pull a trailer only if you have followed allthe steps in this section. Ask your dealerfor advice and information about towing atrailer with your vehicle.

Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly candamage your vehicle and result in costlyrepairs that would not be covered by yourwarranty. Always follow the instructions in thissection and check with your dealer for moreinformation about towing a trailer withyour vehicle.

Your vehicle can tow a trailer. To identify thetrailering capacity of your vehicle, you should readthe information in “Weight of the Trailer” thatappears later in this section. Trailering is differentthan just driving your vehicle by itself. Traileringmeans changes in handling, acceleration, braking,durability, and fuel economy. Successful, safetrailering takes correct equipment, and it has to beused properly.

That is the reason for this section. In it are manytime-tested, important trailering tips and safetyrules. Many of these are important for your safetyand that of your passengers. So please readthis section carefully before you pull a trailer.

Load-pulling components such as the engine,transaxle, wheel assemblies, and tires are forcedto work harder against the drag of the addedweight. The engine is required to operateat relatively higher speeds and under greaterloads, generating extra heat. The trailer also addsconsiderably to wind resistance, increasing thepulling requirements.

386

If You Do Decide To Pull A TrailerIf you do, here are some important points:

• There are many different laws, including speedlimit restrictions, having to do with trailering.Make sure your rig will be legal, not only whereyou live but also where you’ll be driving. Agood source for this information can be stateor provincial police.

• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches”later in this section.

• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first500 miles (800 km) your new vehicle is driven.Your engine, axle, or other parts could bedamaged.

• During the first 500 miles (800 km) that youtow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph(80 km/h) and do not make starts at fullthrottle. This helps your engine and other partsof your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

• You can use THIRD (3) or, as you need to, alower gear when towing a trailer. Operatingyour vehicle in THIRD (3) when towing a trailerwill minimize heat buildup and extend thelife of your transaxle.

Three important considerations have to do withweight:• Weight of the trailer• Weight of the trailer tongue• Weight on your vehicle’s tires

Weight of the TrailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be?

It depends on how you plan to use your rig. Forexample, speed, altitude, road grades, outsidetemperature, and how much your vehicle is usedto pull a trailer are all important. It can alsodepend on any special equipment that you haveon your vehicle, and the amount of tongueweight the vehicle can carry. See “Weight of theTrailer Tongue” later in this section for moreinformation.

Maximum trailer weight is calculated assumingonly the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has allthe required trailering equipment. The weightof additional optional equipment, passengers andcargo must be subtracted from the maximumtrailer weight.

387

Look in the following chart to find the maximum trailer weight for your vehicle.

Vehicle Axle RatioMaximum Trailer

Weight *GCWRTwo-Wheel-Drive 3.29 3,500 lbs (1 588 kg) 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg)Any vehicle without the V92 trailering package or heavy-duty cooling package is limited to a 2,000 lb (907 kg) trailerrating and a 7,000 lb (3 175 kg) GCWR.*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle andtrailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversion. The GCWR for your vehicle should not beexceeded.

You can ask your dealer for our traileringinformation or advice, or you can contact theCustomer Assistance Center. See CustomerAssistance Offices on page 530 for moreinformation.

In Canada, write to:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Center, 163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Weight of the Trailer TongueThe tongue load (A) of any trailer is an importantweight to measure because it affects the totalor gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross VehicleWeight (GVW) includes the curb weight of thevehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, andthe people who will be riding in the vehicle. If youhave a lot of options, equipment, passengers,or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the tongueweight your vehicle can carry, which will alsoreduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow. Andif you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongueload to the GVW because your vehicle will becarrying that weight, too. See Loading YourVehicle on page 378 for more information aboutyour vehicle’s maximum load capacity.

388

If you are using a weight-carrying or aweight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongueweight (A) should be 10 percent to 15 percent ofthe total loaded trailer weight (B). Do not exceedthe maximum allowable tongue weight of 350 lbs(159 kg) for your vehicle.

After you have loaded your trailer, weigh the trailerand then the tongue, separately, to see if theweights are proper. If they are not, you may be ableto get them right simply by moving some itemsaround in the trailer.

Trailering may be limited by the vehicle’s ability tocarry tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot causethe vehicle to exceed the GVWR (Gross VehicleWeight Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear Gross AxleWeight Rating).

The effect of additional weight may reduce yourtrailering capacity more than the total of theadditional weight.

Consider the following example:A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs(2 495 kg); 2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front axleand 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg) at the rear axle. It has aGVWR of 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg), a RGAWR of4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and a GCWR (GrossCombination Weight Rating) of 14,000 lbs(6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be:

You can expect tongue weight to be at least10 percent of trailer weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) andbecause the weight is applied well behind therear axle, the effect on the rear axle will be greaterthan just the weight itself, as much as 1.5 timesas much.

389

The weight at the rear axle could be 850 lbs(386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs (578 kg). Since the rearaxle already weighs 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg), adding1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the total to 3,975 lbs(1 803 kg). This is very close to, but within the limitfor RGAWR as well. The vehicle is set to trailerup to 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg).

But let’s say your specific vehicle is equipped withsome of the latest options and you have a frontseat passenger and two rear seat passengers withsome luggage and gear in the vehicle as well.You may add 300 lbs (136 kg) to the frontaxle weight and 400 lbs (181 kg) to the rear axleweight. Your vehicle now weighs:

Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and youmay think that you should subtract 700 additionalpounds (318 kg) from your trailering capacityto stay within GCWR limits.

Your maximum trailer would only be 7,800 lbs(3 538 kg). You may go further and think you mustlimit tongue weight to less than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)to avoid exceeding GVWR. But, you must stillconsider the effect on the rear axle. Because yourrear axle now weighs 3,100 lbs (1 406 kg), you canonly put 900 lbs (408 kg) on the rear axle withoutexceeding RGAWR. The effect of tongue weight isabout 1.5 times the actual weight. Dividing the900 lbs (408 kg) by 1.5 leaves you with being ableto handle only 600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue weight.Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent oftotal loaded trailer weight, you can expect that thelargest trailer your vehicle can properly handle is6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).

It is important that you make sure your vehicledoes not exceed any of its ratings — GCWR,GVWR, RGAWR, Maximum Trailer Ratingor Tongue Weight. The only way to be sure youare not exceeding any of these ratings is to weighyour vehicle and trailer.

390

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s TiresBe sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to theupper limit for cold tires. You will find thesenumbers on the Certification/Tire label at the rearedge of the driver’s door or see Loading YourVehicle on page 378. Then be sure you do not goover the GVW limit for your vehicle, includingthe weight of the trailer tongue.

HitchesIt is important to have the correct hitch equipment.Crosswinds, large trucks going by, and roughroads are a few reasons why you will needthe right hitch. Here are some rules to follow:

• The bumpers on your vehicle are not intendedfor hitches. Do not attach rental hitches orother bumper-type hitches to them. Use only aframe-mounted hitch that does not attach tothe bumper.

• Will you have to make any holes in the bodyof your vehicle when you install a trailerhitch?

If you do, remember to seal the holes laterwhen you remove the hitch. If you do not sealthem, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) fromyour exhaust can get into your vehicle. SeeEngine Exhaust on page 141. Dirt andwater can, too.

Safety ChainsYou should always attach chains between yourvehicle and your trailer. Cross the safetychains under the tongue of the trailer to helpprevent the tongue from contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch. Instructionsabout safety chains may be provided by the hitchmanufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation forattaching safety chains and do not attach them tothe bumper. Always leave just enough slack soyou can turn with your rig. Never allow safetychains to drag on the ground.

391

Trailer BrakesIf your trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg)loaded, then it needs its own brakes – and theymust be adequate. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions for the trailer brakes so you will beable to install, adjust, and maintain them properly.

Because your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, do nottry to tap into your vehicle’s brake system. If you do,both brake systems will not work well, or at all.

Driving with a Trailer

{CAUTION:

If you have a rear-most window open andyou pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbonmonoxide (CO) could come into your



vehicle. You cannot see or smell CO. Itcan cause unconsciousness or death. SeeEngine Exhaust on page 141. To maximizeyour safety when towing a trailer:

• Have your exhaust system inspectedfor leaks, and make necessary repairsbefore starting on your trip.

• Keep the rear-most windows closed.• If exhaust does come into your vehicle

through a window in the rear oranother opening, drive with your front,main heating or cooling system onand with the fan on any speed. Thiswill bring fresh, outside air into yourvehicle. Do not use the climate controlsetting for maximum air because itonly recirculates the air inside yourvehicle. See Climate Control Systemon page 193 or Dual Climate ControlSystem on page 197.

392

Towing a trailer requires a certain amount ofexperience. Before setting out for the open road,you will want to get to know your rig. Acquaintyourself with the feel of handling and braking withthe added weight of the trailer. And alwayskeep in mind that the vehicle you are driving isnow a good deal longer and not nearly asresponsive as your vehicle is by itself.

Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts andattachments, safety chains, electrical connector,lamps, tires, and mirror adjustment. If thetrailer has electric brakes, start your vehicle andtrailer moving and then apply the trailer brakecontroller by hand to be sure the brakes areworking. This lets you check your electricalconnection at the same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be surethat the load is secure, and that the lamps and anytrailer brakes are still working.

Following DistanceStay at least twice as far behind the vehicle aheadas you would when driving your vehicle withouta trailer. This can help you avoid situationsthat require heavy braking and sudden turns.

PassingYou will need more passing distance up aheadwhen you are towing a trailer. And, becauseyou are a good deal longer, you will need to gomuch farther beyond the passed vehiclebefore you can return to your lane.

Backing UpHold the bottom of the steering wheel with onehand. Then, to move the trailer to the left,just move that hand to the left. To move the trailerto the right, move your hand to the right. Alwaysback up slowly and, if possible, have someoneguide you.

393

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turns whiletrailering could cause the trailer to come incontact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could bedamaged. Avoid making very sharp turnswhile trailering.

When you are turning with a trailer, make widerturns than normal. Do this so your trailer willnot strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees,or other objects. Avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers. Signal well in advance.

Turn Signals When Towing a TrailerWhen you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to haveextra wiring.

The arrows on your instrument panel will flashwhenever you signal a turn or lane change.Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will alsoflash, telling other drivers you are about to turn,change lanes, or stop.

When towing a trailer, the arrows on yourinstrument panel will flash for turns even if thebulbs on the trailer are burned out. Thus, you maythink drivers behind you are seeing your signalwhen they are not. It is important to checkoccasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.

Driving on GradesReduce speed and shift to a lower gear beforeyou start down a long or steep downgrade. If youdo not shift down, you might have to use yourbrakes so much that they would get hot andno longer work well.

If you are towing a trailer that weighs more than1,000 lbs (450 kg), you may prefer to drive inTHIRD (3) instead of DRIVE (D) or, as you needto, a lower gear. This will minimize heat build-upand extend the life of your transaxle.

394

Parking on Hills

{CAUTION:

You really should not park your vehicle,with a trailer attached, on a hill. Ifsomething goes wrong, your rig couldstart to move. People can be injured, andboth your vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged.

But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, dothe following:

1. Apply your regular brakes, but do not shift intoPARK (P).

2. Have someone place chocks under the trailerwheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are in place, releasethe regular brakes until the chocks absorbthe load.

4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply yourparking brake, and shift into PARK (P).

5. Release the regular brakes.

When You Are Ready to Leave AfterParking on a Hill1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal

down while you do the following:

• Start your engine.

• Shift into a gear.

• Release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of thechocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up and store thechocks.

395

Maintenance When Trailer TowingYour vehicle will need service more often whenyou are pulling a trailer. See the MaintenanceSchedule for more on this. Things that areespecially important in trailer operation areautomatic transaxle fluid, engine oil, belts, coolingsystem, and brake system. Each of these iscovered in this manual, and the Index will helpyou find them quickly. If you are trailering, it is agood idea to review these sections before youstart your trip.

Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts andbolts are tight.

Trailer Wiring HarnessYour vehicle may have a trailer wiring harnesspackage located in the glove box. It can beconnected from the rear of your vehicle to yourtrailer. Contact your dealer for more information.

396

Service ........................................................ 400Accessories and Modifications ................... 400California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 401Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 401Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your

Vehicle ................................................... 402Fuel ............................................................. 402

Gasoline Octane ........................................ 402Gasoline Specifications .............................. 402California Fuel ........................................... 403Additives ................................................... 403Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 404Filling the Tank ......................................... 405Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 407

Checking Things Underthe Hood .................................................. 408Hood Release ........................................... 409Engine Compartment Overview .................. 410Engine Oil ................................................. 411Engine Oil Life System .............................. 414Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ............................ 416

Automatic Transaxle Fluid ......................... 417Engine Coolant .......................................... 420Radiator Pressure Cap .............................. 423Engine Overheating ................................... 423Overheated Engine Protection

Operating Mode ..................................... 425Cooling System ......................................... 426Power Steering Fluid ................................. 432Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 433Brakes ...................................................... 434Battery ...................................................... 437Jump Starting ............................................ 438

Bulb Replacement ....................................... 443Halogen Bulbs ........................................... 443Headlamps and Sidemarker Lamps ........... 443Front Turn Signal, Parking and Daytime

Running Lamps (DRL) ........................... 445Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and

Back-up Lamps ...................................... 445License Plate Lamp ................................... 447Replacement Bulbs ................................... 447

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

397

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 447Tires ............................................................ 449

Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 450Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 453Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 456High-Speed Operation ............................... 458Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 459When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 461Buying New Tires ...................................... 461Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 463Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 464Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 465Wheel Replacement .................................. 465Tire Chains ............................................... 467Accessory Inflator ...................................... 468If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 470Changing a Flat Tire ................................. 470Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .......... 472Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the

Spare Tire ............................................. 474Secondary Latch System ........................... 481Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ...... 483Compact Spare Tire .................................. 486

Appearance Care ........................................ 487Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 487Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 488Leather ...................................................... 489Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic

Surfaces ................................................ 490Care of Safety Belts .................................. 490Weatherstrips ............................................ 490Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 491Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 491Finish Care ............................................... 491Windshield, Backglass, and

Wiper Blades ......................................... 492Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ......... 492Tires ......................................................... 493Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 493Finish Damage .......................................... 494Underbody Maintenance ............................ 494Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 494Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............ 495

Vehicle Identification .................................. 496Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 496Service Parts Identification Label ............... 496


398

Electrical System ........................................ 496Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 496Headlamp Wiring ....................................... 497Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................ 497Power Windows and Other Power

Options .................................................. 497

Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 497Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..................... 498Underhood Fuse Block .............................. 500

Capacities and Specifications .................... 503


399

ServiceYour dealer knows your vehicle best and wantsyou to be happy with it. We hope you will goto your dealer for all your service needs. You willget genuine GM parts and GM-trained andsupported service people.

We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicleall GM. Genuine GM parts have one of thesemarks:

Accessories and ModificationsWhen you add non-GM accessories to your vehiclethey can affect your vehicle’s performance andsafety, including such things as, airbags, braking,stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systemslike anti-lock brakes, traction control andstability control. Some of these accessories mayeven cause malfunction or damage not covered bywarranty.

GM Accessories are designed to complement andfunction with other systems on your vehicle.Your GM dealer can accessorize your vehicleusing genuine GM Accessories. When you go toyour GM dealer and ask for GM Accessories,you will know that GM-trained and supportedservice technicians will perform the work usinggenuine GM Accessories.

400

California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one, containand/or emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engine exhaust,many parts and systems (including some insidethe vehicle), many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/or emit thesechemicals.

Doing Your Own Service Work

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle couldbe damaged if you try to do service workon a vehicle without knowing enoughabout it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacementparts, and tools before you attempt anyvehicle maintenance task.

• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,and other fasteners. English and metricfasteners can be easily confused. If youuse the wrong fasteners, parts can laterbreak or fall off. You could be hurt.

If you want to do some of your own service work,you will want to use the proper service manual.It tells you much more about how to service yourvehicle than this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 544.

401

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to do your own service work, seeServicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 91.

You should keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date of any servicework you perform. See Maintenance Recordon page 522.

Adding Equipment to the Outside ofYour VehicleThings you might add to the outside of yourvehicle can affect the airflow around it. This maycause wind noise and affect windshield washerperformance. Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an important partof the proper maintenance of your vehicle. Tohelp keep your engine clean and maintain optimumvehicle performance, GM recommends the useof gasoline advertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Gasoline OctaneUse regular unleaded gasoline with a postedoctane rating of 87 or higher. If the octane ratingis less than 87, you may notice an audibleknocking noise when you drive, commonly referredto as spark knock. If this occurs, use a gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible. Ifyou are using gasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher and you hear heavy knocking, your engineneeds service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTMspecification D 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines maycontain an octane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT). General Motors recommends against theuse of gasolines containing MMT. See Additiveson page 403 for additional information.

402

California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meet CaliforniaEmissions Standards, it is designed to operate onfuels that meet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission control label. If this fuel isnot available in states adopting Californiaemissions standards, your vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meeting federalspecifications, but emission control systemperformance may be affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle mayfail a smog-check test. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 217. If this occurs, return toyour authorized GM dealer for diagnosis. If it isdetermined that the condition is caused by the typeof fuel used, repairs may not be covered byyour warranty.

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the UnitedStates are now required to contain additivesthat will help prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing your emissioncontrol system to work properly. In most cases,you should not have to add anything to your fuel.However, some gasolines contain only theminimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agency regulations.To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean,or if your vehicle experiences problems due todirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that isadvertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also,your GM dealer has additives that will helpcorrect and prevent most deposit-related problems.

403

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethersand ethanol, and reformulated gasolines maybe available in your area. General Motorsrecommends that you use these gasolines if theycomply with the specifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuelscontaining more than 10% ethanol must not beused in vehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed forfuel that contains methanol. Do not usefuel containing methanol. It can corrode metalparts in your fuel system and also damagethe plastic and rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under your warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions may contain an octane-enhancingadditive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where youbuy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.

General Motors recommends against the use ofsuch gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reducethe life of spark plugs and the performance ofthe emission control system may be affected. Themalfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If thisoccurs, return to your authorized GM dealerfor service.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outsidethe United States or Canada, the proper fuel maybe hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline orany other fuel not recommended in the previoustext on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use ofimproper fuel would not be covered by yourwarranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does businessin the country where you will be driving.

404

Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel firecan cause bad injuries. To help avoidinjuries to you and others, read and followall the instructions on the pump island.Turn off your engine when you arerefueling. Do not smoke if you are nearfuel or refueling your vehicle. Keepsparks, flames, and smoking materialsaway from fuel. Do not leave the fuelpump unattended when refueling yourvehicle. This is against the law in someplaces. Keep children away from the fuelpump; never let children pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hingedfuel door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

When the fuel door is opened on a vehicle withdual sliding doors, the driver’s side sliding door willonly open partway.

While refueling, let the fuel cap hang by the tether.

405

{CAUTION:

If you spill fuel and then somethingignites it, you could be badly burned. Fuelcan spray out on you if you open the fuelcap too quickly. This spray can happen ifyour tank is nearly full, and is more likelyin hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowlyand wait for any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfillthe tank and wait a few seconds after you havefinished pumping before removing the nozzle.Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soonas possible. See Washing Your Vehicle onpage 491.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise untilit clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed.The diagnostic system can determine if the fuelcap has been left off or improperly installed.This would allow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 217.

The CHECK GAS CAP message will be displayedin the Driver Information Center (DIC) if the fuelcap is not properly installed. See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 230 for more information.

406

{CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you are refueling, donot remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow offuel by shutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant. Leave thearea immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure toget the right type. Your dealer can get onefor you. If you get the wrong type, it may notfit properly. This may cause your malfunctionindicator lamp to light and may damageyour fuel tank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp on page 217.

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while itis in your vehicle. Static electricitydischarge from the container can ignite thegasoline vapor. You can be badly burnedand your vehicle damaged if this occurs.To help avoid injury to you and others:

• Dispense gasoline only into approvedcontainers.

• Do not fill a container while it is inside avehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickupbed, or on any surface other than theground.

• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with theinside of the fill opening beforeoperating the nozzle. Contact shouldbe maintained until the filling iscomplete.

• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.

407

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can start upand injure you even when the engine is notrunning. Keep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engineparts and start a fire. These includeliquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,windshield washer and other fluids, andplastic or rubber. You or others could beburned. Be careful not to drop or spillthings that will burn onto a hot engine.

408

Hood ReleaseTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the hoodrelease handle withthis symbol on it.It is locatedunder the instrumentpanel on thedriver’s side.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle and push theunderhood release to the right. It is locatednear the center of the hood, above the grille.

3. Lift the hood.

4. Pull up on the hood prop to release it from itsstorage clip.The hood prop may be hot due to increasedengine temperatures under the hood, sobe careful when handling it. Use your hoodprop sleeve when handling the hood prop.

5. Put the end of the hood prop into the slot inthe underside of the hood, on the driver’sside of the vehicle. It is marked by an arrow.

Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler capsare on properly. Lift the hood to relieve pressure onthe hood prop. Remove the hood prop from the slotin the hood and return the prop to its retainer. Thenlet the hood down and close it firmly.

409

Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood on the 3.9L V6 engine, here is what you will see:

410

A. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood FuseBlock on page 500.

B. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See JumpStarting on page 438.

C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 433.

D. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Radiator PressureCap on page 423.

E. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See PowerSteering Fluid on page 432.

F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 411.

G. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 411.

H. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick. See“Checking the Fluid Level” under AutomaticTransaxle Fluid on page 417.

I. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “BrakeFluid” under Brakes on page 434.

J. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 416.

K. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See CoolingSystem on page 426.

Engine Oil

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check the engine oil every timeyou get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,the oil must be warm and the vehicle must beon level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 410for the location of the engine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give the oilseveral minutes to drain back into the oil pan.If you do not do this, the oil dipstick mightnot show the actual level.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a papertowel or cloth, then push it back in all theway. Remove it again, keeping the tip down,and check the level.

411

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at thetip of the dipstick, you will need to add at leastone quart/liter of oil. But you must use theright kind. This section explains what kind of oil touse. For engine oil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications on page 503.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the enginehas so much oil that the oil level gets abovethe cross-hatched area that shows theproper operating range, the engine could bedamaged.

See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 410 for thelocation of the engine oilfill cap.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operating range in thecross-hatched area. Push the dipstick all theway back in when you are through.

412

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

Look for two things:

• GM6094M

Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GMStandard GM6094M. You should look forand use only an oil that meets GM StandardGM6094M.

• SAE 5W-30

As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 isbest for your vehicle.These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.

Oils meeting theserequirements shouldalso have the starburstsymbol on thecontainer. This symbolindicates that the oilhas been certified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

You should look for this information on the oilcontainer, and use only those oils that areidentified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M andhave the starburst symbol on the front of the oilcontainer.

413

Notice: Use only engine oil identified asmeeting GM Standard GM6094M and showingthe American Petroleum Institute CertifiedFor Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failureto use the recommended oil can result inengine damage not covered by your warranty.

GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirementsfor your vehicle.

If you are in an area of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it isrecommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both willprovide easier cold starting and better protectionfor the engine at extremely low temperatures.

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to the oil. The recommendedoils with the starburst symbol meet GM StandardGM6094M are all you will need for goodperformance and engine protection.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine OilYour vehicle has a computer system that lets youknow when to change the engine oil and filter. Thisis based on engine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage. Based on drivingconditions, the mileage at which an oil change willbe indicated can vary considerably. For the oil lifesystem to work properly, you must reset the systemevery time the oil is changed.When the system has calculated that oil life hasbeen diminished, it will indicate that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE OIL SOON message willcome on. See DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 230. Change your oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possiblethat, if you are driving under the best conditions, theoil life system may not indicate that an oil change isnecessary for over a year. However, your engine oiland filter must be changed at least once a year andat this time the system must be reset. Your dealerhas GM-trained people who will perform this workusing genuine GM parts and reset the system. It isalso important to check your oil regularly and keepit at the proper level.

414

If the system is ever reset accidentally, you mustchange your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km)since your last oil change. Remember to reset theoil life system whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystemThe Engine Oil Life System calculates when tochange your engine oil and filter based on vehicleuse. Anytime your oil is changed, reset thesystem so it can calculate when the next oilchange is required. If a situation occurs where youchange your oil prior to a CHANGE OIL SOONmessage being turned on, reset the system.

1. With the ignition key in RUN but the engineoff, repeatedly push the set/reset button untilOIL is displayed on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

2. Once OIL is displayed, push and hold theset/reset button for five seconds. Thenumber will disappear and be replaced by 100(indicating 100% oil life remaining).

3. Turn the key to LOCK.

If the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes backon when you start your vehicle, the engine oillife system has not reset. Repeat the procedure.

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements thatmay be unhealthy for your skin and couldeven cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean your skin and nailswith soap and water, or a good hand cleaner.Wash or properly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See the manufacturer’swarnings about the use and disposal of oilproducts.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oilby putting it in the trash, pouring it on theground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies ofwater. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a placethat collects used oil. If you have a problemproperly disposing of your used oil, ask yourdealer, a service station, or a local recycling centerfor help.

415

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 410for the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterInspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance IIintervals and replace it at the first oil changeafter each 50,000 mile (85 000 km) interval.

See Scheduled Maintenance on page 509 formore information. If you are driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at each engine oilchange.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterTo inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filterfrom the vehicle and lightly shake the filter torelease loose dust and dirt. If the filter remainscaked with dirt, a new filter is required. Do not usecompressed air to clean the filter.

To inspect or replace the air cleaner/filter, do thefollowing:

1. Remove the two clamps on the duct.

2. Remove the duct.

3. Unlatch the two hooks on top of the engine aircleaner/filter housing.

4. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.

5. Align the tabs located on the bottom of thepanel with the slots at the bottom of thehousing.

416

6. Latch the hooks to secure the panel in place.If the panel moves easily, check that the tabsare seated correctly in the slots.

7. Put the duct back on and reinstall the clamps.

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you or othersto be burned. The air cleaner not onlycleans the air; it helps to stop flames ifthe engine backfires. If it is not there andthe engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with it off, and becareful working on the engine with the aircleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfirecan cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirtcan easily get into your engine, which willdamage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter inplace when you are driving.

Automatic Transaxle Fluid

When to Check and Change AutomaticTransaxle FluidA good time to check your automatic transaxlefluid level is when the engine oil is changed.

Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed inAdditional Required Services on page 512, andbe sure to use the transaxle fluid listed inRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 518.

417

How to Check Automatic TransaxleFluidBecause this operation can be a little difficult, youmay choose to have this done at the dealershipservice department.

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all theinstructions here, or you could get a false readingon the dipstick.

Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damagethe transaxle. Too much can mean that some ofthe fluid could come out and fall on hot engineor exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Toolittle fluid could cause the transaxle to overheat.Be sure to get an accurate reading if you checkthe transaxle fluid.

Wait at least 30 minutes before checking thetransaxle fluid level if you have been driving:

• When outside temperatures are above90°F (32°C).

• At high speed for quite a while.

• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.

• While pulling a trailer.

To get the right reading, the fluid should be atnormal operating temperature, which is 180°F to200°F (82°C to 93°C).

Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures areabove 50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C),you may have to drive longer.

Checking the Fluid LevelPrepare your vehicle as follows:

1. Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep theengine running.

2. With the parking brake applied, place the shiftlever in PARK (P).

3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move theshift lever through each gear range, pausingfor about three seconds in each range.Then, position the shift lever in PARK (P).

4. Let the engine run at idle for three tofive minutes.

418

Then, without shutting off the engine, follow thesesteps:

1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a cleanrag or paper towel.The automatic transaxle dipstick is locatedtoward the back of the engine compartment,near the brake master cylinder reservoir.The dipstick handle is a red loop. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 410 formore information on location.

2. Push it back in all the way, waitthree seconds, and then pull it back out again.

3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read thelower level. The fluid level must be in thecross-hatched area.

4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range,push the dipstick back in all the way.

How to Add Automatic Transaxle FluidRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of transaxle fluid to use. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 518.

If the fluid level is low, add only enough of theproper fluid to bring the level into thecross-hatched area on the dipstick.

1. Pull out the dipstick.

2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid atthe dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.It does not take much fluid, generally lessthan one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.

Notice: Use of the incorrect automatictransaxle fluid may damage your vehicle, andthe damages may not be covered by yourwarranty. Always use the automatic transaxlefluid listed in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 518.

3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level asdescribed under “How to Check AutomaticTransaxle Fluid,” earlier in this section.

4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, pushthe dipstick back in all the way.

419

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in your vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant isdesigned to remain in your vehicle for five years or150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occursfirst, if you add only DEX-COOL® extendedlife coolant.

The following explains your cooling system andhow to add coolant when it is low. If you havea problem with engine overheating, see EngineOverheating on page 423.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant will:

• Give freezing protection down to−34°F (−37°C).

• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).

• Protect against rust and corrosion.

• Help keep the proper engine temperature.

• Let the warning messages and gages work asthey should.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changing sooner, atthe first maintenance service after each30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

What Engine Coolant to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable waterand one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which willnot damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolantmixture, you do not need to add anything else.

420

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolantmixture, your engine could overheat and bebadly damaged. The repair cost would not becovered by your warranty. Too much waterin the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and other parts.

If you have to add coolant more than four times ayear, have your dealer check your coolingsystem.

Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/oradditives in your vehicle’s cooling system, youcould damage your vehicle. Use only theproper mixture of the engine coolant listed inthis manual for the cooling system. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 518 for more information.

421

Checking Coolant

The coolant recoverytank is located on thedriver’s side of thevehicle, abovethe engine aircleaner/filter. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 410for more informationon location.

The vehicle must be on a level surface. Whenyour engine is cold, the coolant level should be atthe full cold mark, or a little higher. When yourengine is warm, the level should be above the fullcold mark or a little higher. The full cold markis a line with an arrow pointing down at it, locatedon the front of the coolant recovery tank.

Adding CoolantIf you need more coolant, add the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the coolantrecovery tank, but be careful not to spill it.

{CAUTION:

Turning the radiator pressure cap when theengine and radiator are hot can allowsteam and scalding liquids to blow outand burn you badly. With the coolantrecovery tank, you will almost never haveto add coolant at the radiator. Never turnthe radiator pressure cap — even alittle — when the engine and radiatorare hot.

422

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol, and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

Occasionally check the coolant level in theradiator. For information on how to add coolant tothe radiator, see Cooling System on page 426.

Radiator Pressure Cap

Notice: The radiator cap on your vehicle is apressure-type cap and must be tightlyinstalled to prevent coolant loss and possibleengine damage from overheating. Be surethe cap is properly closed.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 410for more information on location.

Engine OverheatingYou will find an engine coolant temperature gageon your vehicle’s instrument panel. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gage on page 217.

Your vehicle may also have an ENGINECOOLANT HOT message displayed in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 230.

423

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine canburn you badly, even if you just open thehood. Stay away from the engine if yousee or hear steam coming from it. Turn itoff and get everyone away from thevehicle until it cools down. Wait untilthere is no sign of steam or coolantbefore you open the hood.

If you keep driving when the vehiclesengine is overheated, the liquids in it cancatch fire. You or others could be badlyburned. Stop your engine if it overheats,and get out of the vehicle until the engineis cool.

See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 425 forinformation on driving to a safe place inan emergency.

Notice: If your engine catches fire becauseyou keep driving with no coolant, your vehiclecan be badly damaged. The costly repairswould not be covered by your warranty. SeeOverheated Engine Protection Operating Modeon page 425 for information on driving to asafe place in an emergency.

If No Steam Is Coming From YourEngineIf you get an engine overheat warning but see orhear no steam, the problem may not be tooserious. Sometimes the engine can get a little toohot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

• Tow a trailer.

424

If you get the overheat warning with no sign ofsteam, try this for a minute or so:

1. If your air conditioner is on, turn it off.

2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highestfan speed and open the windows asnecessary.

3. If you are in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);otherwise, shift to the highest gear whiledriving — DRIVE (D) or THIRD (3).

If you no longer have the overheat warning, youcan drive. Just to be safe, drive slower forabout 10 minutes. If the warning does not comeback on, you can drive normally.

If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and parkyour vehicle right away.

If there is still no sign of steam, idle the engine forthree minutes while you are parked. If you stillhave the warning, turn off the engine andget everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down.Also, see “Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode” later in this section.

You may decide not to lift the hood but to getservice help right away.

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating ModeThis emergency operating mode allows yourvehicle to be driven to a safe place in anemergency situation. If an overheated enginecondition exists, an overheat protection modewhich alternates firing groups of cylinders helpsprevent engine damage. In this mode, youwill notice a significant loss in power and engineperformance. The temperature gage willindicate an overheat condition exists. Drivingextended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in theoverheat protection mode should be avoided.

Notice: After driving in the overheated engineprotection operating mode, to avoid enginedamage, allow the engine to cool beforeattempting any repair. The engine oil will beseverely degraded. Repair the cause of coolantloss, change the oil and reset the oil lifesystem. See Engine Oil on page 411.

425

Cooling SystemWhen you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here iswhat you will see:

A. Radiator Pressure CapB. Electric Engine Cooling FansC. Engine Coolant Recovery TankD. Recovery tank FULL COLD mark

{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under thehood can start up even when the engineis not running and can injure you. Keephands, clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank isboiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.

The coolant level should be at or above thefull cold mark. If it is not, you may have a leak atthe pressure cap or in the radiator hoses,heater hoses, radiator, water pump, or somewhereelse in the cooling system.

426

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and otherengine parts, can be very hot. Do nottouch them. If you do, you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is a leak. Ifyou run the engine, it could lose allcoolant. That could cause an engine fire,and you could be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,check to see if the electric engine cooling fansare running. If the engine is overheating, both fansshould be running. If they are not, your vehicleneeds service.

Notice: Engine damage from running yourengine without coolant is not covered by yourwarranty. See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 425 for information ondriving to a safe place in an emergency.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core orradiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changing sooner, at30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

427

How to Add Coolant to the CoolantRecovery TankIf you have not found a problem yet, but thecoolant level is not at or above the full cold mark,add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable waterand DEX-COOL® engine coolant at the coolantrecovery tank. See Engine Coolant on page 420for more information.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze andcrack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts. Use the recommended coolant andthe proper coolant mixture.

428

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank isat or above the full cold mark, start your vehicle.

If the overheat warning continues, there is onemore thing you can try. You can add the propercoolant mixture directly to the radiator, but be surethe cooling system is cool before you do it.

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hotcooling system can blow out and burnyou badly. They are under pressure, and ifyou turn the radiator pressure cap — evena little — they can come out at highspeed. Never turn the cap when thecooling system, including the radiatorpressure cap, is hot. Wait for the coolingsystem and radiator pressure cap to coolif you ever have to turn the pressure cap.

429

How to Add Coolant to the Radiator

Notice: Your engine has a specific radiator fillprocedure. Failure to follow this procedurecould cause your engine to overheat andbe severely damaged.

1. You can remove theradiator pressurecap when thecooling system,including the radiatorpressure cap andupper radiator hose,is no longer hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise.If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hissmeans there is still some pressure left, closethe cap and wait for the system to cool down.

2. Keep turning the pressure cap. Remove thepressure cap.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture, up to the base of the fillerneck. See Engine Coolant on page 420for more information about the proper coolantmixture.

4. Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from theengine and the compartment.

430

5. Start the engine and let it run until you canfeel the upper radiator hose getting hot.Watch out for the engine cooling fans.

6. By this time, the coolant level inside theradiator filler neck may be lower. If the level islower, add more of the proper DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture through the filler neck until thelevel reaches the base of the filler neck.

7. Then replace the pressure cap. At any timeduring this procedure if coolant begins to flowout of the filler neck, reinstall the pressurecap. Be sure the pressure cap is closedproperly.

8. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the fullcold mark.

9. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank.

Filling the Coolant Recovery Tank

431

Power Steering Fluid

The power steering fluidreservoir is locatedtoward the rear of theengine compartment onthe passenger’s sideof the vehicle. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 410for reservoir location.

When to Check Power Steering FluidIt is not necessary to regularly check powersteering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak inthe system or you hear an unusual noise. Afluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.Have the system inspected and repaired.

How to Check Power Steering FluidTo check the power steering fluid, do the following:

1. Turn the key off and let the enginecompartment cool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoirclean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with aclean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.

5. Remove the cap again and look at thefluid level on the dipstick.

The fluid level should be somewhere within thecross-hatched area on the dipstick. If the fluid is atthe ADD mark, you should add fluid.

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use, seeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 518.Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use theproper fluid can cause leaks and damage hosesand seals.

432

Windshield Washer Fluid

What Washer Fluid to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sureto read the manufacturer’s instructions beforeuse. If you will be operating your vehicle in an areawhere the temperature may fall below freezing,use a fluid that has sufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it.Add washer fluiduntil the tank is full. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 410for reservoir location.

Notice:• When using concentrated washer fluid,

follow the manufacturer’s instructionsfor adding water.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washerfluid. Water can cause the solution tofreeze and damage your washer fluid tankand other parts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean as wellas washer fluid.

• Fill your washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it is very cold.This allows for expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damage the tank if itis completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) inyour windshield washer. It can damageyour washer system and paint.

433

Brakes

Brake Fluid

Your brake mastercylinder reservoir isfilled with DOT-3 brakefluid. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 410 for thelocation of the reservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluidlevel in the reservoir might go down. The firstis that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptablelevel during normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are put in, the fluid level goes backup. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out ofthe brake system. If it is, you should have yourbrake system fixed, since a leak means thatsooner or later your brakes will not work well, orwill not work at all.

So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If youadd fluid when your linings are worn, then you willhave too much fluid when you get new brakelinings. You should add or remove brake fluid, asnecessary, only when work is done on thebrake hydraulic system.

{CAUTION:

If you have too much brake fluid, it canspill on the engine. The fluid will burn ifthe engine is hot enough. You or otherscould be burned, and your vehicle couldbe damaged. Add brake fluid only whenwork is done on the brake hydraulicsystem.

When your brake fluid falls to a low level, yourbrake warning light will come on. See BrakeSystem Warning Light on page 214.

434

What to AddWhen you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealedcontainer only. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 518.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and thearea around the cap before removing it. Thiswill help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in your brakesystem, your brakes may not work well, orthey may not even work at all. This couldcause a crash. Always use the properbrake fluid.

Notice:• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage

brake system parts. For example, just afew drops of mineral-based oil, suchas engine oil, in your brake system candamage brake system parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced. Do notlet someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’spainted surfaces, the paint finish canbe damaged. Be careful not to spill brakefluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash itoff immediately. See Washing Your Vehicleon page 491.

435

Brake WearYour vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators thatmake a high-pitched warning sound when thebrake pads are worn and new pads are needed.The sound may come and go or be heard allthe time your vehicle is moving, except when youare pushing on the brake pedal firmly.

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means thatsoon your brakes will not work well. Thatcould lead to an accident. When you hearthe brake wear warning sound, have yourvehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates may cause abrake squeal when the brakes are first appliedor lightly applied. This does not mean somethingis wrong with your brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tightenwheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM torquespecifications.

Brake linings should always be replaced ascomplete axle sets.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer if the brake pedal does not returnto normal height, or if there is a rapid increasein pedal travel. This could be a sign of braketrouble.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time you apply the brakes, with or withoutthe vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.

436

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex. Itsmany parts have to be of top quality and work welltogether if the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. Your vehicle was designed and tested withtop-quality GM brake parts. When you replace partsof your braking system — for example, when yourbrake linings wear down and you need new onesput in — be sure you get new approved GMreplacement parts. If you do not, your brakes mayno longer work properly. For example, if someoneputs in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle,the balance between your front and rear brakes canchange — for the worse. The braking performanceyou have come to expect can change in many otherways if someone puts in the wrong replacementbrake parts.

BatteryYour vehicle has a maintenance free battery.When it is time for a new battery, get one that hasthe replacement number shown on the originalbattery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®

replacement battery.

Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm. Washhands after handling.

Vehicle StorageIf you are not going to drive your vehicle for25 days or more, remove the black, negative (−)cable from the battery. This will help keepyour battery from running down.

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you andgas that can explode. You can be badlyhurt if you are not careful. See JumpStarting on page 438 for tips on workingaround a battery without getting hurt.

437

Jump StartingIf your vehicle’s battery has run down, you maywant to use another vehicle and some jumpercables to start your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

On vehicles equipped with the optional powersliding door, a low-voltage battery or replacing abattery may cause the system to becomeinoperative. See Power Sliding Door (PSD) onpage 112 for more information.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can bedangerous because:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode or

ignite.• They contain enough electricity to

burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly,some or all of these things can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result incostly damage to your vehicle that wouldnot be covered by your warranty.

Trying to start your vehicle by pushing orpulling it will not work, and it could damageyour vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a12-volt battery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a12-volt system with a negative ground,both vehicles can be damaged. Only usevehicles with 12-volt systems with negativegrounds to jump start your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumpercables can reach, but be sure the vehicles arenot touching each other. If they are, it couldcause a ground connection you do notwant. You would not be able to start yourvehicle, and the bad grounding could damagethe electrical systems.

438

To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,set the parking brake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump start procedure. Putan automatic transaxle in PARK (P) ora manual transaxle in NEUTRAL before settingthe parking brake.

Notice: If you leave your radio or otheraccessories on during the jump startingprocedure, they could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Always turn off your radio and otheraccessories when jump starting your vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged intothe cigarette lighter or the accessory poweroutlet. Turn off the radio and all lamps that arenot needed. This will avoid sparks and helpsave both batteries. And it could savethe radio!

4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Findthe positive (+) and negative (−) terminallocations on each vehicle.You will not need to access your battery forjump starting. Your vehicle has a remotepositive (+) jump starting terminal forthat purpose.

The terminal is locatedunder the fuse blockcover. Removethe cover to access theremote positive (+)terminal.

See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 410 for more information on the locationof the remote positive (+) terminal. Youshould always use the remote positive (+)terminal instead of the positive (+) terminal onyour battery.

{CAUTION:

An electric fan can start up even when theengine is not running and can injure you.Keep hands, clothing and tools away fromany underhood electric fan.

439

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can causebattery gas to explode. People have beenhurt doing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if you need morelight.

Be sure the battery has enough water.You do not need to add water to thebattery installed in your new vehicle. Butif a battery has filler caps, be sure theright amount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of that first. If youdo not, explosive gas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that can burnyou. Do not get it on you. If youaccidentally get it in your eyes or on yourskin, flush the place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts caninjure you badly. Keep your hands awayfrom moving parts once the engine isrunning.

5. Check that the jumper cables do not haveloose or missing insulation. If they do, youcould get a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.Before you connect the cables, here are somebasic things you should know. Positive (+)will go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+)terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative (−)will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine partor to a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one. Do not connect positive (+) tonegative (−) or you will get a short thatwould damage the battery and maybe otherparts too. Do not connect the negative (−)cable to the negative (−) terminal on the deadbattery because this can cause sparks.

440

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal of the dead battery.Use a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connectit to the positive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable tothe negative (−) terminal of the good battery.Use a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.Do not let the other end touch anything untilthe next step. The other end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the dead battery. Itgoes to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part,or to a remote negative (−) terminal on thevehicle with the dead battery.

9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cableat least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the deadbattery, but not near engine parts that move.The electrical connection is just as good there,and the chance of sparks getting back to thebattery is much less.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good batteryand run the engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the deadbattery. If it will not start after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

441

Notice: If the jumper cables are connected orremoved in the wrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage the vehicle. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Alwaysconnect and remove the jumper cables in thecorrect order, making sure that the cables donot touch each other or other metal.

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or RemoteNegative (−) Terminal

B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminaland Remote Negative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cables from bothvehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from theother vehicle.

5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal coveror underhood fuse block cover to its originalposition.

Jumper Cable Removal

442

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacement bulbs, seeReplacement Bulbs on page 447.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in thissection, contact your dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and can burst if you drop orscratch the bulb. You or others could beinjured. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions on the bulb package.

Headlamps and Sidemarker Lamps

A. High-beam HeadlampB. Low-beam HeadlampC. Sidemarker Lamp

443

To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:

1. Open the hood. See Hood Release onpage 409 for more information.

2. Remove the headlamp retainer pin (A) byturning it towards the headlamp assemblyand pulling it straight out.

3. Remove the screw (B) from the top of theheadlamp assembly.

4. Pull the assembly away from the vehicle.

5. Disconnect the socket wiring harnessconnector from the headlamp assembly.

6. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise toremove from the assembly.

7. To replace a headlamp bulb, disconnect thebulb socket wiring harness and connect to thenew bulb socket.To replace a sidemarker bulb, pull the old bulbout and push a new bulb in.

8. Reinstall the bulb socket by inserting into thebulb assembly and turning it clockwise tosecure.

9. Reverse the steps to reinstall the headlampassembly.

444

Front Turn Signal, Parking andDaytime Running Lamps (DRL)

To replace one of these bulbs (A), do the following:

1. Follow the Steps 1 through 4 to remove theheadlamp assembly. See Headlamps andSidemarker Lamps on page 443 for moreinformation.

2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise toremove from the assembly.

3. Pull the old bulb out from the bulb socket.

4. Replace with a new bulb

5. Reinstall the bulb socket by inserting into thebulb assembly and turning it clockwise tosecure.

6. Reverse the steps to reinstall the headlampassembly.

Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplampsand Back-up LampsTo change a stoplamp/taillamp, turn signal orback-up lamp bulb, do the following:

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate on page 119for more information.

2. Remove thetwo screws from thetaillamp housingon the inboard side.

445

3. Pull out the taillamp housing.

4. Disconnect the wiring harness connector fromthe taillamp assembly.

A. Stoplamp/TaillampB. Turn Signal LampC. Back-up Lamp Bulb

5. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise toremove.

6. Replace the bulb by pulling the old bulb out ofthe socket and gently pushing in a new bulb.

7. Replace the bulb socket by insertingand turning clockwise to secure.

8. Reinstall the taillamp assembly by insertingthe outboard locating/retaining pins until thelamp is seated.

9. Secure with the inboard screws.

446

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs, do the following:1. Remove the two screws holding each of the

license plate lamps to the fascia.

2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp forwardthrough the fascia opening.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise andpull the bulb straight out of the socket.

4. Install the new bulb.

5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall thelicense plate lamp.

Replacement BulbsExterior Lamp Bulb Number

Back-up 3057KXFront Turn Signal, DRL andParking 3157NAK

High-Beam and Low-BeamHeadlamps H11

License Plate Lamp 168Sidemarker 194Stoplamp, Taillamp and TurnSignal 3057KX

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contactyour dealer.

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected forwear and cracking. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 509 for more information.

Replacement blades come in different types andare removed in different ways. For proper type andlength, see Normal Maintenance ReplacementParts on page 520.

447

To replace the windshield wiper blade assemblydo the following:

1. Lift the wiper arm and turn the blade until it isfacing away from the windshield.

2. Squeeze the tabs (B) on each side of thewiper blade assembly to remove the wiperarm (A) from the blade (C).

Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch thewindshield when no wiper blade is installedcould damage the windshield. Any damagethat occurs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not allow the wiper blade arm totouch the windshield.

3. Push the new wiper blade securely on thewiper arm until you hear the tabs on eachside of the wiper blade assembly clickinto place.

To replace the rear wiper blade, follow the stepslisted above.

448

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tiresmade by a leading tire manufacturer. If you everhave questions about your tire warranty and whereto obtain service, see your GM Warranty booklet fordetails. For additional information refer to the tiremanufacturer’s booklet included with your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Poorly maintained and improperly usedtires are dangerous.

• Overloading your vehicle’s tires cancause overheating as a result of toomuch friction. You could have anair-out and a serious accident. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 378.

• Underinflated tires pose the samedanger as overloaded tires. Theresulting accident could cause seriousinjury. Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommended pressure.



Tire pressure should be checked whenyour vehicle’s tires are cold. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 456.

• Overinflated tires are more likely to becut, punctured, or broken by a suddenimpact — such as when you hit apothole. Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. Ifthe tire’s tread is badly worn, or ifyour vehicle’s tires have beendamaged, replace them.

449

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire is molded into itssidewall. The examples below show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tiresidewall.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination ofletters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the “Tire Size”illustration later in this section for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): TheDepartment of Transportation (DOT) codeindicates that the tire is in compliance with theU.S. Department of Transportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following DOT (Department ofTransportation) code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although only one side may havethe date of manufacture.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

450

(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under thetread.

(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required to grade tiresbased on three performance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperature resistance. For moreinformation see Uniform Tire Quality Grading onpage 464.

(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact sparetire or temporary use tire has a tread life ofapproximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and shouldnot be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).The compact spare tire is for emergency use whena regular road tire has lost air and gone flat. Ifyour vehicle has a compact spare tire, seeCompact Spare Tire on page 486 and If a TireGoes Flat on page 470.

Compact Spare Tire Example

451

(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under thetread.

(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following the DOT (Department ofTransportation) code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although only one side may havethe date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire orcompact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressureand inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 456.

(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters andnumbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and service description. Theletter T as the first character in the tire size meansthe tire is for temporary use only.

(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

Tire SizeThe following illustration shows an example of atypical passenger vehicle tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United Statesversion of a metric tire sizing system. The letter Pas the first character in the tire size means apassenger vehicle tire engineered to standards setby the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicatesthe tire section width in millimeters from sidewallto sidewall.

452

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number thatindicates the tire height-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is60, as shown in item C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent ashigh as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used toindicate the type of ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial ply construction;the letter D means diagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter B means belted-biasply construction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel ininches.

(F) Service Description: These charactersrepresent the load range and speed rating of thetire. The load index represents the load carrycapacity a tire is certified to carry. The load indexcan range from 1 to 279. The speed rating isthe maximum speed a tire is certified to carry aload. Speed ratings range from A to Z.

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tirepressing outward on each square inch of thetire. Air pressure is expressed in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combinedweight of optional accessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories are, automatictransmission/transaxle, power steering, powerbrakes, power windows, power seats, andair conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s heightto its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that islocated between the plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or other reinforcingmaterials.

453

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrappedby steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the pliesare laid at alternate angles less than 90 degreesto the centerline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressurein a tire, measured in pounds per square inch(psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built upheat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 456.

Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motorvehicle with standard and optional equipmentincluding the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, andcoolant, but without passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewallof a tire signifying that the tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),an alphanumeric designator which can also identifythe tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 378.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for thefront axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 378.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for therear axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 378.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire, that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used onlight duty trucks and some multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assigned number ranging from1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carryingcapacity of a tire.

454

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum airpressure to which a cold tire may be inflated.The maximum air pressure is molded ontothe sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tireat the maximum permissible inflation pressurefor that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum ofcurb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacityweight, and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number ofoccupants a vehicle is designed to seat multipliedby 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicleon page 378.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seatingpositions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire that has a particular side thatfaces outward when mounted on a vehicle.The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,and/or model name molding that is higheror deeper than the same moldings on the othersidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used onpassenger cars and some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflationpressure as shown on the tire placard. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 456 and LoadingYour Vehicle on page 378.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which theply cords that extend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon whichthe tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the treadand the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assignedto a tire indicating the maximum speed atwhich a tire can operate.

455

Traction: The friction between the tire and theroad surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes intocontact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled wear bars, that show across the tread ofa tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of treadremains. See When It Is Time for New Tires onpage 461.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards): A tire information system thatprovides consumers with ratings for a tire’straction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading on page 464.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number ofdesignated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 378.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on anindividual tire due to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached toa vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weightand the original equipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure. See “Tire andLoading Information Label” under LoadingYour Vehicle on page 378.

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount of air pressure tooperate effectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you thatunder-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It isnot. If your tires do not have enough air(under-inflation), you can get the following:• Too much flexing

• Too much heat

• Tire overloading

• Premature or irregular wear

• Poor handling

• Reduced fuel economy

456

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),you can get the following:• Unusual wear

• Poor handling

• Rough ride

• Needless damage from road hazards

A Tire and Loading Information label is attached tothe vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar), below thedriver’s door latch. This label shows your vehicle’soriginal equipment tires and the correct inflationpressures for your tires when they are cold.The recommended cold tire inflation pressure,shown on the label, is the minimum amount of airpressure needed to support your vehicle’smaximum load carrying capacity.

For additional information regarding how muchweight your vehicle can carry, and an example ofthe tire and loading information label, seeLoading Your Vehicle on page 378. How you loadyour vehicle affects vehicle handling and ridecomfort, never load your vehicle with more weightthan it was designed to carry.

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more. Do notforget to check the compact spare tire, it should beat 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional informationregarding the compact spare tire, see CompactSpare Tire on page 486.

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to check tirepressure. You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply by looking at them. Radialtires may look properly inflated even when theyare under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflationpressure when the tires are cold. Cold means yourvehicle has been sitting for at least three hoursor driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement. If the cold tireinflation pressure matches the recommendedpressure on the Tire and Loading Informationlabel, no further adjustment is necessary. If theinflation pressure is low, add air until you reach therecommended amount.

457

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing onthe metal stem in the center of the tire valve.Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valvestems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirtand moisture.

High-Speed Operation

{CAUTION:

Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h)or higher, puts an additional strain on tires.Sustained high-speed driving causesexcessive heat build up and can cause



sudden tire failure. You could have acrash and you or others could be killed.Some high-speed rated tires requireinflation pressure adjustment for highspeed operation. When speed limits androad conditions are such that a vehiclecan be driven at high speeds, make surethe tires are rated for high speedoperation, in excellent condition, and setto the correct cold tire inflation pressurefor the vehicle load.

458

If your vehicle has P225/60R17 size tires, they willrequire inflation pressure adjustment whendriving your vehicle at speeds of 100 mph(160 km/h) or higher. Set the cold inflationpressure to the maximum inflation pressure shownon the tire sidewall, or 38 psi (262 kPa),whichever is lower. See the example following.When you end this high-speed driving, return thetires to the cold tire inflation pressure shownon the Tire and Loading Information label. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 378 andInflation - Tire Pressure on page 456.

Example:

You will find the maximum load and inflationpressure molded on the tire’s sidewall, in smallletters, near the rim flange. It will read somethinglike this: Maximum load 690 kg (1521 lbs)300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.

For this example, you would set the inflationpressure for high-speed driving at38 psi (262 kPa).

Tire Inspection and RotationTires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles(8 000 to 13 000 km).

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate yourtires as soon as possible and check wheelalignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 461and Wheel Replacement on page 465 formore information.

The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve moreuniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. Thefirst rotation is the most important. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 509.

459

When rotating your tires, always use the correctrotation pattern shown here.

Do not include the compact spare tire in your tirerotation.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the frontand rear inflation pressures as shown on theTire and Loading Information label.

Make certain that all wheel nuts are properlytightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications on page 503.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after a time. The wheelcould come off and cause an accident.When you change a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where the wheelattaches to the vehicle. In an emergency,you can use a cloth or a paper towel to dothis; but be sure to use a scraper or wirebrush later, if needed, to get all the rust ordirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire onpage 470.

460

When It Is Time for New Tires

One way to tell when itis time for new tires isto check the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less of treadremaining.

You need a new tire if any of the followingstatements are true:

• You can see the indicators at three or moreplaces around the tire.

• You can see cord or fabric showing throughthe tire’s rubber.

• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, orsnagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.

• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.

• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damagethat cannot be repaired well because of thesize or location of the damage.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matched specific tires foryour vehicle. The original equipment tiresinstalled on your vehicle, when it was new, weredesigned to meet General Motors TirePerformance Criteria Specification (TPC spec)system rating. If you need replacement tires, GMstrongly recommends that you get tires withthe same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehiclewill continue to have tires that are designed togive the same performance and vehicle safety,during normal use, as the original tires.

461

GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers overa dozen critical specifications that impact theoverall performance of your vehicle, includingbrake system performance, ride and handling,traction control, and tire pressure monitoringperformance. GM’s TPC Spec number is moldedonto the tire’s sidewall by the tire manufacturer.If the tires have an all-season tread design,the TPC spec number will be followed by an MSfor mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labelingon page 450 for additional information.

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to losecontrol while driving. If you mix tires ofdifferent sizes, brands, or types (radialand bias-belted tires), the vehicle may nothandle properly, and you could have a



crash. Using tires of different sizes,brands, or types may also cause damageto your vehicle. Be sure to use the correctsize, brand, and type of tires on allwheels. It is all right to drive with yourcompact spare temporarily, as it wasdeveloped for use on your vehicle. SeeCompact Spare Tire on page 486.

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,the wheel rim flanges could developcracks after many miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could fail suddenly, causinga crash. Use only radial-ply tires with thewheels on your vehicle.

462

If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with thosethat do not have a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size, load range, speedrating, and construction type (radial andbias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.

Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed onthe Tire and Loading Information Label. Thislabel is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 378,for more information about the Tire and LoadingInformation Label and its location on your vehicle.

Different Size Tires and WheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are a different sizethan your original equipment wheels and tires,this may affect the way your vehicle performs,including its braking, ride and handlingcharacteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover.Additionally, if your vehicle has electronicsystems such as, anti-lock brakes, traction control,and electronic stability control, the performanceof these systems can be affected.

{CAUTION:

If you add different sized wheels, yourvehicle may not provide an acceptablelevel of performance and safety if tires notrecommended for those wheels areselected. You may increase the chancethat you will crash and suffer seriousinjury. Only use GM specific wheel andtire systems developed for your vehicle,and have them properly installed by a GMcertified technician.

See Buying New Tires on page 461 andAccessories and Modifications on page 400 foradditional information.

463

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the United States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), whichgrades tires by treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. This applies only tovehicles sold in the United States. The grades aremolded on the sidewalls of most passenger cartires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)system does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver, or temporary usespare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motorspassenger cars and light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, they must also conformto federal safety requirements and additionalGeneral Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)standards.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedgovernment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) timesas well on the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly fromthe norm due to variations in driving habits, servicepractices, and differences in road characteristicsand climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’sability to stop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.A tire marked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tireis based on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

464

Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resistance tothe generation of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires must meet underthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levelsof performance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe tires and wheels on your vehicle were alignedand balanced carefully at the factory to give youthe longest tire life and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment and tirebalancing will not be necessary on a regular basis.However, if you notice unusual tire wear or yourvehicle pulling to one side or the other, thealignment may need to be checked. If you noticeyour vehicle vibrating when driving on a smoothroad, your tires and wheels may need to berebalanced. See your dealer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badlyrusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air,replace it (except some aluminum wheels,which can sometimes be repaired). See yourdealer if any of these conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.

Each new wheel should have the sameload-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset andbe mounted the same way as the one it replaces.

465

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheelbolts, or wheel nuts, replace them only withnew GM original equipment parts. This way, youwill be sure to have the right wheel, wheelbolts, and wheel nuts for your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels,wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehiclecan be dangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of your vehicle,make your tires lose air and make youlose control. You could have a collision inwhich you or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,and wheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brake cooling,speedometer or odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle groundclearance, and tire or tire chain clearanceto the body and chassis.

See Changing a Flat Tire on page 470 for moreinformation.

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You cannot know how it hasbeen used or how far it has been driven. Itcould fail suddenly and cause a crash. Ifyou have to replace a wheel, use a newGM original equipment wheel.

466

Tire Chains

{CAUTION:

Do not use tire chains. There is notenough clearance. Tire chains used on avehicle without the proper amount ofclearance can cause damage to thebrakes, suspension or other vehicle parts.The area damaged by the tire chainscould cause you to lose control of yourvehicle and you or others may be injuredin a crash.



Use another type of traction device only ifits manufacturer recommends it for useon your vehicle and tire size combinationand road conditions. Follow thatmanufacturer’s instructions. To help avoiddamage to your vehicle, drive slowly,readjust or remove the device if it iscontacting your vehicle, and do not spinyour vehicle’s wheels. If you do findtraction devices that will fit, install themon the front tires.

467

Accessory InflatorYour vehicle may have an accessory inflator. Withit, you can inflate things like air mattresses andbasketballs, and you can also use it to bring yourtires up to the proper pressure.

The accessory inflator is located in the rearcompartment on the driver’s side. To access theaccessory inflator, do the following:


2. Lift the lever to move the third row rearseatback forward. See Third Row Seaton page 21 for more information.

3. Remove the cover by pulling the lever out.

This symbol is on theaccessory inflatorswitch.

There may be an accessory inflator kit stored inthe rear compartment on the passenger’sside. It includes a 20-foot (6 m) hose with an airpressure gage and nozzle adapters.

{CAUTION:

Inflating something too much can makeit explode, and you or others could beinjured. Be sure to read the inflatorinstructions, and inflate any object onlyto its recommended pressure.

468

To use your accessory inflator system, do thefollowing:

1. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.

2. Attach the appropriate nozzle adapter, ifrequired, to the end of the hose that hasthe pressure gage.

3. Attach that end of the hose to the object youwish to inflate.

4. Remove the protective cap covering theoutlet.

5. Attach the other end of the hose to the outlet.

6. Press the accessory inflator switch. Thelight in the switch will come on to showthe system is working.

If the accessory inflator system does not turn onor the light does not come on, the fuse maybe blown or installed incorrectly. See Fuses andCircuit Breakers on page 497 or see yourdealer for service.

Your accessory inflator will automatically shut offafter about 10 minutes. The light in the switchwill blink. After about one minute you can use thesystem again. Press the switch and the indicatorlight will come on.

Notice: If you run the accessory inflatorlonger than 30 minutes at a time, you coulddamage the inflator. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Run the inflatorfor short periods of time only.

After running the accessory inflator for 30 minutes,wait at least 10 minutes before restarting theaccessory inflator.

To turn off the inflator, do the following:

1. Press the switch and detach the hose, firstfrom the inflated object, then from the outlet.

2. Put the protective cap back on.

3. Place the inflator kit tools in the pouch, andstore in the rear compartment on thepassenger’s side.

To put the cover back on, line up the tabs at thebottom of the cover and put it in place. Push downthe tab to secure the cover.

469

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowout while you aredriving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’stires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it ismuch more likely to leak out slowly. But if youshould ever have a blowout, here are a few tipsabout what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a dragthat pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take yourfoot off the accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain laneposition, and then gently brake to a stop well outof the traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts muchlike a skid and may require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In any rear blowoutremove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Getthe vehicle under control by steering the wayyou want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpyand noisy, but you can still steer. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road if possible.

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to domaintenance or repairs is dangerouswithout the appropriate safety equipmentand training. The jack provided with yourvehicle is designed only for changing aflat tire. If it is used for anything else, youor others could be badly injured or killedif the vehicle slips off the jack. Use thejack provided with your vehicle only forchanging a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use thejacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.

Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheeldamage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn onyour vehicle’s hazard warning flashers. SeeHazard Warning Flashers on page 172 for moreinformation.

470

{CAUTION:

Changing a tire can be dangerous. Thevehicle can slip off the jack and roll overor fall on you or other people. You andthey could be badly injured or even killed.Find a level place to change your tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).

3. Turn off the engine and do not restartwhile the vehicle is raised.

4. Do not allow passengers to remain inthe vehicle.

To be even more certain the vehicle willnot move, you should put blocks at thefront and rear of the tire farthest awayfrom the one being changed. That wouldbe the tire, on the other side, at theopposite end of the vehicle.

When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the followingexample as a guide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks.

The following information will tell you next how touse the jack and change a tire.

471

Removing the Spare Tire and Tools

The tools needed to remove the spare tire arelocated in the storage compartment at the rear ofthe vehicle, on the passenger’s side.

To remove the tools, do the following:


2. Remove the convenience net, if the vehiclehas one.

3. Open the jack storage compartment by liftingthe tab and pulling the cover off.

A. JackB. StrapC. Bracket

D. Wing NutE. Bag and Tools

4. Remove the jack (A) and jacking tools (E) byloosening and then removing the wing nut (D)and bracket (C).

5. Separate the plastic pouch from the jack andremove the jacking tools, including the foldingwrench and extension, from the pouch.

472

The tools you will be using include the jack (A),extension (B), and folding wrench (C).

The compact spare tire is located under the rearof the vehicle. See Compact Spare Tire onpage 486 for more information about the compactspare.

To remove the compact spare tire, do thefollowing:

A. Hoist ShaftB. Hoist AssemblyC. RetainerD. Compact

Spare Tire

E. Extension(Chisel End)

F. Folding Wrench

1. Attach the folding wrench (F) to theextension (E) and insert the chisel end on anangle through the hole in the rear bumperand into the hoist shaft (A).

473

2. Turn the folding wrench counterclockwise tolower the compact spare tire (D) to theground. Continue to turn the wrench so thecompact spare tire can be pulled out fromunder the vehicle.

3. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable toremove the compact spare tire, so it canbe pulled up through the wheel opening.

The hoist is used to store a full-size or a flatroad tire under the vehicle. See Storing aFlat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 483 formore information.

4. Remove the compact spare tire from thecable.

If the compact spare tire will not lower, checkunder the vehicle to see if the tire is hanging looseand the cable end and spring under the wheelplate are missing. If so, the secondary latchsystem is engaged. See Secondary Latch Systemon page 481.

To continue changing the flat tire, see Removingthe Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire onpage 474.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare TireYour vehicle may have aluminum wheels. If so, youwill see exposed stainless steel wheel nuts. Use thewheel wrench to loosen all of the wheel nuts. Do notremove them yet. Or, your vehicle may have steelwheel covers. To remove the wheel covers andwheel nut caps, loosen the plastic nut caps with thewheel wrench in a counterclockwise direction.

474

If needed, you can finish loosening with yourfingers. The plastic nut caps will not come off. Usethe flat end of the wheel wrench and pry along theedge of the cover until it comes off. The edge of thewheel cover could be sharp, so do not try to removeit with your bare hands. Do not drop the cover or layit face down, as it could become scratched ordamaged. Once you have removed the wheelcover, use the following procedure to remove theflat tire and install the spare tire.

1. Loosen the wheelnuts using thefolding wrench,but do notremove them.

Turn the handle counterclockwise about180 degrees, then flip the handle back to thestarting position. This avoids taking thewrench off the lug nut for each turn.

Notice: If your vehicle has wheel locks andyou use an impact wrench to remove the wheelnuts, you could damage the lock nut orwheel lock key. Do not use an impact wrenchto remove the wheel nuts if your vehiclehas wheel locks.

475

Notice: If you use a jack to raise the vehiclewithout positioning it correctly, you coulddamage your vehicle. When raising yourvehicle on a jack, avoid contact with the rearaxle control arms.

Notice: If you position the jack under therocker molding and attempt to raise thevehicle, you could break the molding and/orcause other damage to your vehicle. Alwaysposition the jack so that when the jack head israised, it will fit firmly in the notch locatedinboard from the rocker molding.

A. Front LocationB. Rear Location

2. Near each wheel, there is a notch (A and B)in the vehicle’s frame, inboard of the rockermolding. Position the jack and raise thejack head until it fits firmly into the notch inthe vehicle’s frame nearest the flat tire.Do not raise the vehicle yet.

3. Put the compact spare tire near you.

476

{CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jackedup is dangerous. If the vehicle slips offthe jack you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehicle when it issupported only by a jack.

{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned can damage thevehicle and even make the vehicle fall. Tohelp avoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lift headinto the proper location before raising thevehicle.

4. Attach the folding wrench (A) to the jack (B),and turn the wrench clockwise to raise thejack head approximately 3 inches (7.6 cm).

477

5. Raise the vehicle by turning the foldingwrench clockwise in the jack. Raise thevehicle far enough off the ground so there isenough room for the compact spare tireto fit under the wheel well.

6. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off theflat tire.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the partsto which it is fastened, can make thewheel nuts become loose after a time. Thewheel could come off and cause anaccident. When you change a wheel,remove any rust or dirt from the placeswhere the wheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, you can use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sure to usea scraper or wire brush later, if needed, toget all the rust or dirt off.

478

7. Remove any rust ordirt from the wheelbolts, mountingsurfaces and sparewheel.

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.If you do, the nuts might come loose.Your wheel could fall off, causing aserious accident.

8. Install the compactspare tire and putthe wheel nuts backon with therounded end of thenuts toward thewheel.

Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel isheld against the hub.

479

9. Lower the vehicle by attaching the foldingwheel wrench to the jack and turning thewrench counterclockwise. Lower thejack completely.

{CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause the wheelto come loose and even come off. Thiscould lead to an accident. Be sure to usethe correct wheel nuts. If you have toreplace them, be sure to get new GMoriginal equipment wheel nuts. Stopsomewhere as soon as you can and havethe nuts tightened with a torque wrench tothe proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 503for wheel nut torque specification.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts canlead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenlytighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequenceand to the proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 503 forthe wheel nut torque specification.

480

10. Tighten the wheelnuts firmly in acrisscross sequence,as shown.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on yourcompact spare. If you try to put a wheel coveron the compact spare, you could damagethe cover or the spare.

11. Do not try to put a wheel cover on thecompact spare tire. It will not fit. Storethe wheel cover securely in the rear of thevehicle until you have the flat tire repaired orreplaced.

Secondary Latch SystemYour vehicle may have an underbody-mounted tirehoist assembly equipped with a secondary latchsystem. It is designed to stop a tire from suddenlyfalling off your vehicle if the cable holding thespare tire is damaged. For the secondary latch towork, the tire must be stowed with the valvestem pointing down.

Your vehicle uses the underbody tire hoistassembly to store either the compact spare or aflat road tire. See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire andTools on page 483 for instructions on storingthe spare or flat tire correctly.

{CAUTION:

Before beginning this procedure read allthe instructions. Failure to read and followthe instructions could damage the hoistassembly and you and others could gethurt. Read and follow the instructionslisted next.

481

{CAUTION:

Someone standing too close during theprocedure could be injured by the jack. Ifthe spare tire does not slide off the jackcompletely, make sure no one is behindyou or on either side of you as you pullthe jack out from the spare.

To release the spare tire from the secondary latch,do the following:

1. Place the jack under the vehicle, ahead of therear bumper. Position the center lift point ofthe jack under the center of the compactspare tire.

2. Turn the folding wrench clockwise to raise thejack until it lifts the secondary latch deviceunder the wheel plate.

482

3. Keep raising the jack until the compact sparetire stops moving upward and is held firmly inplace. This lets you know that the secondarylatch has released.

4. Lower the jack by turning the folding wrenchcounterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack untilthe compact spare tire is resting on thefolding wrench.

5. Grasp the compact spare tire with both handsand pull it out from under the vehicle.

6. Reach under the vehicle and remove thefolding wrench and jack.

Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon asyou can. You will not be able to store a spare orflat tire using the hoist assembly until it hasbeen repaired or replaced.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire andTools

{CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipmentin the passenger compartment of thevehicle could cause injury. In a suddenstop or collision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these in theproper place.

483

Storing the Flat or Spare Tire

{CAUTION:

The underbody-mounted spare tire needsto be stored with the valve stem pointingdown. If the spare tire is stored with thevalve stem pointing upwards, itssecondary latch will not work properlyand the spare tire could loosen andsuddenly fall from your vehicle. If thishappened when your vehicle was beingdriven, the tire might contact a person oranother vehicle, causing injury and, ofcourse, damage to itself as well. Be surethe underbody-mounted spare tire isstored with its valve stem pointing down.

To store the spare tire, do the following:

1. Lay the tire near the rear of the vehicle withthe valve stem down.

2. Remove the small center cap by tapping theback of the cap with the extension of theshaft, if the vehicle has aluminum wheels.

3. Slide the cable retainer through the center ofthe wheel and start to raise the tire.Make sure the retainer is fully seated acrossthe underside of the wheel.

4. When the tire is almost in the stored position,turn the tire so the valve is towards the rear ofthe vehicle.This will help when you check and maintaintire pressure in the spare.

5. Raise the tire fully against the underside ofthe vehicle. Continue turning the foldingwrench until you feel more than two clicks.This indicates that the compact sparetire is secure and the cable is tight. The sparetire hoist cannot be overtightened.

484

6. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push,pull (A), and then try to turn (B) the tire. If thetire moves, use the folding wrench totighten the cable.

Storing the Tools

A. StrapB. Bag and ToolsC. Jack

Put back all tools as they were stored in the jackstorage compartment and put the compartmentcover back on.

485

To replace the cover, line up the tabs on the rightof the cover with the slots in the cover opening.Push the cover in place and push down the tab sothat it rests in the groove. This secures thecover in place.

Store the center cap or the plastic bolt-on wheelcovers until a full size tire is put back on thevehicle. When you replace the compact spare witha full-size tire, reinstall the bolt-on wheel coversor the center cap. Hand-tighten them overthe wheel nuts, using the folding wrench.

Compact Spare TireAlthough the compact spare tire was fully inflatedwhen the vehicle was new, it can lose air aftera time. Check the inflation pressure regularly. Itshould be 60 psi (420 kPa).

After installing the compact spare on the vehicle,stop as soon as possible and make sure thespare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spareis made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph(105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles(5 000 km), so you can finish your trip and havethe full-size tire repaired or replaced at yourconvenience.

Of course, it is best to replace the spare with afull-size tire as soon as possible. The spare tire willlast longer and be in good shape in case it isneeded again.

Notice: When the compact spare is installed,do not take your vehicle through an automaticcar wash with guide rails. The compactspare can get caught on the rails. That candamage the tire and wheel, and maybeother parts of your vehicle.

Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.

And do not mix the compact spare tire orwheel with other wheels or tires. They will not fit.Keep the spare tire and its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compactspare. Using them can damage your vehicleand can damage the chains too. Do not use tirechains on your compact spare.

486

Appearance Care

Cleaning the Inside of Your VehicleYour vehicle’s interior will continue to look itsbest if it is cleaned often. Although not alwaysvisible, dust and dirt can accumulate on yourupholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming isrecommended to remove particles from yourupholstery. It is important to keep your upholsteryfrom becoming and remaining heavily soiled.Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes ofheat that could cause stains to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may require more frequentcleaning. Use care because newspapers andgarments that transfer color to your homefurnishings may also transfer color to yourvehicle’s interior.

When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only usecleaners specifically designed for the surfacesbeing cleaned. Permanent damage may resultfrom using cleaners on surfaces for whichthey were not intended. Use glass cleaner only onglass. Remove any accidental over-spray fromother surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners whencleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, youcould scratch the glass and/or cause damage tothe rear window defogger. When cleaning theglass on your vehicle, use only a soft cloth andglass cleaner.

Many cleaners contain solvents that may becomeconcentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safetyinstructions on the label. While cleaning yourvehicle’s interior, maintain adequate ventilation byopening your vehicle’s doors and windows.

Dust may be removed from small buttons andknobs using a small brush with soft bristles.

487

Your GM dealer has a product for cleaning yourvehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary,you can also obtain a product from your GM dealerto remove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.

Do not clean your vehicle using the followingcleaners or techniques:• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to

remove a soil from any interior surface.• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage to

your vehicle’s interior surfaces.• Never apply heavy pressure or rub

aggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use ofheavy pressure can damage your interior anddoes not improve the effectiveness of soilremoval.

• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundrydetergents or dishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too much soap will leave aresidue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt. Forliquid cleaners, about 20 drops per gallon(3.78 L) of water is a good guide.

• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery whilecleaning.

• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may resultfrom the use of many organic solvents such asnaptha, alcohol, etc.

Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a soft brushattachment frequently to remove dust and loosedirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar inthe nozzle may only be used on floor carpet andcarpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to removethem first with plain water or club soda. Beforecleaning, gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of the following techniques:

• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soilwith a paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb intothe paper towel until no more can beremoved.

• For solid dry soils: remove as much aspossible and then vacuum.

488

To clean, use the following instructions:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth withwater or club soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gentlyrub toward the center. Continue cleaning,using a clean area of the cloth each time itbecomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until thecleaning cloth remains clean.

5. If the soil is not completely removed, use amild soap solution and repeat the cleaningprocess that was used with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabriccleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When acommercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to beused, test a small hidden area for colorfastnessfirst. If the locally cleaned area gives anyimpression that a ring formation may result, cleanthe entire surface.

After the cleaning process has been completed, apaper towel can be used to blot excess moisturefrom the fabric or carpet.

LeatherA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mild soapsolution can be used. Allow the leather to drynaturally. Do not use heat to dry. Never use steamto clean leather. Never use spot lifters or spotremovers on leather. Many commercial leathercleaners and coatings that are sold to preserveand protect leather may permanently changethe appearance and feel of your leather and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never useshoe polish on your leather.

489

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and OtherPlastic SurfacesA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with amild soap solution can be used to gently removedust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removerson plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserve and protectsoft plastic surfaces may permanently change theappearance and feel of your interior and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products may increase gloss onyour instrument panel. The increase in glossmay cause annoying reflections in the windshieldand even make it difficult to see through thewindshield under certain conditions.

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If youdo, it may severely weaken them. In acrash, they might not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean safety beltsonly with mild soap and lukewarm water.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. Duringvery cold, damp weather frequent application maybe required. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 518.

490

Washing Your VehicleThe paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty,depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.

The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is tokeep it clean by washing it often with lukewarmor cold water.

Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of thesun. Use a car washing soap. Do not usestrong soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure torinse the vehicle well, removing all soapresidue completely. GM-approved cleaningproducts can be obtained from your dealer. SeeVehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 495.Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleumbased, or that contain acid or abrasives. Allcleaning agents should be flushed promptly andnot allowed to dry on the surface, or theycould stain. Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surfacescratches and water spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water toenter the vehicle.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth anda car washing soap to clean exterior lampsand lenses. Follow instructions under WashingYour Vehicle on page 491.

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicleby hand may be necessary to remove residuefrom the paint finish. GM-approved cleaningproducts can be obtained from your dealer. SeeVehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 495.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish may damage it. Use only non-abrasivewaxes and polishes that are made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.

The vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish. The clearcoat gives more depth and glossto the colored basecoat. Always use waxesand polishes that are non-abrasive and made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

491

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride andother salts, ice melting agents, road oil andtar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., can damage the vehicle’sfinish if they remain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, usenon-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,weather, and chemical fallout that can take theirtoll over a period of years. To help keep thepaint finish looking new, keep the vehicle in agarage or covered whenever possible.

Windshield, Backglass, and WiperBladesIf the windshield is not clear after using thewindshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax, sap or other material maybe on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with afull-strength glass cleaning liquid. The windshieldis clean if beads do not form when you rinse itwith water.

Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiperblades and affect their performance. Cleanthe blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soakedin full-strength windshield washer solvent. Thenrinse the blade with water.

Check the wiper blades and clean them asnecessary; replace blades that look worn.

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated WheelsYour vehicle may have either aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean clothwith mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft cleantowel. A wax may then be applied.

Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, orcleaners that contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, you could damage thesurface of the wheel(s). The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Useonly GM-approved cleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

492

The surface of these wheels is similar to thepainted surface of your vehicle. Do not use strongsoaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasivecleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaningbrushes on them because you could damagethe surface. Do not use chrome polish onaluminum wheels.

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminumwheels could damage the wheels. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.

Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels,but avoid any painted surface of the wheel, andbuff off immediately after application.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle through anautomatic car wash that has silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes, you could damagethe aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. Therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Never drive a vehicle equipped with aluminumor chrome-plated wheels through anautomatic car wash that uses silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes.

Do not take your vehicle through an automatic carwash that has silicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. These brushes can also damage thesurface of these wheels.

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tirecleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on your vehicle may damage thepaint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off any oversprayfrom all painted surfaces on your vehicle.

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metalrepair or replacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosion material to partsrepaired or replaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts willprovide the corrosion protection while maintainingthe warranty.

493

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches inthe finish should be repaired right away. Baremetal will corrode quickly and may develop intomajor repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired withtouch-up materials available from your GM dealer.Larger areas of finish damage can be correctedin your GM dealer’s body and paint shop.

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal anddust control can collect on the underbody. If theseare not removed, corrosion and rust can developon the underbody parts such as fuel lines,frame, floor pan, and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush these materials from theunderbody with plain water. Clean any areas wheremud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in closeareas of the frame should be loosened before beingflushed. Your dealer or an underbody car washingsystem can do this for you.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions cancreate a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants canfall upon and attack painted surfaces on thevehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GMwill repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfacesof new vehicles damaged by this fallout conditionwithin 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) ofpurchase, whichever occurs first.

494

Vehicle Care/Appearance MaterialsDescription Usage

Polishing ClothWax-Treated

Interior and exteriorpolishing cloth.

Tar and Road OilRemover

Removes tar, road oil,and asphalt.

Chrome Cleaner andPolish

Use on chrome orstainless steel.

White Sidewall TireCleaner

Removes soil and blackmarks from whitewalls.

Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,smoke and fingerprints.

Chrome and Wire WheelCleaner

Removes dirt and grimefrom chrome wheels andwire wheel covers.

Finish Enhancer

Removes dust,fingerprints, and surfacecontaminants. Spray onand wipe off.

Description Usage

Swirl Remover PolishRemoves swirl marks, finescratches, and other lightsurface contamination.

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratchesand protects finish.

Foaming Tire Shine LowGloss

Cleans, shines, andprotects in one step. Nowiping necessary.

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foamingshampoo. Cleans andlightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.

Spot Lifter

Quickly removes spotsand stains from carpets,vinyl, and clothupholstery.

Odor EliminatorOdorless spray odoreliminator used on fabrics,vinyl, leather and carpet.

495

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. Itappears on a plate in the front corner of theinstrument panel, on the driver’s side. You can seeit if you look through the windshield from outsideyour vehicle. The VIN also appears on theCertification/Tire and Service Parts labels and thecertificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in the VIN is the enginecode. This code will help you identify your vehicle’sengine, specifications, and replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification LabelYou will find this label on the inside of the glovebox. It is very helpful if you ever need to orderparts. On this label, you will find the following:

• VIN

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and special equipment

Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical Equipment

Notice: Do not add anything electrical to yourvehicle unless you check with your dealerfirst. Some electrical equipment can damageyour vehicle and the damage would notbe covered by your warranty. Some add-onelectrical equipment can keep othercomponents from working as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery,even if your vehicle is not operating.

496

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to add anything electrical to yourvehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 91.

Headlamp WiringThe headlamp wiring is protected by four internalfuses in the underhood fuse block. An electricaloverload will cause the lamps to go on and off, orin some cases to remain off. If this happens,have your headlamp wiring checked right away.

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by aninternal fuse in the underhood fuse block. Ifthe motor overheats due to heavy snow, etc., thewiper will stop until the motor cools. If theoverload is caused by some electrical problem, besure to get it fixed.

The rear washer pump is controlled by a relaylocated in the engine compartment, behindthe windshield washer fluid reservoir. The rearwiper motor is protected by a fuse located in theinstrument panel fuse block.

Power Windows and Other PowerOptionsCircuit breakers in the instrument panel fuse panelprotect the power windows and other poweraccessories. When the current load is too heavy,the circuit breaker opens and closes, protectingthe circuit until the problem is fixed.

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicle are protectedfrom short circuits by a combination of fuses,circuit breakers, and fusible thermal links.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. Ifthe band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one ofthe identical size and rating.

497

If you ever have a problem on the road and do nothave a spare fuse, you can borrow one that hasthe same amperage or use one of the spare fusesin the underhood fuse block. Just pick somefeature of your vehicle that you can get alongwithout, like the radio or cigarette lighter, and useits fuse if it is the right amperage. Replace itas soon as you can.

There are two fuse blocks in your vehicle, theinstrument panel fuse block and the underhoodfuse block.

Instrument Panel Fuse BlockThe instrument panel fuse block is located at theright end of the instrument panel, on thepassenger’s side of the vehicle. Open the frontpassegner’s door, and remove the cover, toaccess the fuse block.

Your vehicle may not have all of the fuses listed.

498

Fuses Usage1 Trunk, Door Locks2 Electronic Level Control3 Rear Wiper4 Radio, DVD Player5 Interior Lamps6 OnStar®

7 Keyless Entry Module

8 Cluster, Heating, Ventilation, AirConditioning

9 Cruise Switch10 Steering Wheel Illumination11 Power Mirror12 Stoplamp, Turn Lamps13 Heated Seats14 Blank15 Electronic Level Control16 Heated Mirror

17 Center High-Mounted Stoplamp,Back-up Lamps

18 Blank19 Canister Vent Solenoid20 Park Lamps

Fuses Usage21 Power Sliding Door22 Blank23 Blank24 Left Power Sliding Door25 Right Power Sliding Door

Relays Usage26 Blank27 Blank28 Park Lamps, Taillamps29 Retained Accessory Power30 Rear Defog

PLR Fuse Puller

CircuitBreakers

Usage

31 Power Seats32 Power Window

499

Underhood Fuse BlockThe underhood fuse block is located in the engine compartment. For more information on location seeEngine Compartment Overview on page 410.

Your vehicle may not have all the fuses listed.

500

Fuses Usage1 Right High-Beam2 Fuel Pump3 Diode

BLANK Not UsedBLANK Not Used

4 Left High-BeamBLANK Not UsedBLANK Not UsedBLANK Not Used

5 Not Used6 Air Conditioning Clutch7 Horn8 Left Low-Beam

9 Powertrain Control Module,Electronic Throttle Control

10 Not Used11 Transmission Solenoid12 Right Low-Beam

Fuses Usage13 Anti-lock Brake System14 Powertrain Control Module Ignition15 Electronic Ignition16 Fuel Injector

17 Climate Control, RPA, CruiseControl

18 Electronic Throttle Control19 Engine Sensor, Evaporator20 Airbag21 Not Used22 Not Used23 Auxiliary Power24 Front Windshield Washer25 AC/DC Inverter26 Rear Blower27 Front Blower28 Front Windshield Wiper

501

J-Case Fuses UsagePLR Fuse Puller29 Fan 130 Starter Solenoid31 Anti-lock Brake System Motor32 Blank33 Fan 234 Front Blower High35 Battery Main 336 Rear Defogger37 Battery Main 238 Spare

Relays UsageRUN RLY StarterLO BEAM Low-Beam

FUEL PUMP Fuel PumpHORN Horn

AC/CLTCH Air Conditioning ClutchHI BEAM High-BeamPWR/TRN Powertrain

WPR2 Wiper 2WPR1 Wiper 1FAN 1 Fan 1CRNK Crank

IGN MAIN Ignition MainFAN2 Fan 2FAN3 Fan 3

BLANK Not Used

502

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric measurements. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 518 for more information.

Capacities and Specifications

ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a

For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant caution label located

under the hood. See your dealer for moreinformation.

Automatic Transaxle — Pan Removal and Replacement 7.4 qt 7.0 LCooling System

3.9L Engine Front Climate Controls Only 10.77 qt 10.2 L3.9L Engine with Rear Climate Controls 12.11 qt 11.55 L

Engine Oil with Filter 4.0 qt 3.8 LFuel Capacity 25.1 gal 95.0 L

Wheel Nut Torque 100 ft lb 140 YAll capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transaxle Spark Plug Gap

3.9L V6 1 Automatic 0.040 in (1.1 mm)

503

✍ NOTES

504

Maintenance Schedule ................................ 506Introduction ............................................... 506Maintenance Requirements ........................ 506Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 506Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 507Scheduled Maintenance ............................. 509Additional Required Services ..................... 512Maintenance Footnotes .............................. 513

Owner Checks and Services ..................... 514At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 515At Least Once a Month ............................. 515At Least Once a Year ............................... 516Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ........ 518Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ... 520Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 521Maintenance Record .................................. 522

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

505

Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper leveland change as recommended.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? ThePlan supplements your new vehicle warranties.See your Warranty and Owner Assistance bookletor your dealer for details.

Maintenance Requirements

Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, replacement parts, andrecommended fluids and lubricants asprescribed in this manual are necessary tokeep your vehicle in good working condition.Any damage caused by failure to followscheduled maintenance may not be covered bywarranty.

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keepyour vehicle in good working condition, but alsohelps the environment. All recommendedmaintenance is important. Improper vehiclemaintenance can even affect the quality of the airwe breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrongtire inflation can increase the level of emissionsfrom your vehicle. To help protect our environment,and to keep your vehicle in good condition, besure to maintain your vehicle properly.

506

Using the Maintenance ScheduleWe at General Motors want to help you keep yourvehicle in good working condition. But we donot know exactly how you will drive it. You maydrive very short distances only a few times a week.Or you may drive long distances all the time invery hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehiclein making deliveries. Or you may drive it towork, to do errands, or in many other ways.

Because of all the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs vary. You mayneed more frequent checks and replacements. Soplease read the following and note how youdrive. If you have any questions on how to keepyour vehicle in good condition, see your GMGoodwrench® dealer.

This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo withinrecommended limits. You will find these limitson the Tire and Loading Information label.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 378.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces withinlegal driving limits.

• use the recommended fuel. See GasolineOctane on page 402.

The services in Scheduled Maintenance onpage 509 should be performed when indicated.See Additional Required Services on page 512 andMaintenance Footnotes on page 513 for furtherinformation.

507

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on avehicle can be dangerous. In trying to dosome jobs, you can be seriously injured.Do your own maintenance work only ifyou have the required know-how and theproper tools and equipment for the job. Ifyou have any doubt, see your GMGoodwrench® dealer to have a qualifiedtechnician do the work. See Doing YourOwn Service Work on page 401.

Some maintenance services can be complex. So,unless you are technically qualified and havethe necessary equipment, you should have yourGM Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.

When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer foryour service needs, you will know that GM-trainedand supported service technicians will performthe work using genuine GM parts.

If you want to purchase service information, seeService Publications Ordering Information onpage 544.

Owner Checks and Services on page 514 tells youwhat should be checked, when to check it, andwhat you can easily do to help keep your vehicle ingood condition.

The proper replacement parts, fluids, andlubricants to use are listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 518 and NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts on page 520.When your vehicle is serviced, make sure theseare used. All parts should be replaced and allnecessary repairs done before you or anyone elsedrives the vehicle. We recommend the use ofgenuine GM parts.

508

Scheduled MaintenanceWhen the CHANGE OIL SOON message comeson, it means that service is required for yourvehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon aspossible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It ispossible that, if you are driving under the bestconditions, the engine oil life system maynot indicate that vehicle service is necessary forover a year. However, your engine oil andfilter must be changed at least once a year and atthis time the system must be reset. Your GMGoodwrench® dealer has GM-trained servicetechnicians who will perform this work usinggenuine GM parts and reset the system.

If the engine oil life system is ever resetaccidentally, you must service your vehicle within3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service.Remember to reset the oil life system wheneverthe oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System onpage 414 for information on the Engine Oil LifeSystem and resetting the system.

When the CHANGE OIL SOON message appears,certain services, checks, and inspections arerequired. Required services are described in thefollowing for “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.”Generally, it is recommended that your firstservice be Maintenance I, your second service beMaintenance II, and that you alternateMaintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter.However, in some cases, Maintenance II may berequired more often.

509

Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if theCHANGE OIL SOON message comes on within10 months since the vehicle was purchasedor Maintenance II was performed.

Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if theprevious service performed was Maintenance I.Always use Maintenance II whenever the messagecomes on 10 months or more since the lastservice or if the message has not come on at allfor one year.

Scheduled MaintenanceService Maintenance I Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 411. Reset oil life system.See Engine Oil Life System on page 414. An Emission Control Service. • •

Lubricate chassis components. See footnote #. • •Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (k). • •Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 416. See footnote (g). •

Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 459 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month onpage 515.

• •

Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid asneeded. • •

510

Scheduled Maintenance (cont’d)Service Maintenance I Maintenance II

Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” inthis section. • •

Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •Check transaxle fluid level and add fluid as needed. •Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (l). •Inspect throttle system. See footnote (j). •

511

Additional Required ServicesThe following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicatedmiles (kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Inspect fuel system for damage orleaks. • • • • • •

Inspect exhaust system for loose ordamaged components. • • • • • •

Replace engine air cleaner filter. SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 416. • • •

Change automatic transaxle fluid andfilter (severe service). See footnote (h). • • •

Change automatic transaxle fluid andfilter (normal service). •

Replace spark plugs and inspect sparkplug wires. An Emission ControlService.

•

Engine cooling system service(or every five years, whichever occursfirst). An Emission Control Service. Seefootnote (i).

•

Inspect engine accessory drive belt.An Emission Control Service. Seefootnote (m).

•

512

Maintenance Footnotes# Lubricate the suspension, steering linkage,transaxle shift linkage, and the underbody contactpoints and linkage.

(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses forproper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors forsurface condition. Inspect other brake parts,including calipers, parking brake, etc. Checkparking brake adjustment.

(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension andsteering system for damaged, loose, or missingparts, signs of wear or lack of lubrication. Inspectpower steering lines and hoses for properhook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.

(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replacedif they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated.Inspect all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace withgenuine GM parts as needed. To help ensureproper operation, a pressure test of the coolingsystem and pressure cap and cleaning the outsideof the radiator and air conditioning condenser isrecommended at least once a year.

(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear orcracking. Replace wiper blades that appear wornor damaged or that streak or miss areas ofthe windshield.

(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and allyour belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are working properly. Look forany other loose or damaged safety belt systemparts. If you see anything that might keep a safetybelt system from doing its job, have it repaired.Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced. Alsolook for any opened or broken airbag coverings,and have them repaired or replaced. Theairbag system does not need regular maintenance.

(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latchassemblies, secondary latches, pivots, springanchor and release pawl, hood and door hinges,rear folding seats, liftgate hinges, fuel doorhinge, power sliding door cable, and sliding doortrack(s). More frequent lubrication may be requiredwhen exposed to a corrosive environment.Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with aclean cloth will make them last longer, seal better,and not stick or squeak.

(g) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,inspect the filter at each engine oil change.

513

(h) Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter ifthe vehicle is mainly driven under one or more ofthese conditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) orhigher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer towing.− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery

service.

(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. SeeEngine Coolant on page 420 for what touse. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure testthe cooling system and pressure cap.

(j) Check system for interference or binding andfor damaged or missing parts. Replace partsas needed. Replace any components that havehigh effort or excessive wear. Do not lubricateaccelerator or cruise control cables.

(k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system couldindicate a problem. Have the system inspectedand repaired and the fluid level checked. Add fluidif needed.

(l) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,the filter may require replacement more often.

(m) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessivecracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt ifnecessary.

Owner Checks and ServicesThese owner checks and services should beperformed at the intervals specified to help ensurethe safety, dependability, and emission controlperformance of your vehicle. Your GMGoodwrench® dealer can assist you with thesechecks and services.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed atonce. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are addedto your vehicle, make sure they are the properones, as shown in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 518.

514

At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform these underhood checksat each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level and add the proper oil ifnecessary. See Engine Oil on page 411 forfurther details.

Notice: It is important to check your oilregularly and keep it at the proper level. Failureto keep your engine oil at the proper levelcan cause damage to your engine not coveredby your warranty.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and addDEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. SeeEngine Coolant on page 420 for further details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level inthe windshield washer fluid reservoir and add theproper fluid if necessary.

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inflation CheckVisually inspect your vehicle’s tires and make surethey are inflated to the correct pressures. Do notforget to check the spare tire. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 456. Check to make sure thespare tire is stored securely. See Changing a FlatTire on page 470.

Tire Wear InspectionTire rotation may be required for high mileagehighway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life Systemservice notification. Check the tires for wearand, if necessary, rotate the tires. See TireInspection and Rotation on page 459.

515

At Least Once a Year

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If thevehicle moves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and theregular brake. See Parking Brake onpage 137.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and beready to turn off the engine immediately if itstarts.

3. Try to start the engine in each gear. Thevehicle should start only in PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle starts in anyother position, contact your GM Goodwrench®

dealer for service.

Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock ControlSystem Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If thevehicle moves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle. It should be parkedon a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See ParkingBrake on page 137.Be ready to apply the regular brakeimmediately if the vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN,but do not start the engine. Without applyingthe regular brake, try to move the shiftlever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If theshift lever moves out of PARK (P), contactyour GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.

516

Ignition Transaxle Lock CheckWhile parked, and with the parking brake set, tryto turn the ignition to LOCK in each shift leverposition.

• The ignition should turn to LOCK only whenthe shift lever is in PARK (P).

• The ignition key should come out onlyin LOCK.

Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service isrequired.

Parking Brake and Automatic TransaxlePark (P) Mechanism Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, yourvehicle could begin to move. You orothers could be injured and propertycould be damaged. Make sure there isroom in front of your vehicle in case itbegins to roll. Be ready to apply theregular brake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

517

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regularbrake, set the parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:With the engine running and transaxle inNEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressurefrom the regular brake pedal. Do this until thevehicle is held by the parking brake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holdingability: With the engine running, shift toPARK (P). Then release the parking brakefollowed by the regular brake.

Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service isrequired.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from the underbody. Takecare to clean thoroughly any areas where mud andother debris can collect.

Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name,part number, or specification may be obtained fromyour dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil which meets GMStandard GM6094M and displaysthe American Petroleum InstituteCertified for Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. GM Goodwrench®

oil meets all the requirements foryour vehicle. To determine theproper viscosity for your vehicle’sengine, see Engine Oil on page 411.

Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolant onpage 420.

Hydraulic BrakeSystem

Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

WindshieldWasher GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Power SteeringSystem

GM Power Steering Fluid (GMPart No. U.S. 89021184, inCanada 89021186).

AutomaticTransaxle

DEXRON®-VI AutomaticTransmission Fluid.

518

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

ChassisLubrication

Chassis Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, inCanada 88901242) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood LatchAssembly,Secondary

Latch, Pivots,Spring Anchor,

andRelease Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, inCanada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Usage Fluid/LubricantHood and DoorHinges, RearFolding Seat,

Fuel DoorHinge, Liftgate

Hinges andPower SlidingDoor Cable

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Sliding DoorTrack

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, inCanada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

WeatherstripConditioning

Weatherstrip Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770, inCanada 10953518) or DielectricSilicone Grease (GM Part No. U.S.12345579, in Canada 992887).

519

Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from yourdealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco® Part NumberEngine Air Cleaner/Filter 15222510 —Engine Oil Filter 89017342 PF61Spark Plugs 12591131 41-100Windshield Wiper Blades

Driver’s Side — 22.0 inches (55.0 cm) 12335833 —Passenger’s Side — 24.0 inches (60.0 cm) 12335834 —Rear — 16.0 inches (40.0 cm) 15192147 —

520

Engine Drive Belt Routing

3.9L V6 Engine

521

Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed theservice, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements onpage 506. Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 514 can be added on thefollowing record pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or

Maintenance II Services Performed

522

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



523

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



524

Customer Assistance and Information ....... 526Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 526Online Owner Center ................................. 529Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users .......................... 530Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 530GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 531Roadside Assistance Program ................... 532Courtesy Transportation ............................. 535Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data

Recorders .............................................. 537Collision Damage Repair ........................... 538

Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 543Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government ..................... 543Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government ............................ 543Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ...................................... 543Service Publications Ordering

Information ............................................. 544

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

525

Customer Assistance andInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are importantto your dealer and to Buick. Normally, anyconcerns with the sales transaction or theoperation of your vehicle will be resolved by yourGM dealer’s sales or service departments.Sometimes, however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandings can occur.If your concern has not been resolved to yoursatisfaction, the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a memberof dealership management. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level. If the matterhas already been reviewed with the sales,service, or parts manager, contact the owner ofthe dealership or the general manager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member ofdealership management, it appears your concerncannot be resolved by the dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., contact the BuickCustomer Assistance Center by calling1-800-521-7300. In Canada, contact GeneralMotors of Canada Customer CommunicationCentre by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call the toll-free number inorder to give your inquiry prompt attention. Pleasehave the following information available to givethe Customer Assistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number. This is availablefrom the vehicle registration or title, or theplate at the top left of the instrument panel.

• Dealership name and location

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage

When contacting Buick, please remember that yourconcern will likely be resolved at a dealer’sfacility. That is why we suggest you follow StepOne first if you have a concern.

526

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both GeneralMotors and your dealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfied with yournew vehicle. However, in the United States, if youcontinue to remain unsatisfied after followingthe procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, youshould file with the BBB Auto Line Program toenforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of courtprogram administered by the Council of BetterBusiness Bureaus to settle automotive disputesregarding vehicle repairs or the interpretationof the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although youmay be required to resort to this informal disputeresolution program prior to filing a court action,use of the program is free of charge and your casewill generally be heard within 40 days. If you donot agree with the decision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with any other venuefor relief available to you.

You may contact the BBB Auto Line Programusing the toll-free telephone number or write themat the following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states and theDistrict of Columbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage and other factors. GeneralMotors reserves the right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue its participation inthis program.

527

STEP THREE — Canadian Owner: In the eventthat you do not feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following the procedure outlined inSteps one and two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware of its participationin a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration program.General Motors of Canada Limited has committedto binding arbitration of owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle service claims. The programprovides for the review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, and may include aninformal hearing before the arbiter. The programis designed so that the entire dispute settlementprocess, from the time you file your complaintto the final decision, should be completedin approximately 70 days. We believe our impartialprogram offers advantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and freeof charge.

For further information concerning eligibility in theCanadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan(CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.Alternatively you may call the General MotorsCustomer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or you maywrite to the Mediation/Arbitration Program atthe following address. Your inquiry shouldbe accompanied by your Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

528

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Center(United States only)The Owner Center is a resource for your GMownership needs. Specific vehicle information canbe found in one place.

The Online Owner Center allows you to:• Get e-mail service reminders.

• Access information about your specificvehicle, including tips and videos andan electronic version of this owner manual.

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service historyand maintenance schedule.

• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.

• Receive special promotions and privilegesonly available to members.

Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web forupdated information and to register your vehicle.

My GM Canada (Canada only)My GM Canada is a password-protected sectionof gmcanada.com where you can save informationon GM vehicles, get personalized offers, anduse handy tools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable tools and servicesyou will have access to:

− My Showroom: Find and save information onvehicles and current offers in your area.

− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such asaddress and phone number for each ofyour preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.

− My Driveway: Receive service reminders andhelpful advice on owning and maintainingyour vehicle.

− My Preferences: Manage your profile,subscribe to E-News and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GMCanada section within www.gmcanada.com.

529

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing,or speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones(TTYs), Buick has TTY equipment available at itsCustomer Assistance Center. Any TTY user cancommunicate with Buick by dialing:1-800-83-BUICK. TTY users in Canada can dial1-800-263-3830.

Customer Assistance OfficesBuick encourages customers to call the toll-freenumber for assistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail Buick, the letter should beaddressed to:

United States — Customer AssistanceBuick Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33136Detroit, MI 48232-5136

www.Buick.com1-800-521-73001-800-832-8425 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-252-1112Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From Puerto Rico:1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From U.S. Virgin Islands1-800-496-9994Fax Number: 313-381-0022

Canada — Customer AssistanceGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

www.gmcanada.com1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

530

Overseas — Customer AssistancePlease contact the local General MotorsBusiness Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. VirginIslands) — Customer Assistance

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma # 2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram

This program, available to qualified applicants, canreimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipment required foryour vehicle, such as hand controls or awheelchair/scooter lift.

The offer is available for a very limited period oftime from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.For more details, or to determine your vehicle’seligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GMMobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also has a MobilityProgram. Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.

531

Roadside Assistance ProgramIn the U.S. call 1-800-252-1112.

In Canada call 1-800-268-6800.

Service available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

As the proud owner of a new Buick vehicle, youare automatically enrolled in the RoadsideAssistance program. This value-added service isintended to provide you with peace of mind as youdrive in the city or travel the open road.

Who is Covered?Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicleoperator, regardless of ownership. A person drivingthis vehicle without the consent of the owner isnot eligible for coverage.

The following services are provided in the U.S.during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period and,in Canada, during the Base Warranty coverageperiod of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, up toa maximum coverage of $100.

• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for thecustomer to get to the nearest service station(approximately $5 in the U.S. and 10 litresin Canada). Service to provide diesel may berestricted. For safety reasons, propaneand other alternative fuels will not be providedthrough this service.

• Lock-out Service: To ensure security, thedriver must present the vehicle registration andpersonal ID before lock-out service is provided.Lock-out service will be covered at no charge ifyou are unable to gain entry into your vehicle. Ifyour vehicle will not start, Roadside Assistancewill arrange to have your vehicle towedto the nearest authorized dealership. In theU.S., replacement keys made at thecustomer’s expense will be covered within10 miles (16 km).

• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway orHighway: Tow to the nearest dealership forwarranty service or in the event of avehicle-disabling accident. Winch-outassistance when the vehicle is mired in sand,mud, or snow.

532

• Flat Tire Change: Installation of your spare tirein good condition will be covered at no charge.The customer is responsible for the repair orreplacement of the tire if not covered by awarrantable failure.

• Jump Start: No-start occurrences whichrequire a battery jump start will be covered atno charge.

Additional Services for CanadianCustomers• Trip Routing Service: Upon Request,

Roadside Assistance will send you detailed,computer-personalized maps, highlighting yourchoice of either the most direct route or themost scenic route to your destination,anywhere in North America, along with anyhelpful travel information we may havepertaining to your trip. To request this service,please call us toll-free at 1-800-268-6800.We will make every attempt to send yourpersonalized trip routing as quickly as possible,but it is best to allow three weeks before yourplanned departure date. Trip routing requestswill be limited to six per calendar year.

• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: Inthe event of a warranty related vehicledisablement, while en route and over250 kilometres from original point of departure,you may qualify for trip interruption expenseassistance. This assistance covers reasonablereimbursement of up to a maximum of$500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of$50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night)and (C) alternate ground transportation(maximum of $40/day). This benefit is to assistyou with some of the unplanned expense youmay incur while waiting for your vehicle to berepaired.Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts anda copy of the repair order are required.Once authorization has been given, youradvisor will help you make any necessaryarrangements and explain how to claim for tripinterruption expense assistance.

533

• Alternative Service: There may be times,when Roadside Assistance cannot providetimely assistance, your advisor may authorizeyou to secure local emergency road service,and you will be reimbursed up to $100 uponsubmission of the original receipt to RoadsideAssistance.

In many instances, mechanical failures arecovered under Buick’s Bumper-to-Bumperwarranty for U.S. customers, and the duration ofthe Base Warranty Coverage for Canadiancustomers of the new Vehicle Limited Warranty.However, any cost for parts and labor fornon-warranty repairs are the responsibility ofthe driver.

For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,please provide the following to the RoadsideAssistance Representative:

• Your name, home address, and hometelephone number.

• Telephone number of your location.

• Location of the vehicle.

• Model, year, color, and license plate number.

• Odometer reading, Vehicle IdentificationNumber, and delivery date of the vehicle.

• Description of the problem.

While we hope you never have the occasion touse our service, it is added security while travelingfor you and your family. Remember, we areonly a phone call away. U.S. customers call BuickRoadside Assistance: 1-800-252-1112, TTYusers, call 1-888-889-2438, Canadian customerscall 1-800-268-6800.

Buick and General Motors of Canada Limitedreserve the right to limit services or reimbursementto an owner or driver when, in their solediscretion, the claims become excessive infrequency or type of occurrence.

Roadside Assistance is not part of or included inthe coverage provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. Buick and General Motors of CanadaLimited reserve the right to make any changes ordiscontinue the Roadside Assistance programat any time without notification.

534

Towing and Road Service ExclusionsSpecifically excluded from Roadside Assistancecoverage are towing or services for vehiclesoperated on a non-public roadway or highway,fines, impound towing caused by a violationof local, Municipal, State, Provincial, or Federallaw, and mounting, dismounting or changingof snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.

Courtesy TransportationTo enhance your ownership experience, we andour participating dealers are proud to offerCourtesy Transportation, a customer supportprogram for new vehicles.

For warranty repairs during the Bumper-to-Bumper(U.S.) or Base Warranty Coverage period(Canada), provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, interim transportation may be availableunder the Courtesy Transportation program.Several courtesy transportation options areavailable to assist in reducing your inconveniencewhen warranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the NewVehicle Limited Warranty and is available onlyat participating dealers. A separate booklet entitled“Warranty and Owner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicle provides detailedwarranty coverage information.

Scheduling Service AppointmentsWhen your vehicle requires warranty service, youshould contact your dealer and request anappointment. By scheduling a service appointmentand advising your service consultant of yourtransportation needs, your dealer can helpminimize your inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into theservice department immediately, keep driving ituntil it can be scheduled for service, unless,of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is,please call your dealership, let them know this, andask for instructions.

If the dealer requests that you simply drop thevehicle off for service, you are urged to do so asearly in the work day as possible to allow forthe same day repair.

535

Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally be completedwhile you wait. However, if you are unable to wait,GM helps to minimize your inconvenience byproviding several transportation options.Depending on the circumstances, your dealer canoffer you one of the following:

Shuttle ServiceShuttle service is the preferred means of offeringCourtesy Transportation and participatingdealers can provide you with shuttle service to getyou to your destination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includes one-wayor round trip shuttle service within reasonable timeand distance parameters for the dealer’s area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursementIf your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,and public transportation is used as ‘shuttleservice,’ the reimbursement is limited to theassociated shuttle allowance and must besupported by original receipts.

In addition, for U.S. customers, should youarrange transportation through a friend or relative,limited reimbursement for reasonable fuelexpenses may be available. Claim amounts shouldreflect actual costs and be supported by originalreceipts.

Courtesy Rental VehicleYour dealer may arrange to provide you with acourtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rentalvehicle that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for anovernight warranty repair. Rental reimbursementwill be limited and must be supported by originalreceipts. This requires that you sign and complete arental agreement and meet state/provincial, local,and rental vehicle provider requirements.Requirements vary and may include minimum agerequirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc.You are responsible for fuel usage charges andmay also be responsible for taxes, levies, usagefees, excessive mileage, or rental usage beyondthe completion of the repair.

Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicleas a courtesy rental.

536

Additional Program InformationAll program options, such as shuttle service, maynot be available at every dealer. Please contactyour dealer for specific information aboutavailability. All Courtesy Transportationarrangements will be administered by appropriatedealer personnel.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterallymodify, change or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and to resolve allquestions of claim eligibility pursuant to the termsand conditions described herein at its solediscretion.

Vehicle Data Collection and EventData RecordersYour vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, hasa number of sophisticated computer systems thatmonitor and control several aspects of the vehicle’sperformance. Your vehicle uses on-board vehiclecomputers to monitor emission control componentsto optimize fuel economy, to monitor conditions forairbag deployment and, if so equipped, to provideanti-lock braking and to help the driver control thevehicle in difficult driving situations. Some

information may be stored during regular operationsto facilitate repair of detected malfunctions; otherinformation is stored only in a crash event bycomputer systems, such as those commonly calledEvent Data Recorders (EDR).

In a crash event, computer systems, such as theairbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) inyour vehicle may record information about thecondition of the vehicle and how it was operated,such as data related to engine speed, brakeapplication, throttle position, vehicle speed, safetybelt usage, airbag readiness, airbag performance,and the severity of a collision. If your vehicle isequipped with StabiliTrak®, steering performance,including yaw rate, steering wheel angle, and lateralacceleration, is also recorded. This information hasbeen used to improve vehicle crash performanceand may be used to improve crash performance offuture vehicles and driving safety. Unlike the datarecorders on many airplanes, these on-boardsystems do not record sounds, such asconversation of vehicle occupants.

537

To read this information, special equipment isneeded and access to the vehicle or the devicethat stores the data is required. GM will not accessinformation about a crash event or share it withothers other than:

• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if thevehicle is leased, with the consent of thelessee,

• in response to an official request of police orsimilar government office,

• as part of GM’s defense of litigation throughthe discovery process, or

• as required by law.

In addition, once GM collects or receives data,GM may:

• use the data for GM research needs,

• make it available for research whereappropriate confidentiality is to be maintainedand need is shown, or

• share summary data which is not tied to aspecific vehicle with non-GM organizationsfor research purposes.

Others, such as law enforcement, may haveaccess to the special equipment that can read theinformation if they have access to the vehicleor the device that stores the data.

If your vehicle has OnStar®, please check theOnStar® subscription service agreement or manualfor information on its operations and datacollection.

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in a collision and it isdamaged, have the damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the proper equipment andquality replacement parts. Poorly performedcollision repairs will diminish your vehicle’s resalevalue, and safety performance can becompromised in subsequent collisions.

538

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are new parts madewith the same materials and construction methodsas the parts with which your vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GM Collision parts areyour best choice to assure that your vehicle’sdesigned appearance, durability, and safety arepreserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can helpmaintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.

Recycled original equipment parts may also beused for repair. These parts are typically removedfrom vehicles that were total losses in prioraccidents. In most cases, the parts being recycledare from undamaged sections of the vehicle. Arecycled original equipment GM part, maybe an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’soriginally designed appearance and safetyperformance, however, the history of these partsis not known. Such parts are not covered byyour GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered by that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are also available. Theseare made by companies other than GM and maynot have been tested for your vehicle. As a result,these parts may fit poorly, exhibit prematuredurability/corrosion problems, and may not performproperly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket partsare not covered by your GM New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, and any vehicle failure related to suchparts are not covered by that warranty.

Repair FacilityGM also recommends that you choose a collisionrepair facility that meets your needs before youever need collision repairs. Your GM dealermay have a collision repair center with GM-trainedtechnicians and state of the art equipment, orbe able to recommend a collision repair center thathas GM-trained technicians and comparableequipment.

539

Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in your GM vehicle withcomprehensive and collision insurance coverage.There are significant differences in the qualityof coverage afforded by various insurance policyterms. Many insurance policies provide reducedprotection to your GM vehicle by limitingcompensation for damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Some insurancecompanies will not specify aftermarket collisionparts. When purchasing insurance, we recommendthat you assure your vehicle will be repairedwith GM original equipment collision parts. If suchinsurance coverage is not available from yourcurrent insurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company mayrequire you to have insurance that assures repairswith Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer(OEM) parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read your lease carefully, as you may becharged at the end of your lease for poor qualityrepairs.

If an Accident OccursHere is what to do if you are involved in anaccident.• Try to relax and then check to make sure you

are all right. If you are uninjured, make sure thatno one else in your vehicle, or the other vehicle,is injured.

• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help. Donot leave the scene of an accident until allmatters have been taken care of. Move yourvehicle only if its position puts you in danger oryou are instructed to move it by a police officer.

• Give only the necessary and requestedinformation to police and other parties involvedin the accident. Do not discuss your personalcondition, mental frame of mind, or anythingunrelated to the accident. This will help guardagainst post-accident legal action.

• If you need roadside assistance, call GMRoadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 532 for moreinformation.

540

• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know wherethe towing service will be taking it. Get a cardfrom the tow truck operator or write down thedriver’s name, the service’s name, and thephone number.

• Remove any valuables from your vehicle beforeit is towed away. Make sure this includes yourinsurance information and registration if youkeep these items in your vehicle.

• Gather the important information you will needfrom the other driver. Things like name,address, phone number, driver’s licensenumber, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,model and model year, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), insurance company and policynumber, and a general description of thedamage to the other vehicle.

• If possible, call your insurance company fromthe scene of the accident. They will walk youthrough the information they will need. If theyask for a police report, phone or go to the policedepartment headquarters the next day and youcan get a copy of the report for a nominal fee. Insome states/provinces with “no fault” insurancelaws, a report may not be necessary. This isespecially true if there are no injuries and bothvehicles are driveable.

• Choose a reputable collision repair facility foryour vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealeror a private collision repair facility to fix thedamage, make sure you are comfortable withthem. Remember, you will have to feelcomfortable with their work for a long time.

• Once you have an estimate, read it carefullyand make sure you understand what work willbe performed on your vehicle. If you have aquestion, ask for an explanation. Reputableshops welcome this opportunity.

541

Managing the Vehicle Damage RepairProcessIn the event that your vehicle requires damagerepairs, GM recommends that you take an activerole in its repair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take your vehicle there, orhave it towed there. Specify to the facility thatany required replacement collision parts be originalequipment parts, either new Genuine GM partsor recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycledparts will not be covered by your GM vehiclewarranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you mustlive with the repair. Depending on your policylimits, your insurance company may initially valuethe repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss thiswith your repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember if your vehicle isleased you may be obligated to have thevehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even ifyour insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.

If another party’s insurance company is payingfor the repairs, you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on that insurancecompany’s collision policy repair limits, as youhave no contractual limits with that company. Insuch cases, you can have control of the repair andparts choices as long as cost stays withinreasonable limits.

542

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),in addition to notifying General Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may openan investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order arecall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA400 Seventh Street, SW.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects to theCanadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe that yourvehicle has a safety defect, you shouldimmediately notify Transport Canada, in additionto notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defects to GeneralMotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or TransportCanada) in a situation like this, we certainly hopeyou will notify us.

Please call us at 1-800-521-7300, or write:

Buick Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33136Detroit, MI 48232-5136

543

In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosis and repairinformation on engines, transmission, axlesuspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

Transmission, Transaxle, TransferCase Unit Repair ManualThis manual provides information on unit repairservice procedures, adjustments, andspecifications for GM transmissions, transaxles,and transfer cases.

Service BulletinsService Bulletins give technical service informationneeded to knowledgeably service GeneralMotors cars and trucks. Each bulletin containsinstructions to assist in the diagnosis and serviceof your vehicle.

In Canada, the service bulletin reference numbercan be obtained by contacting your General Motorsdealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE(1-800-463-7483). This reference number isneeded to order the service bulletin from Helm, Inc.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $6.00 US + Processing Fee

544

Owner InformationOwner publications are written specifically forowners and intended to provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. The ownermanual will include the Maintenance Schedule forall models.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual,and Warranty Booklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$35.00 US + Processing Fee

Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 US + Processing Fee

Current and Past Model Order FormsTechnical Service Bulletins and Manuals areavailable for current and past model GM vehicles.To request an order form, please specify yearand model name of the vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PMEastern TimeFor Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. onthe World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change without notice andwithout incurring obligation. Allow ample timefor delivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices arequoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents areto make checks payable in U.S. funds.

545

✍ NOTES

546

AAccessories and Modifications ..................... 400Accessory Inflator ........................................ 468Accessory Power Outlet(s) .......................... 191Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle ....................................................... 92Additives, Fuel ............................................ 403Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 496Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 416Air Conditioning .................................. 193, 197Airbag

Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 211Readiness Light ....................................... 210

Airbag Sensing and DiagnosticModule (SDM) .......................................... 537

Airbag System ............................................... 76Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......................... 92How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 84Passenger Sensing System ....................... 86Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ..... 91What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 83What Will You See After an Airbag

Inflates? ................................................. 84

Airbag System (cont.)When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 81Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 79

Antenna, Fixed Mast ................................... 344Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna

System .................................................... 344Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................... 351Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light ....... 215Appearance Care

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 492Care of Safety Belts ................................ 490Chemical Paint Spotting ........................... 494Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .............. 491Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 487Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 488Finish Care .............................................. 491Finish Damage ......................................... 494Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces .................................... 490Leather .................................................... 489Sheet Metal Damage ............................... 493Tires ........................................................ 493Underbody Maintenance ........................... 494Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......... 495

547

Appearance Care (cont.)Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 491Weatherstrips ........................................... 490Windshield, Backglass, and

Wiper Blades ........................................ 492Audio System(s) .......................................... 258

Audio Steering Wheel Controls ................. 341Care of Your CD and DVD Player ............ 343Care of Your CDs and DVDs ................... 343Chime Level Adjustment ........................... 344Fixed Mast Antenna ................................. 344Mobile Digital Media System .................... 319Navigation/Radio System,

see Navigation Manual ......................... 282Radio with CD ......................................... 260Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ................... 314, 316Setting the Time ...................................... 259Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................ 340Understanding Radio Reception ............... 342XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ...... 344

Automatic Door Lock ................................... 109Automatic Transaxle

Fluid ........................................................ 417Operation ................................................. 133

BBattery ........................................................ 437

Electric Power Management ..................... 186Run-Down Protection ............................... 187

Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................... 370Brake

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................. 351Emergencies ............................................ 353Parking .................................................... 137System Warning Light .............................. 214

Brakes ........................................................ 434Braking ....................................................... 350Braking in Emergencies ............................... 353Break-In, New Vehicle ................................. 128Bulb Replacement ....................................... 443

Front Turn Signal, Parking andDaytime Running Lamps ....................... 445

Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 443License Plate Lamps ................................ 447Replacement Bulbs .................................. 447Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and

Back-up Lamps ..................................... 445Buying New Tires ........................................ 461

548

CCalibration ................................................... 228California Fuel ............................................. 403California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 401Canadian Owners ........................................... 3Capacities and Specifications ...................... 503Captain Chairs, Rear ..................................... 16Carbon Monoxide .............. 119, 141, 373, 386Care of

Safety Belts ............................................. 490Your CD and DVD Player ........................ 343Your CDs and DVDs ................................ 343

Cargo Lamp ................................................ 186CD, MP3 ..................................................... 274Chains, Tire ................................................. 467Charging System Light ................................ 213Check

Engine Light ............................................ 217Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 408Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 494Child Restraints

Child Restraint Systems ............................. 55Infants and Young Children ........................ 52Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ..... 61Older Children ........................................... 49Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear

Seat Position .......................................... 69

Child Restraints (cont.)Securing a Child Restraint in the Right

Front Seat Position ................................. 72Where to Put the Restraint ........................ 60

Chime Level Adjustment .............................. 344Cigarette Lighter .......................................... 193Cleaning

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 492Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 491Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 488Finish Care .............................................. 491Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 487Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces .................................... 490Leather .................................................... 489Tires ........................................................ 493Underbody Maintenance ........................... 494Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 491Weatherstrips ........................................... 490Windshield, Backglass, and

Wiper Blades ........................................ 492Climate Control System ............................... 193

Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ........... 205Dual ......................................................... 197Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 200Rear ............................................... 200, 203

549

Collision Damage Repair ............................. 538Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ................. 45Compact Spare Tire .................................... 486Compass ..................................................... 228Content Theft-Deterrent ............................... 124Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 350Convenience Center .................................... 164Convenience Net ......................................... 163Coolant

Engine Temperature Gage ........................ 217Heater, Engine ......................................... 132

Cooling System ........................................... 426Cruise Control ............................................. 177Cruise Control Light .................................... 221Cupholder(s) ................................................ 158Customer Assistance Information

Courtesy Transportation ........................... 535Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users ......................... 530Customer Assistance Offices .................... 530Customer Satisfaction Procedure .............. 526GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ...... 531Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ..................................... 543Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government .......................... 543

Customer Assistance Information (cont.)Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government .................... 543Roadside Assistance Program .................. 532Service Publications Ordering

Information ........................................... 544

DDaytime Running Lamps/Automatic

Headlamp System .................................... 182Defensive Driving ........................................ 346Delayed Lighting .......................................... 185Delayed Locking .......................................... 108DIC Compass .............................................. 228Disc, MP3 ................................................... 274Doing Your Own Service Work .................... 401Dome Lamp ................................................ 184Door

Automatic Door Lock ................................ 109Delayed Locking ...................................... 108Dual Sliding Doors ................................... 109Locks ....................................................... 106Power Door Locks ................................... 107Power Sliding Door .................................. 112Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ..... 109

550

DriverPosition, Safety Belt ................................... 31

Driver Information Center (DIC) ................... 223DIC Operation and Displays ..................... 224DIC Vehicle Personalization ..................... 249DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 230

DrivingAt Night ................................................... 363City .......................................................... 368Defensive ................................................. 346Drunken ................................................... 347Freeway ................................................... 369Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 371In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 365Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 378Winter ...................................................... 373

Dual Climate Control System ....................... 197DVD

Rear Seat Entertainment System ..... 282, 298

EElectric Power Management ........................ 186Electrical System

Add-On Equipment ................................... 496Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 497Headlamp Wiring ..................................... 497Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................... 498Power Windows and Other Power

Options ................................................. 497Underhood Fuse Block ............................. 500Windshield Wiper Fuses ........................... 497

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ...................................... 416Battery ..................................................... 437Check and Service Engine Soon Light ..... 217Coolant .................................................... 420Coolant Heater ......................................... 132Coolant Temperature Gage ...................... 217

551

Engine (cont.)Drive Belt Routing .................................... 521Engine Compartment Overview ................ 410Exhaust ................................................... 141Oil ........................................................... 411Oil Life System ........................................ 414Overheated Protection Operating Mode ...... 425Overheating ............................................. 423Starting .................................................... 130

Entry Lighting .............................................. 184Event Data Recorders (EDR) ...................... 537Exit Lighting ................................................ 185Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 48Exterior Lamps ............................................ 181

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ................................... 416Finish Damage ............................................ 494Fixed Mast Antenna .................................... 344Flashers, Hazard Warning ........................... 172Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 174Flat Tire ...................................................... 470Flat Tire, Changing ...................................... 470

Flat Tire, Storing ......................................... 483Fluid

Automatic Transaxle ................................. 417Power Steering ........................................ 432Windshield Washer .................................. 433

Folding Tray ................................................ 161Front Console Storage Area ........................ 161Front Reading Lamps .................................. 186Front Turn Signal, Parking and

Daytime Running Lamps .......................... 445Fuel ............................................................ 402

Additives .................................................. 403California Fuel .......................................... 403Filling a Portable Fuel Container .............. 407Filling Your Tank ...................................... 405Fuels in Foreign Countries ....................... 404Gage ....................................................... 222Gasoline Octane ...................................... 402Gasoline Specifications ............................ 402Low Warning Light ................................... 222

FusesFuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 497Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................... 498Underhood Fuse Block ............................. 500Windshield Wiper ..................................... 497

552

GGage

Engine Coolant Temperature .................... 217Fuel ......................................................... 222Speedometer ........................................... 209Tachometer .............................................. 209

Garage Door Opener .......................... 147, 148Gasoline

Octane ..................................................... 402Specifications ........................................... 402

Glove Box ................................................... 158GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .......... 531

HHazard Warning Flashers ............................ 172Head Restraints ............................................ 15Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 497Headlamps

Bulb Replacement .................................... 443Daytime Running Lamps/Automatic

Headlamp System ................................ 182

Headlamps (cont.)Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 174Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 443Headlamps and Sidemarker Lamps .......... 443High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 174On Reminder ........................................... 182Wiper Activated ........................................ 182

Headlamps and Sidemarker Lamps ............. 443Heated Seats ................................................ 10Heater ................................................ 193, 197Highbeam On Light ..................................... 221High-Speed Operation, Tires ........................ 458Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 371Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 371Hood

Checking Things Under ............................ 408Release ................................................... 409

Horn ............................................................ 172How to Use This Manual ................................ 4How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 31

553

IIgnition Positions ......................................... 129Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 52Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 456Instrument Panel

Overview .................................................. 170Instrument Panel (I/P)

Brightness ................................................ 183Cluster ..................................................... 208

Interior Lamps Control ................................. 184

JJump Starting .............................................. 438

KKeyless Entry System ................................... 98Keys ............................................................. 97

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 450Lamps

Battery Run-Down Protection ................... 187Cargo ...................................................... 186Dome ....................................................... 184Electric Power Management ..................... 186Exterior .................................................... 181Front Reading .......................................... 186Interior Control ......................................... 184Rear Reading .......................................... 186

LATCH SystemChild Restraints ......................................... 61

Level Control ............................................... 385License Plate Lamps ................................... 447Liftgate ........................................................ 119Light

Airbag Readiness ..................................... 210Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ............. 215

554

Light (cont.)Brake System Warning ............................. 214Charging System ..................................... 213Cruise Control .......................................... 221Highbeam On .......................................... 221Low Fuel Warning .................................... 222Malfunction Indicator ................................ 217Oil Pressure ............................................. 220Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............ 211Passenger Safety Belt Reminder .............. 210Safety Belt Reminder ............................... 209Security ................................................... 221TCS Warning Light .................................. 216Traction Control System (TCS) Warning ..... 216

LightingDelayed ................................................... 185Entry ........................................................ 184Exit .......................................................... 185

Loading Your Vehicle ................................... 378Lockout Protection ....................................... 109Locks

Automatic Door Lock ................................ 109Delayed Locking ...................................... 108Door ........................................................ 106Lockout Protection ................................... 109

Locks (cont.)Power Door ............................................. 107Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ..... 109

Loss of Control ........................................... 362Low Fuel Warning Light ............................... 222Luggage Carrier .......................................... 162

MMaintenance Schedule

Additional Required Services .................... 512At Each Fuel Fill ...................................... 515At Least Once a Month ............................ 515At Least Once a Year .............................. 516Introduction .............................................. 506Maintenance Footnotes ............................ 513Maintenance Record ................................ 522Maintenance Requirements ...................... 506Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .... 520Owner Checks and Services .................... 514Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....... 518Scheduled Maintenance ........................... 509Using ....................................................... 507Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 506

Malfunction Indicator Light ........................... 217

555

Manual Passenger Seat .................................. 9Memory Seat ................................................ 10Message

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 230Mirrors

Manual Rearview Mirror ........................... 143Outside Convex Mirror ............................. 144Outside Heated Mirrors ............................ 144Outside Power Mirrors ............................. 143

Mobile Digital Media System ....................... 319MP3 ............................................................ 274MyGMLink.com ............................................ 529

NNavigation/Radio System, see Navigation

Manual ..................................................... 282New Vehicle Break-In .................................. 128Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 520

OOdometer .................................................... 209Odometer, Trip ............................................ 209Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 360Oil

Engine ..................................................... 411Pressure Light .......................................... 220

Oil, Engine Oil Life System ......................... 414Older Children, Restraints ............................. 49Online Owner Center ................................... 529OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ........ 145Other Warning Devices ................................ 172Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 200Outlet(s), Accessory Power .......................... 191Outside

Convex Mirror .......................................... 144Heated Mirrors ......................................... 144Power Mirrors .......................................... 143

556

Outside (cont.)Overhead Console .............................. 159, 161Overhead Console Switchbank .................... 188Overheated Engine Protection

Operating Mode ....................................... 425Owner Checks and Services ....................... 514Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3

PPaint, Damage ............................................ 494Park Aid ...................................................... 188Park (P)

Shifting Into ............................................. 138Shifting Out of ......................................... 139

ParkingAssist ....................................................... 188Brake ....................................................... 137Over Things That Burn ............................ 140

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 211Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............... 205Passenger Sensing System ........................... 86Passing ....................................................... 360PASS-Key® III ............................................. 126PASS-Key® III Operation ............................. 126Power

Accessory Outlet(s) .................................. 191Door Locks .............................................. 107Electrical System ..................................... 497Outlet 115 Volt Alternating Current ........... 192Rear Quarter Windows ............................. 123Retained Accessory (RAP) ....................... 130Seat ............................................................ 9Sliding Door ............................................. 112Steering Fluid .......................................... 432Windows .................................................. 122

Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 48Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ......... 109

557

QQuestions and Answers About Safety Belts ...... 30

RRadiator Pressure Cap ................................ 423Radios ........................................................ 258

Care of Your CD and DVD Player ............ 343Care of Your CDs and DVDs ................... 343Navigation/Radio System, see

Navigation Manual ................................ 282Radio with CD ......................................... 260Rear Seat Audio ............................. 314, 316Setting the Time ...................................... 259Theft-Deterrent ......................................... 340Understanding Reception ......................... 342

Rear Climate Control System ............. 200, 203Rear Reading Lamps .................................. 186Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides .................. 45Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ...................... 314, 316Rear Seat Entertainment System ........ 282, 298Rear Seat Operation ..................................... 16Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .............. 42Rear Windshield Washer/Wiper .................... 176Rearview Mirrors ......................................... 143

Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 12Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .......... 518Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 384Remote Keyless Entry System ...................... 98Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ..... 99Removing the Flat Tire and

Installing the Spare Tire ........................... 474Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............ 472Replacement Bulbs ..................................... 447Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government ............................. 543General Motors ........................................ 543United States Government ....................... 543

Restraint System CheckChecking the Restraint Systems ................. 93Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ......................................... 94Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ................ 130Right Front Passenger Position,

Safety Belts ............................................... 41Roadside

Assistance Program ................................. 532Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 378Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 521Running the Engine While Parked ............... 142

558

SSafety Belt

Passenger Reminder Light ....................... 210Pretensioners ............................................. 48Reminder Light ........................................ 209

Safety BeltsCare of .................................................... 490Driver Position ........................................... 31How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 31Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................ 30Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ............... 45Rear Seat Passengers ............................... 42Right Front Passenger Position .................. 41Safety Belt Extender .................................. 48Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 41Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 26Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster .................... 40

Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 509Seats

Captain Chairs ........................................... 16Head Restraints ......................................... 15Heated Seats ............................................. 10Manual Passenger ....................................... 9Memory ..................................................... 10

Seats (cont.)Power Seats ................................................ 9Rear Seat Operation .................................. 16Reclining Seatbacks ................................... 12Third Row Seat ......................................... 21

Secondary Latch System ............................. 481Securing a Child Restraint

Rear Seat Position ..................................... 69Right Front Seat Position ........................... 72

Security Light .............................................. 221Service ........................................................ 400

Accessories and Modifications .................. 400Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle ......................................... 402California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 401Doing Your Own Work ............................. 401Engine Soon Light ................................... 217Publications Ordering Information ............. 544

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 91Setting the Time .......................................... 259Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 493Shifting Into Park (P) ................................... 138Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 139Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 40Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 173Sliding Door, Power ..................................... 112Sliding Doors, Dual ..................................... 109

559

Spare TireAccessory Inflator ..................................... 468Compact .................................................. 486Installing .................................................. 474Removing ................................................ 472Storing ..................................................... 483

Specifications, Capacities ............................ 503Speedometer ............................................... 209StabiliTrak® System ..................................... 355Starting Your Engine ................................... 130Steering ...................................................... 357Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ................... 341Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel .......................... 172Storage Areas ............................................. 158

Convenience Center ................................. 164Convenience Net ..................................... 163Cupholder(s) ............................................ 158Floor Console Storage Area ..................... 161Folding Tray ............................................. 161Glove Box ................................................ 158Luggage Carrier ....................................... 162Overhead Console .......................... 159, 161

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ............... 377Sun Visors .................................................. 123Switchbanks

Overhead Console ................................... 188

TTachometer ................................................. 209Taillamps

Turn Signal, Stoplamps andBack-up Lamps ..................................... 445

TCS Warning Light ...................................... 216Theft-Deterrent, Radio ................................. 340Theft-Deterrent Systems .............................. 123

Content Theft-Deterrent ............................ 124PASS-Key® III .......................................... 126PASS-Key® III Operation .......................... 126

Third Row Seat ............................................. 21Tilt Wheel .................................................... 172Tires ........................................................... 449

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,Cleaning ............................................... 492

Buying New Tires ..................................... 461Chains ..................................................... 467Changing a Flat Tire ................................ 470Cleaning .................................................. 493Compact Spare Tire ................................. 486Different Size ........................................... 463High-Speed Operation .............................. 458If a Tire Goes Flat ................................... 470Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................ 456Inflator, Accessory .................................... 468

560

Tires (cont.)Inspection and Rotation ............................ 459Installing the Spare Tire ........................... 474Removing the Flat Tire ............................. 474Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ......... 472Secondary Latch System ......................... 481Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ..... 483Tire Sidewall Labeling .............................. 450Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 453Uniform Tire Quality Grading .................... 464Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ........... 465Wheel Replacement ................................. 465When It Is Time for New Tires ................. 461

TowingRecreational Vehicle ................................. 384Towing a Trailer ....................................... 386Your Vehicle ............................................. 384

TractionControl System (TCS) .............................. 353Control System Warning Light .................. 216StabiliTrak® System ................................. 355

TransaxleFluid, Automatic ....................................... 417

Transaxle Operation, Automatic ................... 133Trip Odometer ............................................. 209Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................... 173Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................... 173

UUltrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ........ 188Understanding Radio Reception ................... 342Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................... 464Universal Home Remote System ........ 147, 148

Operation ........................................ 149, 154

VVehicle

Control ..................................................... 350Damage Warnings ....................................... 5Loading .................................................... 378Symbols ...................................................... 5

Vehicle Data Collection andEvent Data Recorders .............................. 537

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) .......................................... 496Service Parts Identification Label .............. 496

Vehicle PersonalizationDIC .......................................................... 249

Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 200Visors .......................................................... 123

561

WWarning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 207Warnings

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 230Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 172Other Warning Devices ............................ 172Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5

WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance ..................... 465Different Size ........................................... 463Replacement ............................................ 465

Where to Put the Restraint ............................ 60Windows ..................................................... 121

Power ...................................................... 122Power Rear Quarter ................................. 123

WindshieldBackglass, and Wiper Blades, Cleaning ..... 492Washer .................................................... 175Washer Fluid ........................................... 433Wiper Blade Replacement ........................ 447Wiper Fuses ............................................ 497Wipers ..................................................... 175

Windshield, Rear Washer/Wiper ................... 176Winter Driving ............................................. 373Wiper Activated Headlamps ......................... 182

XXM Radio Messages ................................... 280XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ......... 344

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ............... 506

562

2007 buick terraza owner manual m - gm extended warranty the

Documents